We are just a group of retired spooks that discuss things that you’ll not find anywhere else. It makes us unique. Take a look around. Learn a thing or two.
The following is the full text of the late 1970’s paperback book titled “Someone else is on the moon”, by George Leonard. It is provided here for free in PDF format.
Few people noticed the secret codewords used by our astronauts to describe the moon. Until now, few knew about the strange moving lights they reported.
George H. Leonard, former NASA scientist, fought through the official veil of secrecy and studied thousands of NASA photographs, spoke candidly with dozens of NASA officials, and listened to hours and hours of astronauts' tapes.
Here, Leonard presents the stunning and inescapable evidence discovered during his in-depth investigation:
-Immense mechanical rigs, some over a mile long, working the lunar surface.
-Strange geometric ground markings and symbols.
-Lunar constructions several times higher than anything built on Earth.
-Vehicles, tracks, towers, pipes, conduits, and conveyor belts running in and across moon craters.
Somebody else is indeed on the Moon, and engaged in activities on a massive scale. Our space agencies, and many of the world's top scientists, have known for years that there is intelligent life on the moon.
"An extremely convincing case the moon has life on it - an intelligent race that probably moved in from outside the solar system..." -UFO Report
"Leonard's photos are truly mind-boggling..." -Publisher's Weekly
This is an interesting book. I can tell you that. I believe that I read it back when I was in College. Not that I was assigned books to read, like the rest of my friends. My courses were all heavy mathematics and physics. So to unwind, I would read all sorts of paper-books. And this was one such book.
It’s a great fun read, and he’s a searcher who has stumbled across some uncomfortable truths got got him ridiculed. Well, so what?
To download the book click on the link below…
I am going to put this article in my Type-1 Greys sub index because I really don’t know where else to put it.
This is probably my worst article / post on MM. But it is something that I have to get off my system, and preserve. Thus I present it as is, all in it's own terrible ratty configuration.
If life gives you lemons, you make lemonade.
This post / article discusses what my deactivation procedure was like from my point of view. To an outside observer, I was either lying on the bed thrashing about, or just acting strangely. I will do my best to give the reader a full understanding and the full scope of the experience.
These fuckers had to be shut off. You just don’t deactivate a MAJestic operative without shutting them down. That’s a fact jack.
It’s a difficult thing to relate, and even harder to describe. It also tends to get rather strange at times. But this is what happened. And it is here, recorded for prosperity.
Time to change your switch to "off".
.
My deactivation absolutely required that my probes be mothballed.
This was not an easy task, and it required that I be placed in a secure facility, and treated in a special manner .
This section discusses this procedure in the only way that I know how; from the point of view of the person being deactivated. Because of that, it is confusing and can be misunderstood easily. The reader is reminded that everything that happened is as described from my point of view.
To an outside observer, I was bat-shit crazy.
“Some are born mad, some achieve madness, and some have madness thrust upon 'em.” ― Emilie Autumn, The Asylum for Wayward Victorian Girls
From what I know now, this procedure is very straight forward from the point of view of an outside observer. As such, I will try my best to describe it as such. But in truth, it was anything but easy. This was my mind that they were dealing with. And my perceptions, thoughts, feelings, and memories were involved. Our experiences are colored by all these things, and thus when they are being tampered with, we have a tendency to become disoriented and confused.
Some basic clarification
I was implanted with three groups / clusters of probes.. As a reminder, I was injected with two (x2) “kits” of devices at NAS NASC Pensacola, Florida. And then afterwards I went through a dimensional portal to another place. It was another location and involved another species. That is where I obtained my EBP device.
In total;
EBP – Alien manufacture, and installation.
ELF Kit #1 – MAJestic “kit”. Basic.
ELF Kit #2 – MAJestic “kit”. Advanced with special functions.
Core Kit I probes activated
This process was akin to “waking me up from a long slumber”. Because while I was actively aware of my role during the operation of the Core Core Kit #2 probes, I had forgotten everything related to and concerning the Core Core Kit #1 probes.
I knew, but didn't know. My memories were all very remote and empty. It was like when you opened the door to your house two days before Easter ten years ago. You remember it, but it isn't an "active" memory
To shut me off, and deactivate me, the core Core Kit #1 probes had to be reactivated, and from there, shut down manually, once the Core #2 kit was reset.
There was no easy way to do it.
For over 30 years had passed since I was last active under the probes effects. The physical probes had naturally migrated out of their initial set locations, and I needed to be re-calibrated, and engaged for the new locations of the probes. (In other words, what was once located at the far left of the upper part of my brain, has now moved diagonally towards the back and a little bit to the mid-center.) How to do this was not clean or pleasant.
For me it was hell.
“She’ll be coming around the mountain when she comes…She’ll be coming around the mountain when she comes…She’ll be riding six white horses.She’ll be riding six white horses.When she comes…”-Old Susanna
It began at lights out.
It began with “lights out”.
The lights usually shut down at 11:00 pm, but for some reason, the lights out period started at 9:00 pm. And we all settled down to rest. I tried to rest. As I settled down, everything got still and quiet. I started to drift off to sleep. My brain waves went from Alpha waves, to beta waves. My mind started to quiet down. It was quiet, and peaceful. But just as I began to drift into sleep; into theta waves, I was suddenly jerked up wide awake.
Someone, another inmate perhaps, started singing. This singing was loud and garish. He sang one old song from the days of the California Gold Rush. He sang “Old Susanna”. He wouldn’t let up. After a full five minutes of this, I was wide awake. And, he mercifully stopped.
The California Gold Rush (1848–1855) began on January 24, 1848, when gold was found by James W. Marshall at Sutter's Mill in Coloma, California.
"Oh! Susanna" is a minstrel song by Stephen Foster (1826–1864), first published in 1848. It is among the most popular American songs ever written.
I began to rest again.
And again, as soon as I started to rest and drift off into theta brain wave activity, I was suddenly shaken wide awake. It was the other man singing “Old Susanna”. Again this singing continued for about ten more minutes and then stopped. I was now wide awake. Tired. Grouchy, and irritable. I tried to go back to sleep.
I began to rest again.
And again, no sooner as I started to rest and drift off into theta brain wave activity, I was suddenly shaken wide awake. Again, I listened to the crisp old tune of “Old Susanna”. Again this singing continued for about ten more minutes and then stopped. I stayed wide awake. I stayed tired. I continued to be grouchy, and irritable. Yet, still, I tried to go back to sleep.
The entire night continued like this.
Each time, as the night wore on, I got angrier and angrier.
Now, what one must understand is that I was chosen for the program for my ability to control my emotions. Though my wife might disagree with this appraisal, it was true that I could take a large amount of abuse before I would lash out. So even though I was terribly tired and exhausted, I didn’t do anything about it. I just took the abuse in silence.
Until about at around 4:00 am something snapped.
I snapped into a “state”
I cannot relate the exact mechanics of what transpired.
It reached a point of emotional turmoil, and mental confusion through the accumulation of pressure and the lack of sleep. In any event, at some point in time, my body and mind just snapped. That is the best way that I can describe it.
A feeling of warmth came over me, and I became lucid. I was no longer sleepy, but alert, calm, and entirely pissed.
Pissed, as in "pissed off" and absolutely furiously angry.
I was frosty calm and pissed off in a way that defies description.
I did not at all have a full recall of my Core Core Kit #1 memories. But I did have a recall of specialized training that I picked up somewhere (?).
And that came out in a flood of reactive autonomous movements and gestures. I found myself exercising and limbering up. I immediately went into some old martial arts training that I had taken years ago, and I started to organize all my gear. I made a mental count of everything I owned and this inventory was used for an automatic survival, evasion and escape routine that somehow I had access to.
(How and where did I get this training? I do not recall.)
Now, in case the reader gets confused, it needs to be clearly pointed out that I did not have any kind of formalized military combat training aside from what I experienced in the Navy at NAS NASC Pensacola.
Well, mostly that is…
Aside from one or two specialized para-military training camps in Louisiana. But I put this information here as a full disclosure of my apparent skill sets.I was there because of a"project" that I was involved in. <redacted>
Just because I had cursory training as a “Swamp Rat” did not make me a professional military fighter or combat soldier. I only had the most rudimentary training in these fields.
I was a technical nerd who’s experiences, for the most part, were devoid of any such experiences.
This was a meager amount.
When you watch television and movies, the heroes all have a great deal of skill and experience with knife fighting, martial arts, weaponry and high duration endurance. That is fine for the movies, but I was not trained as a navy SEAL, or a member of DELTA team.
I was more or less a highly technical individual, who through an array of events ended up in this program. I was not, am not, nor will I ever be a combat fighter. Yet, for some reason, this persona; a persona of just such a swarthy fellow, took hold of my very being.
I became that person.
How, and why, I have no idea.
I started to act… peculiarly.
All of this was not my personality.
At least nothing that I would associate with myself for the last three decades.
What was most astounding was that I started yelling in Chinese. Now, today, my Chinese linguistic skills are much better than then. But one must understand that, at that time, I couldn’t tell the difference from between a pair of shoes from a carrot in Chinese. I possessed absolutely zero Chinese linguistic skill.
But yet, I found myself shouting in Chinese. I started to implore the guards for information. I started to ask them what was going on. I did so in Mandarin Chinese!
你为什么这样做呢？我在哪里？做了什么我做错了？
Not that anyone else knew what I was saying. But, for some reason, my automatic reaction; one that I am loathe to recall here, kicked in. It involved a number of automatic behaviors that I automatically started to adopt.
These included a [1] calm composure, [2] the ability to think and reason in certain defined patterns, [3] the ability to speak in Chinese, and [4] the knowledge of what to do and how to handle the circumstances that came before me. It was almost like I was programmed to react in a certain manner under a certain series of events or circumstances.
This concluded until about 6:00 am.
When I finally was able to rest. At that time, the staff surrounding my cell and barracks also shut down and left for home. As they gathered their papers, books and possessions, they commented about the night. They complained about the costs, but also commented as to how unique the experience was.
They were curious about me, and they wanted to find out more as to what I was involved in. They joked about the event, saying to the effect that that was certainly strange and weird. That it was unexpected that I would know and speak Chinese, but that proved that something that they were told was correct. They stated that they would keep me under special care and evaluation until the team arrived from Washington to finish the work.
For me, however, everything was different.
I turned into someone different.
Now, I was someone else. I was like a robot. In truth, I was in-between activation’s. Neither my core Core Kit #1 nor my Core Core Kit #2 probes were apparently activated. But somehow, through stress and situations they were able to induce upon me some kind of repressed reactive persona.
This was unexpected by everyone.
It was certainly unexpected by me.
I had no idea that this stuff was locked away inside my head. It was surprising to the staff at the prison as well. While the doctor and the authorities were apparently told that I would have to be handled in a certain special way, they didn’t believe that anything would actually, really occur. They thought that it would be just nonsense. But sure as the day is bright, the manuals were correct and I snapped into a secondary persona. One that was not to be trifled with.
At this point in time, I was in a “survival” and “protective” persona. (I found myself walking with “direct registering” and operating in a most observant manner. )
Direct Registering
Walking like a feline in a specific prescribed manner designed for silence and readiness. Felines walk in a stalking silent mode where their hind paws fall inside the place of their forepaws, minimizing noise and visible tracks, while ensuring more stable footing.
A different personality.
This was something that I was unaware I possessed, and the only way and place that I could of obtained these skills was during the week-long absence through the dimensional portal on the base years ago. In hindsight, I actually now possessed a total of four modes of operation.
They were;
Normal human
“Survival” and “Protective” Persona
Core Core Kit #1 Activation
Core Core Kit #2 Entanglement with the drone
Lord only knows how many personas I have locked away in my brain.
What did the fucking government do to me? Are there still other personas that are lying dormant ready to be released under a series of aggressive external stimuli? I do not know.
I simply do NOT know.
At this time, I was still quite confused as to what was going on. While I understood where I was and what I was doing there. All my subsequent history related to the US Navy was still a complete blank.
I had no idea about the connection between my incarceration and that of my involvement in the MAJestic USAP program. At that point, I was convinced that it was due to an overly zealous DA, and an unfortunate series of personal events on my behalf.
Turning on the probes
“Courage doesn’t happen when you have all the answers. It happens when you are ready to face the questions you have been avoiding your whole life.”― Shannon L. Alder
I spent the entire day in the cell.
.
I spent the entire day in the cell.
A fore-taste of things to come. Eh?
When it came time for me to eat, I was lead out of my cell by following a special procedure. In this procedure, six guards came to my cell, they opened the door with an elaborate call out procedure, and each one took up a special role. One would call out “Prepare to blow the door”, while another would say “On my count, blow the door”, and another would count “3, 2, 1”. Then they would unlock the door while saying “Blowing the door”. I think all of this was completely unnecessary. But they weren’t taking any chances. When the door was opened, two guards got on both sides of me and grabbed my arms and back collar. Then they led / carried me out of the cell.
They would line up on both sides of the port and formalize the egress procedure so that I would be more easily controlled when they took me from my cell.
.
While I told them this wasn’t necessary, they told me that this procedure was necessary for everyone’s safety and I had just get along with the program. So I shrugged my shoulders and said OK. And thus, I was led to chow hall this way, and returned back to my cell in this matter for reasons of safety for myself and for other inmates.
For most of my evaluation I was brought to mess hall and from it in this manner. But that is not all that was done.
When I arrived in the mess hall, I was placed at a table along the wall, and there, standing along the wall was about fifteen guards. I couldn’t do anything without them subduing me.
But of course, I did nothing. I was not crazy, unwise or stupid. I knew the odds, and why should I do anything anyways? There was no benefit for me. The wisest thing for me to do was to follow the program and track that was established for me to its conclusion.
They also heavily sedated me.
I alone, of all the inmates, was given a glass of orange juice. And that liquid was severely laced with a medicine known as Chlorpromazine.
Thioridazine (Mellaril (DE, BD, ET, ID, BR), Melleril.
It is used in the treatment of schizophrenia.
But it is also used to control people with behavioral problems because of the way it causes the body to react to external stimuli.
It works on a variety of receptors in the central nervous system, producing potent anticholinergic, antidopaminergic, antihistaminic, and antiadrenergic effects. Both the clinical indications and side effect profile of CPZ are determined by the broadness of its action: its anticholinergic properties cause constipation, sedation, and hypotension but also help relieve nausea.
It also has anxiolytic (anxiety-relieving) properties.
Its antidopaminergic properties can cause extrapyramidal symptoms, such as akathisia (restlessness, aka the 'Thorazine shuffle' where the patient walks almost constantly, despite having nowhere to go due to mandatory confinement, and takes small, shuffling steps) and dystonia.
From the moment I drank this orange juice to all subsequent servings, I knew exactly what was going on.
My speech became slurred, and while my mind remained sharp and clear, the ability for me to move my body was severely retarded. For instance, I would want to stand up, but the ability for me to move my legs was severely repressed. Instead, I would just sit there trying to move, but unable to do so.
Chlorpromazine
.
It was not at all a pleasant experience. But rather uncomfortable. I believe that they gave me a rather high dosage of this chemical, and they kept me sedated throughout my evaluation period.
Since I was under an ELF field, I could easily see the cavitation effects while laying on the bed in my cell.
This period of waiting while under the effects of the drug, and being sedated was short lived. After two days, the team of experts arrived from Washington, and my deactivation procedure began.
The truth is that I assumed that they were from Washington, D.C. They could have been from anywhere. What I did know was that they were not local to the state where I was, and thus they had to be flown in from out of state. Their names, and point of origin, as well as their backgrounds are all unknown to me.
Retirement Team flown in
"[UFOs are] considered top secret by intelligence officers of both the Army and the Air Forces." --From a declassified 1949 FBI document from the San Antonio FBI office, to J. Edgar Hoover.
I knew something was “afoot” when I was moved from my upper tier cell, to a (special) first floor cell.
This refers to the knowledge that something is occurring behind the observed scenery, which might directly affect someone or something.
This was cell number 7.
It was a “special” cell.
To an outside observer it was a cell like any other. But this one was quite different. For starters, the wall graffiti was different. In most cells, and wall graffiti involved curse words, stick figures showing genital areas and perhaps a statement about prison life. Like “I’ll be back!”, and “The food here blows”. However, this cell was different.
The graffiti in this cell was unique. Instead of curse words, there were words related to thoughts and actions. For instance, next to the rack was the phrase “Be careful what you say.” And, over the door, were the words that stated “Do nothing stupid.” And near the sink, and the air vent, and the foot of the bed were drawings of three triangles. The drawings showed the triangles lined up in a row.
Three triangles with a line drawn through them.
.
They had kept me heavily sedated on Chlorpromazine because I was apparently unpredictable and dangerous. It was a safety precaution, though I told them repeatedly that I wasn’t going to do anything. The purpose of this cell was to put me into a specially constructed cell that was functionally intended for the ELF decommissioning procedure.
The cell was on the first floor and it was a little different than the others.
One of the problems that I had while the ELF filed was turned on was the heat that was being generated by my body. So this cell had an extra high capacity fan that was used to exhaust the air quickly. It was also grounded as a kind of faraday cage. However, the sink was not properly grounded, and was disconnected from the metal supports due to corrosion. Therefore whenever I went near it I would get a most terrible shock.
Also in this cell were some graffiti and doodles that you would find in any cell. Except this cell had the three triangle nomenclature that I recognized so well. It also had graffiti specifically pointing the locations of the microphone and the closed circuit camera.
Though I didn’t need the graffiti to show me these items.
Perhaps the most notable thing about this particular cell was outside of it. Directly outside the cell was the three embedded triangular feducial markings. If I were to stand up straight at the door to the cell, I would be able to focus directly at the feducials.
When looking out of the door to my cell I could see two individuals discussing things with the Captain of the guards, and the head of the Prison System’s Psychiatric Unit. They were wearing suits and ties, which is quite different from that of most white color employees local to the region. Due to the heat, most local white collar employees tended to wear collared short sleeve polo shirts. I couldn’t hear what they were talking about, but they would occasionally look over my way and continue talking like I was a slab of beef or some other object of little importance.
I could talk directly to the ELF team
With my probes now fully engaged and my cell irradiated with ELF radiation everything that I would say was heard directly to the ELF control station (in Minnesota) I could talk and they would answer me. Not only that, but I could whisper and they would be able to talk back to me.
It’s all pretty odd. And no we did not get “chummy”.
For instance, I told the on-site staff at the prison facility to adjust the amplitude of the gain on the ELF waves, and I was able to tell them it’s “size” relative to my cell. They had the gain really high and I took it down about six steps and then one step up. (For personal comfort.)
The Deactivation Procedure
It was around 6:00pm when the deactivation procedure began. I had been given an extremely large dose of medication during dinner and it was just then beginning to affect me.
I was sitting on my rack, wanting to lie down, but being unable to do so easily. Eventually I was able to collapse onto the bed, but I did not lie down comfortably, but rather laid on my bed in a half-on, half-off manner. My legs were still in a sitting position, but my head was on the pillow. I laid on my side with my arm extended half off the bed.
I was in a near comatose state. The Thorazine was hitting me hard.
Cell #7 in the Evaluation Barracks.
.
I immediately knew that there was “something going on” whenever I felt an electric wave travel through my body and when I looked up at the ceiling, I “saw” cavitation effects.
Cavitation is the visual effect inside my visual cortex that indicates harmonics formed by the ELF waves in a confined space. In the test chamber at China Lake NWC I could see the effects though they were obscured by the confusing array of the grey triangles that dotted the walls.
But here in the white cinderblock cell, they were obvious. They appeared to me as waves and rows of grey worm like distortions.
While I still didn’t remember anything of my relevant past, it seemed quite familiar and strikingly disturbing. Losing control of one’s mind, and the observation of what could be hallucinations, is not something that you want to experience in prison.
That evening, as I relaxed on my rack, I suddenly saw the sudden bright flashes of light in my head. Just as quickly, in a short span of time, numbering in the milliseconds, a new vision flooded my visual cortex.
With it…
… came an awareness.
But it wasn’t long before I really and truly and completely knew what was truly going on.
For in a short period of time I lost all external vision and the ELF calibration screen flooded my visual cortex. And, while I am kind of ashamed to admit it, again I was intrigued by the red edges of the pastel landscape.
The ELF calibration screen filled my eyesight and consisted of "hills" and "valleys" upon an undulating terrain map that I would be able to navigate a reticle upon.
Without thinking too deeply about it, I started to look and peer intently into the imagery. Without thinking, I said out loud, “I wonder what those red cracks are”, and was equally surprised when a loud voice flooded my mind.
An unknown man sternly replied “Shut up! Concentrate on centering the reticle like you were trained to do!”
Ah, such reminders.
Unknown to my handler, this was an exact duplicate of the same event decades earlier. There, I also made inquiries of the reddish edges. And then, they also told me to ignore those colors and concentrate on the task before me.
All of this became evident. The true and actual awareness flooded my mind when the pastel map appeared. This is a map that I hadn’t seen for over 30 years. It was so long ago I forgot all about it. While the life with the interaction of the drone was known to me and understood, the life of the ELF core kit was forgotten.
The last time I had used it was for some minor tasks back in the 1990’s, when I was recalled for some domestic activities. At that time, I was temporarily tasked to <redacted>.
The reticle on the map was terribly out of place. It was way out to the left of where it should have been, and, I used the time to put it back where it belonged. As soon as the reticle went back in place, my normal eyesight returned. But, I could easily tell that I was in the presence of the ELF field. I knew, somewhat, what was going on. Indeed, I could see the cavitation effects in the cell all around me. And, to my amazement, but not without some concern, dolefully centered the reticle in the proper area. And the pastel map disappeared and I was back in my evaluation cell.
I looked up at the ceiling and saw the cavitation effects clearly. Now, the reader might think that I would have full and immediate recall of everything that I had ever experienced at this point. And that I would also understand what I was going through and why. But the truth was that I did not. I was confused, a bit scared, and completely in a quandary over this entire situation.
It truthfully took me at least two days to fully recall what was going on and why. In the meantime, I had a deactivation procedure to endure, and at this state, the hell was only just starting. As I recall, I was only finally to put all the pieces together when I looked outside the door to my cell. For there, directly opposite to my door, was the triangle shaped feducials embedded in the cinder-block wall of the intake facility!
What it sort of looked like.
.
Was I actually a Sex Offender?
“The greatest prison that people live in is the fear of what other people think.”—Unknown
Actually, the first task, once the deactivation team arrived, was to meet the qualifications and expectations of the facility itself. Those expectations were as I discussed earlier. It was, after all, why I signed the waiver of my Constitutional rights.
Our founders set up a brilliant system which has served the country well for over two centuries. What people seem to forget is our system of government wasn’t set up to create a new set of parental authority figures for the public.
The entire intent behind the Constitution was to create a series of checks and balances to restrain government from becoming too powerful and working against the interests of the public.
Government’s primary role in America is supposed to be to protect the Constitution and defend the cherished civil liberties defined within it.
Today, it does precisely opposite.
Our government isn’t just corrupt though. Indeed, the primary function of government at the moment is to protect status quo criminals from the public, not the other way around. This is why the rich and powerful are never held to account, which is in turn why it continues to get worse and worse.
Was a danger to the community as a Sexual Offender? Was I a [1] pedophile or a [2] predator that would prey on people or little children? Did I have a [3] secret history that others need to be told about? Have I [4] hurt someone in my deep, dark, remote past? They needed to know just how [5] licentious I actually was. These questions needed to be answered.
From the point of view of everyone there, with the exception of the two “experts” that were flowing in to supervise this procedure, no one knew the answer.
So they had to run the necessary tests to determine this. But, unlike many other inmates, this would be much easier for them to find out, because, here (in my case) they have a hard-wired conduit direct to my brain and they could actively monitor how my brain would react to thoughts, and images placed there.
Not to mention that the Navy, or the MAJestic arm of the Navy, had a complete record of everything that I did. From phone records for the last thirty years, candid photographs of me and my wife in hotel rooms (!) and in our house (!), a completely compiled dossier of my medical history and a listing of every (MAJestic) operation that I had ever participated in.
Though, I am sure that that dossier would not of been shared with anyone outside of the MAJestic organization.
MAJestic knew EVERYTHING about me.
But, the State where I was incarcerated did not.
The team had to follow the law, [1] determine how severe a “Sex Offender” I actually was, while at the same time [2] permitting MAJestic to “disable my lethalness” and render me “inoperable” as an agent.
Most people are not aware of this, but not all "sexual offenders" are the same. While everyone gets classified as a Sexual offender, they have a secondary rating that is used to determine their frequency of monitoring and their restrictions.
The scale goes from a 1, which is a minor level offender, up to a 3 / 4 (depending on the state where you live) as the worst of the worst.
While, I am sure, the State officials did not have the clearances to know everything that I was involved in, they did have the right to know my medical, mental and criminal histories as compiled by MAJestic. And that, it was certain, was enough to dispel any doubts about my threat level assessment. Though, since they did contact the MAJestic authorities (somehow, maybe they were notified by triggering an access query for my records), they realized that I was “somehow” connected to the US government in some high capacity level.
What they thought it was is anyone’s guess. However, they probably envisioned something that Hollywood would dream up.
CIA scene from one of the Jason Bourne movies.
.
That’s the way it works you know. We can only envision what we have been exposed to. For most unusual events, the exposure experience is “Hollywood”.
Again, while the procedure was complicated in actual implementation, the core basic theory behind it was quite simple. My visual cortex would be flooded with an image or series of images, or video movie routines. How my body reacted to those images would be noticed and recorded. If my penis would become erect that, for instance, would show the possible potential for interest in that picture or image.
Good luck with that. Once a man gets older, spontaneous erections are very rare. In fact, any kind of erection is a rare event.
Though in truth, they did not need to observe me get erections by. looking at pictures. All they needed to do is to monitor my brainwaves. The Thorazine reduced my body to “sluggish jello” while keeping my mind clear and focused. Yet at the same time, by emotions were all very calm. Thus, any reaction to images that I would see (and after all they had a complete pathway to my visual cortex through the ELF Kit #1 probes) could be observed by the monitoring of my brainwaves.
But since they now had the probes inside my head they could actually determine is the image was pleasurable or disgusting to me. And it was that by which they measured my interest.
There was no running away from it. They could tell, through the reactions in my brain, what interest that I had in sex, children, and images and whether or not I had any tendencies to harm, hurt or bother others in pursuit of said interests.
“If you would know a man, observe how he treats a cat.”-Robert Heinlein in The Door into Summer.
In hindsight, it is interesting that I was arrested for the unproven potential for having an image on a computer that I owned, but whether this was an indicator of my threat to society was another matter entirely.
Actually the mere presence of a file on a computer, by itself, does not mean that it was used or accessed by a person. That has to be determined by computer forensics. There, an IT professional can determine when the file was last accessed, what program accessed it, and for how long it was accessed. A longer period of forensic study can identify how the file got onto the computer, and when. But the mere presence of an illegal photo does not imply that the owner of the computer used, viewed or even knew that that file existed.
The same is true for a farmer who owns 1000 acres of land. The presence of two or three marijuana plants on this property does not imply that he was aware of them, cultivated them, or had any interest in growing them.
But it is easy for a Congressman to make a law saying that if a marijuana plant was on your property, you were De Facto a cultivator of that drug.
The criminal and legal systems must be specifically worded and carefully followed specifically with neutral intent towards obtainment of the truth, and whether true criminal intent was present.
But all that is meaningless.
A direct interpretation of the law simply states that if you possess an item that is illegal, you have broken the law. The old saying that “Intent is 9/10’s of the law” is an obsolete phrase that has no place in modern American law.
This entire theory is disgusting and disturbing to me. Does that mean that if I watched a movie about Hitler that I was a follower of his policies? Or that if someone flashed a picture to me in a mere fraction of a second that I would treasure that image and cultivate it in my mind over and over again, eventually becoming a dangerous maniac?
Most human brains operate at 4 Hz. Most computers operate at 3 GHz. Or in other words, flashing an image on the computer screen at 3Gz cannot be seen by the human brain.
The only way that it would be seen is if the picture froze in place for 4 x 1024,000,000 Hz. (1GHz = 1024 MHz). That is a real long time for a computer.
That is why computer forensics is so important. To watch and look at a picture, humans tend to look, or gawk at it for substantially longer than their brains work. Suppose it would take 30 seconds, or in this case 30x4x1024,000,000 computer cycles at least.
A true prosecutor should need to show that the image was OBSERVED rather than just a file on a computer. In any event, this is all academic. The law says one thing, and if you have a file on your computer, it doesn’t matter how it got there or whether you looked at it or not.
You become guilty.
Obviously the laws and the system behind them were more akin to a huge dragnet rather than a surgical investigative attack on dangerous community predators. But that is how the state dealt with these issues, and I was caught in the system. My place was not to wonder why, but rather to survive the ordeal as they “investigated” me.
This is an interesting subject, and one that I have spent many years considering. That is because the systems in place currently in the United States, on both the State and the Federal level seem to violate the core principles of common law.
In those principles, a law is something that protects the rights and privileges of another.
For instance, you can’t steal someone’s horse because it is a violation of another’s property ownership rights. Or you cannot kill someone because it is a violation of their God-given right of existence.
So, this being said, what property right, personal right, or sovereign right of a nation is being enforced by those laws related to possession of a banned substance or article?
As it stands, the law is contorted into something else entirely. In this convolution, it is the [1] premise of the potential for wrongdoing that is [2] evidenced by the suggestion of improper thought, through [3] possession of a banned object that is the driving force behind the laws as written.
Scene from “A Clockwork Orange”.
When a person is revolted, or shocked, or experiences emotion, the body chemistry changes. If you are in love, your body becomes filled with emotion. If you are in fear, your body is also filled with different chemicals. And dogs can sense this. With the proper equipment it can also be measured remotely.
.
In any event, a period of time was devoted to determining whether I was a threat to society based on my body’s reactions to injected visual imagery into my cerebral cortex.
Actually by measuring the activity in my anterior dorsolateral prefrontal cortex, a region that is involved in suppressing emotional responses, and the inferior frontal gyrus, an area responsible for evaluating social behavior and cooperation, the investigators could get a much better understanding of my individual motivations than only just relying on my more primitive cerebral functions. Luckily for me, I have over thirty years of ELF monitoring of this, but I don’t think that anyone told the medical staff at the diagnostic facility about that.
While I lay there on the rack, images started to flood my mind. Each image enveloped my entire visual cortex and paused there for five seconds. Apparently, it took from three to five seconds to determine how my body would react to these images.
It began easily enough with “soft” images. There were pictures of trees, plants, zoo animals, ocean scenes, fish, clouds and other nice and pleasant imagery. Then, they slowly started to insert pictures of girls. Some clothed, some in bathing suits, and some nude.
In short order the pictures started to diversify.
Some were pictures of thin girls, some were girls with large mammary breasts, and some were pictures of girls with long legs. Some pictures included children, while other pictures included animals.
Over a short period of time, the pictures became more diversified. There were pictures of piles of shit, urine and feces. There were pictures depicting torture, rotting things, and pictures of extreme violence.
There were totally repugnant pictures and pictures of absolute pleasantry. All of my reactions to each of these pictures were then assigned a series of values and were mapped out on a grid.
The grid was a graphical display of my overall sexual interests.
In it, various characteristics, regarding my heartbeat, electro-biological chemistry, and physical reactions were mapped and put down upon the display. For me, as I lay there listening in on the discussions surrounding me, was rather plain and boring. I had a sharp “drop off”, as most normal humans would, regarding death, violence, feces, and odd sexual acts.
I also had a normal transition of interest from beautiful, to cute, to attractive, to stimulating. This gradient needed to be present, for that defines discernment. This is a characteristic of a normal childhood, and thankfully I had a solid grounding in that area.
I had no sexual interest in children, but rather a kind of parental protectiveness seemed to emerge during the evaluation. I had no interest in pursuing anything or a desire to “still” or “hold” the image. This was indicative of a general apathy towards possession and possessiveness. That was certainly not a trait of a sexual predator.
I held strong emphatic reactions that clearly showed that I was not a sociopath, nor did I exhibit odd thinking or reasoning patterns in my brain that were indicative of mental instability in one form or the other. I was surprisingly normal, perhaps a little bit sexually conservative (maybe even embarrassingly puritan in some ways), but aside from that rather normal.
Anyways, that what they said, and I heard them say that. How would you like to be classified as “Puritan” in your sexual interests?
Furthermore, the graph most certainly showed areas in which I had a great deal of sexual attractiveness towards. Not every man is the same, and for me, it appeared, that I had a strong preference in curvy woman with large chests and long legs. I was also fond of wide shoulders (?) for some unknown reason.
My tests showed a predilection towards woman who would be able to have these physical features, which involved girls as young as in their early 20’s, and as old as I was. But there was a rather severe drop off as they approached the age that I would consider to be my daughter. At that point, a different series of emotions came into play with were of a parental protective nature.
All in all, my tests were normal.
In comparison with others who went through this evaluation with me, (apparently) my graph was smaller and more limiting. Others were not so disturbed by certain kinds of sexual positions, or actions. They also tended to be “more open minded” about same-sex fetishes than I was.
They said that I was “bland” and “boring”. How would you like to be considered to be “plan vanilla”, “bland and boring” regarding sex?
My graph was indicative of a rather defined line that separates repulsion, neutrality, and attraction. For me, my graph was indicative of “traditionally oriented sexual attractiveness”. In no way was there any hint of an interest in child porn, sex with a child, voyeurism, necrophilia, bondage, S &M, observing violent sexual fantasies, nor anything related to sex outside of a more or less male to female orientation. I was just conventional; plain and ordinary.
This test lasted approximately five hours. And the conclusions were final, and without question. I was [1] not a threat to society, nor was [2] I at all interested in any kind of sexual activity with a child. It also showed that [3] I was not violent or enjoyed violence in any way.
Upon conclusion of this part of the test, there was an apparent break, and I was able to lay back and relax. I just listen to them discuss my brain and interests. Apparently, somehow they were able to see the images that they placed in my visual cortex. And they commented on them. Some would say that the picture was funny, or disgusting, or really attractive. It was an interesting dialog, but I didn’t care. I was tired, as it took a lot of work to endure the test, and I was very tired, as well as very hot. During the test, the probes in my brain generate heat, and unless I am able to cool down, it could kill me. So I just laid back, and drifted off to sleep with my head buried into my soaking-wet pillow.
What did I recall?
Since it was now determined that I was not a danger to anyone, and thus the sole remaining procedure remaining was to retire my probes.
This should have been rather easy, you would think.
You would just turn the “on” switch to “off”. But that isn’t the way it worked, and for me, it was neither simple, nor easy.
In order to first shut down the probes, there had to be a [1] complete reawakening of brain, followed by a [2] downloading (of sorts) of what I knew and experienced, followed by a [3] re-compartmentalization of memories. This was to be conducted in a certain way, because if not done so properly, certain memories would persist, while others would be erased.
Thus a dangerous condition could inadvertently be created.
It could possibly create a person with patches of memories, and skill sets, all completely out of their proper context. And that is a dangerous precedent. Just like “Nomad” in the Star Trek series…
The Changeling (1968)
.
Ye Gods! I might relive the “The Changeling (1967)” episode from Star Trek. Where some memories that I should of forgotten be remembered, and others that I should of remembered be forgotten. The reality of a bastardized memory stack was a frightening possibility.
A malfunctioning space probe, Nomad, comes aboard the Enterprise, mistaking Kirk for its creator. The half-earth, half-alien probe thinks it has orders to sterilize imperfect life-forms, and the crew has to find a way to keep it under control before it kills them.
Its original orders were to find life-forms, but it had merged with another probe whose orders were to sterilize imperfect minerals.
When combined, and placed out of the proper context, a hybrid creature; Nomad, was created. Whose goal and objective was the perverted “Find life-forms, and sterilize all imperfect life-forms”.
-https://www.hulu.com/watch/283817
The second task took all day, and began right after breakfast the next day. Again, like I had been all week, I was provided a large dose of medication to control me, and I just went to my rack and lay down.
This was an important exercise, as all my core Core Kit #1 interlocks were removed, and all my memories were made accessible to me.
From an observer in the barracks, nothing at all was going on, but that was completely illusionary. To everyone else, I was alone, lying down on my rack. But in my mind a pure cascade of thoughts and images flooded my mind.
Not only that, but the activation protocol was engaged. That meant a full power ELF field, and a constant and steady background cadence was present to my ears.
A steady and constant cadence was played in my head. It was constant and it lasted for the ten days or so that I was being evaluated.
While I understood the purpose of the pastel map and the movement of the reticle, I still did not have any recollection of my memories about the ELF Core Kit. That would only come about once my memories were unlocked.
To unlock my memories a sequence of commands must be issued from the control booth external to my body. I cannot do that myself.
The diagnostic screen appeared briefly. In a flash I could see the screen overlaid in my field of sight. I watched as the icons were clicked and activated in quick succession. Whomever was doing this was quite skilled in doing so. This overlay and the resultant operation passed away quickly, perhaps under three minutes, and then the screen disappeared. Then everything went calm again.
And then, slowly, one by one, (all the rest of) my memories returned.
Unlike the memory retrieval at NAS China Lake, this was a much more arduous process. The reasons for this, perhaps, were many. For one, a much larger period of time had elapsed. When I was at China Lake, a period of around three years had elapsed.
But at this time, a far larger period of time had elapsed and this period of time was over thirty years.
As time wears on, the memories become embedded deeper and deeper in the records of one’s past. As such, it becomes comparatively more difficult to retrieve them. Additionally, other memories, not repressed, crowd out the significance of the repressed memories. Thus, a sorting and prioritizing technique must be employed by the agent to figure out exactly what was transpiring, what had transpired, and why. This was not easy, and as the pieces to the huge puzzle of my life started to come together, I was at times amazed, shocked, and disgusted as to the kind of life that I had lived.
Pieces fell into place. Connections were made, and mysteries that I wondered about (Like “why did I do that?) all started to make sense.
As these memories flooded my consciousness, somehow the operators were able to observe the snatches that would flutter by in my visual cortex. I was being monitored, and as these memories arose others would view them, and at times comment on them.
From my perspective
At this time, the world that I was involved is was quite unique and unusual. What I was experiencing; what I was seeing and hearing was oblivious to the outside world. I was trapped inside a world of my own.
My brain saw and heard sounds and visions that only I could see and experience.
In my mind, I could [1] hear the chatter from the ELF control staff. I could [2] listen to my handlers, the [3] program managers and the [4] operators at their stations. It was like I was on speaker-phone and I could (judging from the volume and the echoes in the room) determine their relative positions within the ELF control room.
I could also [5] overhear the local medical staff in the diagnostic facility talking about me to the [6] “experts” flown in to evaluate me.
I could also [7] hear the rest of the barracks, which was now just beginning to be repopulated with other inmates. All of this confusion passed through my senses with an [8] underlying “awakening” cadence that was put in place by my handlers.
Reactions of the others
Of course, to everyone else in the barracks I was a raving loon. I was talking to myself, conducting focusing exercises to center upon the feducials. I looked like a complete nut. But something else was also happening. Others were listening to me. The doctors and the guards were listening in on the chatter with my handlers. Some of the inmates were also listening in.
It was because of these alert few that directed the attention of the other inmates to what was going on and to whom I really was. In a short period of time, almost the entire barracks knew who I really was, and why I was truly and actually there.
This was absolutely unexpected. No, not everyone knew. But there was a significant number of both guards, and inmates that knew that I was a “special” inmate and that I had a “special” background.
They also knew that I was there for reasons other than why I was there “officially”.
To show their respect for me they would honor me. To be honest, the method of showing honor to me was alien to my experiences. They were obvious respectful gestures, but I had never experienced them before.
Respect and other strange observances
All through the day, various inmates, and guards as well, would come near to my cell. They would stand next to the door.
Everyone (in the barracks) knew what was going on. They all knew that I was being “retired” or in prison for some kind of special government operation. As such, they all showed me respect.
They wouldn’t salute or anything like that, but they would stand tall with their back straight. They would hold a small torn piece of paper in their palm. In that paper were three letters. The initials of the person honoring me. They then folded the small ½ inch long sized scrap of paper into a butterfly shape and softly blow it towards my cell.
This went on all day. And when I returned back from dinner at the chow hall, I found that someone had taken all the tiny slips of paper, now numbering 60 or 70 and put them in the grill vent in my cell. I can tell you that while it was certainly an uncomfortable experience being in prison, and getting accused like I was, to have this level of respect and support was meaningful and import to me.
It touched me.
(I do not know the origins of this ritual. I have never seen it before, and it was not part of my training in the Navy. But the standardization of it was suggestive of some kind of military ritual, of which I knew nothing of. To this day it remains a mystery to me. How could dozens of strangers all act uniformly towards me in this way? I do not know.)
During this entire time period, as long as the cadence was on, and they were reviewing my experiences, I tended to act, talk, and walk differently. It was as if I was still in training in the Navy. It was like I was a drill instructor or some other kind of military automation. I couldn’t help it. I automatically took on that persona, and that is who I was and what I was during this period of time.
Scrolling through my memories
I am sure that there were a lot of interesting memories tucked away inside my brain. After all, I not only operated as a normal human, but I also shared my experiences with an entangled drone.
All of my memories for the over thirty years that I was entangled are now shared experiences and shared memories.
But, what they wanted to do was look for specific memory sets, isolate them, and sever my access to them.
When the command to unlock it was received, the memories came back in a flood. Apparently, the longer the memories lie dormant within the brain the more painful they are to extract them.
Correction. It is not necessarily a painful experience, than it is a jarring one.
For with each memories comes with its own associated emotions. The memories of what it was like in flight school, as well as the time of being a newlywed at China Lake all flooded my body.
To handle this flood of memories the beat tempo was broadcast to my auditory center. This helped me to handle the memories and emotions. There were different kinds of tempos. This was a military march beat with underlining references towards the song that I selected as my favorite song back when I first signed up into the program.
This tempo caused me to maintain a military bearing just like I maintained it at NAS NASC Pensacola, Florida. Of course, the rest of the inmates thought that I was a little bonkers. But the team who was deprogramming me knew exactly what was going on at the time.
Reviewing the “Discovery” paperwork
In Law, “discovery” is the exchange of legal information and known facts of a case. Think of discovery as obtaining and disclosing the evidence and position of each side of a case so that all parties involved can decide what their best options are – move forward toward trial or negotiate an early settlement.
-What Is Discovery? – Legal Meaning
Critical to the identification of whether I was a criminal or not, was a reviewing of the “Discovery” documentation that was used by the DA and prosecutor to convict me.
Correction. They did not use it to convict me. They threatened me with 80 years in Prison that would be determined by a panel of Jurists from rural Arkansas.
They offered me a plea bargain of 6-9 months in home detention and my record expunged if I agreed to possession of two images. I did so. And the DA used sign language to raise the sentence with the Judge.
The purpose of the prosecutor is to prosecute and to win a conviction. He has no motivation or concern about the real truth or the causes of any given crime event.
His job and the ability to rise within his career is based solely in his ability to convict others.
A “Discovery” is a document listing the findings by the detective on the case.
Like the prosecutor, the detective has no real stake in finding out the relative truth in a crime. Their purpose is only to support the conviction by the prosecutor. The detective generates a document called a “Discovery” that lists the findings. My “Discovery” was about 60 pages long. In it was a boiler plate background on how most Child Predators were loners and who had antisocial tendencies, but could adequately fit into society.
My “discovery” consisted of two cover pages directly concerning my findings, and 58 pages of “boiler plate” data regarding sexual predatory behaviors. There was nothing about my mental history, or background at all in it.
Only the first two pages in the 60 page document listed anything directly relating to me. In that there were [1] the references to the two pictures that a doctor, working for the Arkansas Police, claimed was a person that could be under the age of 18. It also discussed [2] that I had thousands of porn pictures on the CDROMS in the storage box. But they were not illegal. They also (curiously) made note that I had [3] pictures of German military tanks and weapons from World War II, and that this was indicative of the possibility that I had neo-Nazi leaning tendencies.
Compared my known histories
They compared my known histories and reviewed my training. To my surprise I also had memory blackout of various paramilitary course, and education.
This was certainly curious. As even while I was entangled I had completely forgot about all subsequent training.
One was involved in the “Louisiana Swamp Rats”. This was, at one time, a hard-core para-military training center.
Others discussed my advanced education, and still others related some of the various minor tasks that I was called upon to do, that weren’t so minor after all. My favorite quote was when one of the observers said that I was part mountain man, part bear, and part Einstein. That comment, well, it made my day.
They made many such statements; but I am afraid that I cannot remember all of them.
Because of the inadequacies in the Discovery, the team went inside my memories to extract what I had actually done. This was an interesting experience, where they probed the innermost workings of my mind.
They compared my physical reactions to ELF generated pulses. Trying to trigger any sort of aggressive or antisocial tendencies. Of course, since I was previously vetted, none could be found, so my case was closed.
And I was assigned a low threat level.
I was assigned a level #1 threat level.
Running the software routines
“I'm lonely, he thought.Distantly he heard soft, high voices.He turned his eyes in upon a vision. There was a group of hills from which flowed a clear river, and in the shallows of that river, sending up spray, their faces shimmering, were the beautiful women. They played like children on the shore. And it came to Forester to know about them and their life. They were nomads, roaming the face of this world as was their desire. There were no highways or cities, there were only hills and plains and winds to carry them like white feathers where they wished. As Forester shaped the questions, some invisible answerer whispered the answers. There were no men. These women, alone, produced their race. The men had vanished fifty thousand years ago. And where were these women now? A mile down from the green forest, a mile over on the wine stream by the six white stones, and a third mile to the large river. There, in the shallows, were the women who would make fine wives, and raise beautiful children.Forester opened his eyes. The other men were sitting up."I had a dream."They had all dreamed."A mile flown from the green forest a mile over on the wine stream . . . ."". . . by the six white stones," said Koestler.". . . and a third mile to the large river," said Driscoll, sitting there.Nobody spoke again for at moment. They looked at the silver rocket standing there in the starlight"Do we walk or fly, Captain?"
Things were very weird for me.
I cannot express how unusual this situation was for me. Not only from the environment surrounding me, but also from what my mind and emotions were experiencing. It is hard to describe, but when a person’s mind, memories and thoughts are being accessed what one experiences (at that time) becomes “outside the normal”.
What happens, is that the mind tries to piece together, in a logical fashion, what is occurring. It does this even if what is occurring is illogical. The end result becomes a confused jumble of events, sequences of events, emotions, sensory impressions and memories that are all entangled in a huge mess of confusion.
I had amazingly vivid dreams, and a convoluted mixture of past memories, shared drone experiences, current events, and embedded program “movies” or “subroutines” all flooded my mind.
Trying to piece them all together was rather impossible and difficult.
I will not relate here what I experienced. For, as far as I am concerned, they are nothing less than visual hallucinations. And, thus have no useful purpose in this extracted dialog. Because of this, I will refrain from relating the fantastical impressions that I experienced during this time.
They serve no benefit to the reader.
That being stated, there are other aspects of this period that are truly significant. These are themselves worthy of discussion. What is interesting are a number of events that are special “retirement” programs.
These routines ran in my mind with [1] audio, [2] visual, and [3] tactile impressions.
The senses of taste and smell were absent from these experiences.
That means that I was living or reliving these experiences as if they were actually happening. When, I knew that they were not real at all, but rather programs that ran inside my brain.
So…
Once the “on” switch was set to “off”, a set number of closure routines rain inside my brain. These routines were amazing as it was as if I were experiencing them physically. Not that I was reliving a memory, or watching a television show.
I have speculated that these routines ran from a source outside of my human consciousness and that their operation was directed through the controllers at the ELF facility that was decommissioning me. But this is speculation only. I say this because I do not believe that the probes had any kind of software that met these stated capabilities.
There were a number of such programs.
I can recall about 12 in total. I will relate three of the most significant. One must keep in mind that these are the retirement events based upon what responses that I gave on the questionnaire before I entered the dimensional field. A person with different answers would of experienced different software programs.
Or, alternatively, the same program, but with different variables and emotional content. This is all speculation on my part.
The programs that I shall relate here are;
The gathering of the retirement programs
The promise of a new life awaits me upon retirement.
The retirement of the “spirit of a Marine” (within the hilt of a sword).
Needless to explain, all these experiences are extremely personal and private.
As such, it will be very difficult for me to relate the emotional impact running these confusing program events were to me. But I will do my best to relate them.
The names and titles that I provide here are my own.
Please understand that these programs are designed to evoke mental and emotional responses used to satiate the need for curiosity and to add full and complete closure to my experiences in a friendly and caring way.
Even though those Fuckers turned me into a sex offender and gave me five years at hard labor.
The closure subroutines are not meant to hurt, harm, or belittle me in any way. But rather, are intended to close out my role comfortably and with compassion, all the time meeting the overall goal of maintaining program secrecy.
The reader must keep in mind that someone had to write these programs that did these things. Someone had to conceive of them, and someone had to design and implement them. They did not just “pop up” out of nowhere.
Shutting off system access, memories, and communication links.
The gathering of the retirement programs
It was going to be a long night.
I knew it, you know. It was one of those feelings that one gets when they watch a darkness brewing out off in the ocean. It was eerie. It was a kind of gathering of clouds, metaphorically speaking. Soft but ultimately a foreboding of impending doom.
During this entire two week period the field was never turned off. It remained on, and I was under the constant onslaught of its effects. It affected me in various ways. But I could certainly tell when an individual program ran. This is because the implanted probes would switch on various parts of my brain and interact with them in clearly unnatural, and often uncomfortable, ways.
What is explained at this point might be a bit confusing. I describe what my visual cortex “saw” and how I felt during this period. To everyone else in the prison facility, I was lying alone on my rack in the tiny cell. (Mumbling, perhaps yelling… certainly trembling and sweating.) One needs to keep this in mind. As all the events that are now described happened only in my mind and were oblivious to everyone except those handlers who were monitoring my mind and watching the programs interact with my brain.
Thus, I knew that I was entering a program when suddenly my visual cortex switched on and my audio and tactile responses became noticeably different.
In this case, what would best be described as a lucid dream, with full auditory, tactile and visual stimulation flooded my mind.
It was, from my point of view, nearly indistinguishable from reality.
Nearly, does not mean totally, and to this end I want to convey to the reader that from my point of view it was like participating in a 6D movie. It was real enough, but easily distinguishable from reality.
The best way to describe this was as if I was inside a “holodeck” much like was in the Star-Trek series. It was just a large dark chamber that seemed real enough to me.
A holodeck, in the fictional Star Trek universe, is a simulated reality facility located on star-ships and star-bases. Most holodeck programs shown in the episodes run in first person "subjective mode", in which the user actively interacts with the program and its characters. The user may also employ third-person "objective mode", in which he or she is "apart" from the actual running of the program and does not interact with it.
A holodeck, in the fictional Star Trek universe, is a simulated reality facility located on star-ships and star-bases.
.
I found myself standing inside a large dark chamber.
I couldn’t see the extent of the chamber as everything was dark and black. Where I was standing was illuminated in some way and showed the presence of twelve individuals or life-size Figures.
These figures stood frozen without moving. Like large chess pieces.
Everything was in breath-taking full color and absolutely sparking clear and crisp. The twelve figures stood in two rows of six individuals. One row of six stood in mute silence facing the other row of six. I stood in the middle between both of the rows. I looked forward at them. The row to my right held six individuals and the row to my left held six individuals.
I was able to walk around them and look at them.
One was a Marine. He had my face, but stood taller than I did, and was stronger than I was. He had the wrinkles and scars of many a battle and of nights of restless vigilance. He reminded me a little bit of the gunnery sergeant (played by Clint Eastwood) from the movie “Heartbreak Ridge”.
Gunny Highway.
.
Across from him was a large Mantid. It was easily seven feet tall, and reminded me of the alien from the movie series Aliens. It was not (at all) representative of the Mantids that I worked with as a drone commander. This one was much larger and tended to be a bit more terrifying. It also had a larger caprice than what I was familiar with. It had a triangular head with two large eyes.
The Alien film franchise (also known as Aliens) is a science fiction horror film series consisting of four installments, focusing on Lieutenant Ellen Ripley (played by Sigourney Weaver) and her battles with an extraterrestrial life form, commonly referred to as the "Alien". Produced by 20th Century Fox, the series started with the 1979 film Alien, which led to three movie sequels, as well as numerous books, comics and video game spin-offs.
There was a naval officer in dress whites. He had my face, was clean shaven, and held the rank of Commander. He had an impressive array of ribbons, and had signs of greying at the temples. He seemed to be calm and quiet with an easy smile and friendly demeanor.
This version of “me” was different than the Marine version of “me”. They indicated different lives that they lead. And how they both turned out after living those lives.
The Dress White uniform consists of a stand-collar white tunic, white trousers, and white dress shoes. Rank for officers is displayed on shoulder boards for males and on the sleeve cuffs for females, while CPO rank insignia is worn on the collar for both sexes. Service dress white includes ribbons, whereas full dress white includes ribbons and medals. This uniform is informally called "Chokers", due to the stand-collar.
"Greying at the temples" means; had white hair around the front near the ears.
Well, he looked something like this. Only with a different rank.
.
There was a scientist / intellectual version of “me”. He wore a tattered button-down sweater with elbow patches, and pockets. He had bifocal wire-rim glasses on, and was balding. He had a white beard and stood there petting a large beautiful Maine-coon cat. Strangely, he wore a pair of slippers and was smoking a pipe.
I wonder if these characters were all composed of images that I have collected in my subconscious (such as Albert Einstein) and then juxtaposed into my image stream.
Frayed. Comfortably worn and a little frayed; as what one would expect from a favorite item of clothing that has been worn extensively.
Scientist.
.
There was an archaeologist version of myself. He was quite stereotypical; attired in a pith helmet, dirty khaki shirt and riding britches with a pair or brown long (horse riding) boots. He was thin, and looked a little gaunt. He was well tanned, and had a week’s stubble of hair on his chin.
An archaeologist wearing a pith helmet on a “dig”.
.
There was a Type-II gray drone. It was slightly transparent. And it looked like it was composed of <redacted>. Which were somewhat similar to the lines of futuristic code shown on the movie “The Matrix”. It was taller than I remembered it to be. The color was also a <redacted> complexion that I was accustomed to. (Odd. I do not know why this was so.)
This was the strangest figurine in the line-up.
There was a beautiful Asian girl. She was deeply tanned, and looked like Polynesian mix of part Polynesian and part Japanese. She was, perhaps, Indonesian or Malaysian in racial makeup. She was short with an hourglass shape, shapely legs and dark liquid eyes set deep with a cute nose and deep black hair. She wore a simple sarong with bare feet, and holding a basket of fruit. The fruit was of a tropical bent, being mostly durian, dragon fruit, pineapples, bananas, guava, and coconuts. She had a red passion flower in her hair.
(So stereotypical, but also so lovely….)
Yeah. She sort of looked a little like this lass.
.
I won’t go into the full range of figures that stood there before me. Each one represented a different series of memories and had a special role in my life.
While most of what we were involved in was related to closure and suppression of the memories, other programs served different functions and purposes. (They were but the representations of various programs. As such they maintained a purposeful stereotypical significance that somehow “plugged into” or connected to my sub-consciousness.)
You all will see the various roles that they held in part 2. Each special subroutine had a role and it was used to “condition” me properly so that I can exist MAJestic in a healthy way, and not be scared for life due to an abrupt and improperly conducted ELF shut-down sequence.
In truth, I endured the entire software routines. But, for purposes of simplification, as well as to avoid reliving the entire strenuous event, I have decided to limit recalling this event. Instead I am just going to relate only two of the twelve programs.
The first [1] is the program concerning the Asian female. I call this subroutine promise, the “promise of a new life after retirement”.
The second [2] is the complete closure ceremony. I call this the “retirement of the spirit of a Marine”.
I will ignore the other ten programs, as they would probably devote an entire book in their own right to relate.Maybe I’ll write another post on them later on. But for now, it’s way too much.
This is the end of part one
To see the rest of this section you need to go off to the MAJestic index here…
You’ll not find any big banners or popups here talking about cookies and privacy notices. There are no ads on this site (aside from the hosting ads – a necessary evil). Functionally and fundamentally, I just don’t make money off of this blog. It is NOT monetized. Finally, I don’t track you because I just don’t care to.
Please kindly help me out in this effort. There is a lot of effort that goes into this disclosure. I could use all the financial support that anyone could provide. Thank you very much.
[wp_paypal_payment]
If you enjoy what you see, it would be helpful if you could assist in hosting this forum. A donation would be appreciated.
Let’s talk about profiteers. People who will make rules, bend laws, or create situations so that they can make a buck out of it.
It is people like this that caused the disappearance of public water fountains in favor of bottled water that you can purchase. It is people like this that has made it so that all of us have to endure “child safety caps” on our medicines bottles. It’s people like this that have contributed so much to the destruction of the selfless side of human nature… and who has instead replaced it with a selfish, greedy nature.
“Anything for a buck.”
About three months ago or so, I received an email that pretty much stated that they would copy my website and re-post it online, intentionally distorted, so as to mess up my SEO ranking on Google. What they said that they would do is copy my website word for word, and interject all sorts of lies, and easily proven hoaxes within it. In short making Metallicman just another “hoax website”.
They said that they would do any number of number of things…
Mess up my SEO ranking on search engines.
Post NSFW content that would ban the site from many rankings.
Fill it with outrageous lies, known and proven hoaxes.
Plant bit-mining software in it.
Plant malware in it.
And in many ways render it unreadable.
Not to mention destroy my image / reputation.
The solution to avoid this was to deposit a few thousand US dollars worth of bitcoin to their account. If I didn’t do so, then my website will be “toast”, and my reputation would be shit.
You all would be surprised at all the hoaxes, and scams that invade my Metallicman mailbox. Most are trolling bots, or mass mailings. Typically I just ignore them.
Whether it is my great, great uncle who died and left three hundred billion dollars in an abandoned account...
Or, someone who wants me to join the Illuminati...
Maybe, some dude who says that they have a video of me masturbating to movies on the internet...
Or yet one of hundreds of "invoices" from people who want my "products"...
I pretty much ignore them all.
But this one was different…
Well…
To be honest, I really don’t give a fuck if there is a few hundred copies of this website all messed up and corrupted with malware and porn. Those that are supposed to see this site are already connected. For this site is not monetized, and has no other purpose except to provide information to a very select few.
I can live without it.
It’s more of a pain than anything else.
So it does not matter to me if the SEO ranking sucks. Nor does it matter if it is confused with other similar sounding websites. I really don’t care. Not to mention that I simply don’t have a couple of thousand US dollars to give to someone to blackmail me with.
If it came down to that, I’d just simply pull the site.
I’d let the fakes propagate and go buy myself a girl and get drunk. I really don’t give a flying fuck about what could happen, or who might miss out, or what might happen to my “reputation“.
It’s already fucking shit, for God’s sakes…
…
Well, about two weeks after I ignored this first email, I received another email from those in control of domain names for websites.
It turns out that some jackass tried to buy the Metallicman website name in various forms. The (domain name guardians) asked me if I had any business associated with China as the fucker was trying to purchase the Metallicman.cn domain name.
Metallicman.com is the registered domain. And they tried to buy the Metallicman.cn registered domain.
Now, normally, this wouldn’t be much of an issue. Most Americans who use the dot-com domain registration don’t have any business with China. But I am different. Not only is my contact address Chinese, but my email system, and funding mechanisms are all Chinese.
So they had to do something they normally bypass. They asked me if I had any business associated with China in any way.
I of course, told them that I was not only inside of China, but that I conduct business with Chinese entities. Were they to grant this request, there could be all sorts of disruptions within internet commerce.
Thus no one aside from myself can own this domain name.
The FCC does not permit spoofing other websites. So if it appears that someone is trying to spoof or copy your website they will not be allowed to do so. As it is not only illegal, but it is a felony.
OK. Long story short. He could not carry forth on his threat. I am sure that were it to be his desire, he would probably register with other domains. But my gut feeling is that he was just disappointed and just stopped this shit, and went on to “greener pastures”.
Issue over.
Oh. Don’t worry about me. Nothings going on here.
But…
But…
But, that guy who tried to blackmail me, well…
…“he’s a bad man, a very bad man”.
…”he’s a bad man, a very bad man”.
That poor fuck however, is set to encounter some awfully bad luck in his future. And no, it’s not going to be the color of his socks changing either. (I do so hope you get that reference.) No evil deed goes unpunished, and eventually bad people come across things that can generate real actual real-life nightmares.
It’s not a measured response either.
It’s the stuff that real, honest to God, nightmares are made of.
This is a portrayal of a nightmare. It’s one of those things where you hope you’ll wake up. It’s about an entire community that has been taken over by a child brat who is totally self centered and sociopathic. He probably doesn’t realize the error of his ways. Any effort to educate him would result in being “sent to the cornfield.” This is a state of limbo. When your adversary has no conscience, he cannot be approached in a rational way. This story is about fear. Not only are the people under constant threat, the world the boy is creating is one that is becoming bleak and vacuous. We never know if he has the power to bring things back, but it appears not. We know at some point he will be all that is left. Everyone has a breaking point. Billy Mumy is a great choice for the child monster. The other characters sweat and frown. In their efforts to survive they have the constant mantra “That was a good thing you did. A real good thing.” This is an episode of the Twilight Zone where we never get to relax. See it if you never have. HERE.
Other Disclosures
What if, this fucker was well versed in doing this kind of nonsense? Can you actually believe that I was the very first person that he tried this nonsense with? Nope. I’m sure that he has been doing this for some time, and has had others pay him in bitcoin.
So, what about those other people who have “disclosures”? What about them?
Are they real? Are they fake? Are they sincere, or trying to create a fiction for their own purposes? What’s the story?
“The further a society drifts from truth, the more it will hate those that speak it.”
-George Orwell
There are other people who have stated that they were posted on Mars.
And I am interested in this because <redacted>.
You see, the Martian facility is <redacted>. <redacted>.
So, I read their stories with a great deal of interest and more than a little bit of incongruity. Whether they are intentional elements of a disinformation scheme designed to preemptively advert any actual disclosure, or just isolated profiteers trying to capitalize on the mysteries of the UFO and ET abduction experience, I do not know. (Though I have my own opinions.) In most instances their reported experiences differ from mine substantially.
Of course, my interpretations of my experiences might be erroneous…
They all, however, do accurately describe the transport portal, but do so in a very, very inaccurate manner.
While others describe their entry into the programs intentionally or unintentionally omitting the fact that they had to be implanted with probes to do so. Hum… Let me be terrifyingly specific.
Only people with implanted probes get to go to Mars, boys and girls. (The dimensional portal will not work for you without the probes.) Additionally, if you want to join a top secret program; well then, that is not what it is called.
It is a SAP, W-SAP a U-SAP, or if you are an active MAJestic member a W(U)-SAP. It is not a super (dooper) top secret, grade “X” program. Best get your nomenclature correct. All of this tells me something quite clear; many of them are (perhaps) full of bullshit.
Oh, excuse me, let me say this nicer. Let me sound more reasonable and understandable. Let me be clear in a more polite manner; all of this is suggestive to me of fraud and deceit.
I am afraid that, as open minded as I am, I just simply do not believe many of them. I do not believe them at all.
The reader is thus cautioned not to associate my disclosure with these other individuals or their disclosures. Because even if they are telling the truth, their stories differ from mine in many profound ways that they have no bearing with my story in any way.
It is these kinds of occluded statements that tend to render a real and actual disclosure like mine into the rubbish bin without giving it its fair and just consideration.
That is what would most probably happen. It is, perhaps, their intention.
The truth is, honestly, if they actually did teleport to Mars; if they are actually important enough to be considered for any Mars related program then they will have the implanted probes in their head.
This is a fact; period. End of discussion.
I don’t give much credence to any of them unless they can pass the x-ray test.
Let’s see those probes boys and girls. Let’s see them. Everyone that was involved in MAJestic has these probes. Everyone who was involved in my specific program has these probes. (According to the lecture on the base in Florida; everyone who is even associated with this program has these probes.)
There are many such examples of such rubbish.
Anyone who is states that Mars has [1] standing water…
Standing water requires an atmosphere with a specific pressure range and a suitable temperature. This is basic thermodynamics. All one needs to do is look up the appropriate chart in any classical thermodynamics textbook. Water; if the necessary conditions are not present, there will not be any water standing.
Pressure – Enthalpy (h) table for water.
[2] plant life on its surface…
When I refer to (my) Mars, it is an alternative world line Mars. Other people might also be relating an alternative world-line Mars as well.
However, any alternative world-line Mars would be similar to ours in most significant ways.
To deviate, for instance, to a world-line where the is life on Mars, with indigenous life would also be a Mars with at least a 40% deviance from our reality.
The greater the deviance, the greater the impact on the consciousness and the soul that “farmed” that consciousness.
When the consciousness returned back to this (normal) world-line (or something similar with a 1% deviance), there would be manifest changes in their experiences. It’s the “carry over” effect, that occurs when you move across world-lines.
The larger the deviance, the greater the effect.
Consciousness is not a “stand alone” attribute. It is a very vibrant controlling “ball” or quanta that can alter and manipulate the physical world.
When it moves in and out of different world-lines it affects the physical world (after all, was I not a “dimensional anchor”?).
The greater the change between world-lines, the greater the adverse affect on the consciousness. That does not benefit the soul. Therefore, it is very advantageous for the soul to limit the alterations to the consciousness, because the purpose of the creation of realities is to obtain experiences.
Consciousness is what helps to define the realities that the soul will experience. (Not the other way around.)
[3] carved statues, [4] religious burial crypts, [5] rodents that scurry about the surface, [6] huge pyramid structures or [7] faces that stare up to the sky, [8] native animals or [9] intelligent naturally evolved life…
… is a nutcase.
Either that or they are intentionally trying to throw such an amazing amount of disinformation at the reader that everything becomes distasteful and confused, or they are ignorantly delusional.
Do not believe any of it.
OK, then. Here are just some of the many examples of such disinformation; disinformation intentionally designed to render any real disclosures inert. I culled many of these references from books or the Internet. I present them here with my comments.
I am biased.
Please be prepared for some rather harsh criticism. (Wince.)
Captain Kaye
Let me start this discourse with a Mr. Randy Cramer (Captain Kaye).
The reader needs to understand that once I became retired and my life started to settle out, I began an active search for others who were in the program that I participated in. I wanted to meet up with them, chat with them, and compare notes. It was my hope that they could fill in some blank areas of my memories, or fill in some thoughts that I have had regarding my experiences. However, alas, I have been mostly unsuccessful.
One of the first of these individuals that I started to focus my attention on was “Captain Kaye”.
He is (by his own words) a former US Marine who has claimed that he spent 17 years of his career on MARS. The ex-naval infantryman, who uses the pseudonym Captain Kaye. He states that he was posted to the Red Planet to protect five (!) human colonies from indigenous Martian life forms.
FACT: In this universe, there are no (current) indigenous life forms on Mars bigger than a fossilized microbe. At least this guy doesn’t charge for his bullshit. You can watch him chat about his “experiences” on you-tube at https://youtu.be/ktjuDsAt0yo .
Mr. Randy Cramer also known as “Captain Kaye”.
He claims he then spent nearly three years serving in a secret ‘space fleet’ run by a multinational (!) organization called the Earth Defense Force, which recruits military personnel from countries including the US, Russia and China. Captain Kaye said he was trained to fly three different types of space fighters…
And, by the way, just who were the Earth at war with? Indeed, if we were at war with any known extraterrestrial species that I know of, we would all be long eviscerated by now. Truth. They could swat us like a fly and there would be nothing that we could do about it.
and three bombers.
In testimony released to ExoNews TV.
He added that training took place on a secret moon base called “Lunar Operations Command”, Saturn’s moon Titan, and in deep space.
On Titan? Why would anyone want to locate a command and control center there? It is far from being a neutral and calm place to settle.
The hydrocarbon atmosphere would, I would imagine, cause more headaches and hassles to the inhabitants than any vacuum world or moon would.
Observations from the Voyager space probes have shown that the Titanean atmosphere is denser than Earth's, with a surface pressure about 1.45 times that of Earth's. Titan's atmosphere is about 1.19 times as massive as Earth's overall, or about 7.3 times more massive on a per surface area basis.
It supports opaque haze layers that block most visible light from the Sun and other sources and renders Titan's surface features obscure.
The atmosphere is so thick and the gravity so low that humans could fly through it by flapping "wings" attached to their arms.
Titan's lower gravity means that its atmosphere is far more extended than Earth's; even at a distance of 975 km. The atmospheric composition in the stratosphere is 98.4% nitrogen—the only dense, nitrogen-rich atmosphere in the Solar System aside from the Earth's—with the remaining 1.6% composed of mostly of methane (1.4%) and hydrogen (0.1–0.2%).
Because methane condenses out of Titan's atmosphere at high altitudes, its abundance increases as one descends below the tropopause at an altitude of 32 km, leveling off at a value of 4.9% between 8 km and the surface.
There are trace amounts of other hydrocarbons, such as ethane, diacetylene, methylacetylene, acetylene and propane, and of other gases, such as cyanoacetylene, hydrogen cyanide, carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide, cyanogen, argon and helium.
The orange color as seen from space must be produced by other more complex chemicals in small quantities, possibly tholins, tar-like organic precipitates. The hydrocarbons are thought to form in Titan's upper atmosphere in reactions resulting from the breakup of methane by the Sun's ultraviolet light, producing a thick orange smog.
Titan also has no magnetic field. Whether there is life on Titan, the largest moon of Saturn, is at present an open question and a topic of scientific assessment and research.
Titan is far colder than Earth, and its surface lacks stable liquid water; factors which have led some scientists to consider life there unlikely.
On the other hand, its thick atmosphere is chemically active and rich in carbon compounds. On the surface there are bodies of liquid methane and ethane; some scientists speculate that these liquids might take the place of water in living cells different from those on Earth.
In short, if you were to walk and operate upon the surface of Titan, it would be more like wearing a deep-sea diving outfit as your trudge your way through a soup of oils and hydrocarbons. It is not an ideal place to set up any kind of base of operations.
Captain Kaye’s testimony reveals that the main human colony on Mars is called Aries Prime which is located inside a crater. Aries Prime serves as the headquarters for the Mars Colony Corporation. According to Captain Kaye, the air is breathable on the surface of Mars…
The atmosphere on Mars is not, nor ever has been, breathable by humans. While there is some oxygen in the atmosphere, the combination of temperature, and pressure, as well as the presence of other gasses in the atmosphere precludes the suitability for organic human life on the surface.
…and the temperature could be warm at times.
Yes, the temperature on Mars near the equator can, at times, approach a human comfort level for a short and brief period of time.
He claims that there are two indigenous species on Mars, both of which are highly intelligent. One of these was a Reptilian species that was very aggressive in defending its territory.
The other was an Insectoid species that was equally capable of protecting its territory.
He said that indigenous Martians are not particularly interested in expanding their territory, only maintaining it. Captain Kaye said that as long as the Mars Defense Force and Mars Colony Corporation did not encroach on the territory of the indigenous Martians, there would be stable relations.
After serving 17 years of a 20 year tour of duty, events changed dramatically when virtually all combat personnel from the Mars Defense force were asked to retrieve an extraterrestrial artifact from a cave sacred to the indigenous Reptilians.
Captain Kaye described how over 1000 (one thousand!) men and women were killed in a subsequent battle and only 28 of his colleagues, including himself, survived. Captain Kaye says he retired after a 20 year tour of duty, describing a retirement ceremony on the moon that he claims was presided over by VIPs including ex-Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld.
My commentary on all of this; he is full of BULLSHIT.
I just do not know where to begin. It is so outlandish, and so full of just complete nonsense.
The physics concerning the planet are just wrong. The presence of life, whether intelligent or not is incorrect. (Even taking into account the possibility that he might have used dimensional travel to go to a world-line where Mars has a human-friendly atmosphere, he wouldn’t have returned to our world-line. There are limits to the technologies employed. (For the planet Mars to have a breathable atmosphere…) He would be so far off “the beaten path” that returning to this kind of world-line would be near impossible.)
All SAP agents in MAJestic are implanted. If he was part of the organization he would have similar probes to mine. (Again, let’s see those probes.)
There are no wars, nor is there a need to maintain a military garrison on Mars to defend humans or other creatures from aggressor forces.
There are no warlike or aggressive reptilians that we need to worry about. (The truth is, the Mantids and the Type-I extraterrestrials are so far advanced technologically, that if they wanted to, they could eradicate humans off the face of the globe within days and there isn’t a thing that we could do about it.)
If you join a W(U)-SAP, you will NOT sign an enormous document (that is what you need to do if you go through American legal channels), you sign a one page document. If you violate it, you are killed. End of story. There just simply isn’t the need for a huge legal document because violators of the MAJestic confidentiality oaths would not go through the American court system. They would be taken into a room and shot in the head.
If what he says were true, then he would be retired as a sex offender, and like me, scared as shit of being killed for his public disclosures.
Additionally, the idea that 1000 people can die on Mars without anyone noticing is just short of mind-boggling.
The greys, of whatever race (supposedly contacted) do not “feel” evil or dangerous. (This is another loud “tell-tale” sign of a lying profiteer.) They do not “ “ooze” a kind of evil dark”.
Summary; I just simply do not believe anything that Captain Kaye has said. It is all hogwash.
Corey Goode
According to alleged Secret Space Program whistleblower Corey Goode, who in October 2016 released a press release about human activity and Mars.
In it he states that we are already present on Mars and have been for a long time. And he’s not the only one who’s saying that. This also comes as less of a surprise given the recent WikiLeaks’ documents, suggest that human and extraterrestrial collaboration that’s been happening for some time.
“Mars was first visited by the Germans as far back as the 1930s, but during the 70s, US space programs were actively exploring Mars and other planets to establish bases. In 1980 the US SSP became – Solar Warden. Under Project Solar Warden vast development and colonization occurred on Mars and other planets. Goode continues, “Bases on Mars were built under the surface.”
-Corey Goode
The reader can watch more on this in detail on GAIA.com where Corey Goode & David Wilcock host Cosmic Disclosure.
He claims he was recruited through one of the MILAB programs at the young age of 6, and trained and served there from 1976-1986/87. Toward the end of his time as a MILAB he was assigned to an IE support role for a rotating Earth Delegate Seat (shared by secret Earth government groups) in a “human-type” ET Super Federation Council.
MILAB refers to the military abduction of a person who is then indoctrinated and trained for any number of military black ops programs.
Apparently, Goode’s IE abilities played an important role in communicating with non-terrestrial beings as part of one of the Secret Space Programs (SSP). During his 20 year service he had a variety of experiences and assignments, including the Intruder Intercept Interrogation Program.
Corey Goode from the US Secret Space Program (SSP) said, “There are humans already on Mars and it’s been colonized.” In Dec. 1986, Goode was recruited into SSP – U-SAP (Un-Acknowledged Special Access Programs) under Project Solar Warden. He was assigned to a research vessel in space to study the solar system from Dec. 1986 – Dec. 2007.
Darren Perks while conducting research for Huffington Post on the “Solar Warren” program, made an FOI (freedom of information) request with the DoD (department of defence) in 2010.
He received a very interesting response in an email;
“About an hour ago I spoke to a NASA rep who confirmed this was their program and that it was terminated by the President. He also informed me that it was not a joint program with the DoD. The NASA rep informed me that you should be directed to the Johnson Space Center FOIA Manager.I have ran your request through one of our space-related directorates and I’m waiting on one other division with the Command to respond back to me. I will contact you once I have a response from the other division. Did NASA refer you to us?”
Interesting. This was obviously a “slip up”.
NASA hacker, Gary McKinnon hacked into U.S. Space Command computers several years ago and learned of the existence of “non-terrestrial officers” and “fleet-to-fleet transfers” and a secret program called “Solar Warden”, he was charged by the Bush Justice Department with having committed “the biggest military computer hack of all time”, and stood to face prison time of up to 70 years after extradition from UK.
But trying earnest McKinnon in open court would involve his testifying to the above classified facts, and his attorney would be able to subpoena government officers to testify under oath about the Navy’s Space Fleet.
To date the extradition of McKinnon to the U.S. has gone nowhere.
McKinnon also found out about the ships or craft within Solar Warden. It is said that there are approx eight cigar-shaped motherships (each longer than two football fields end-to-end) and 43 small “scout ships.
The Solar Warden Space Fleet operates under the US Naval Network and Space Operations Command (NNSOC) [formerly Naval Space Command]. There are approximately 300 personnel involved at that facility, with the figure rising.
Read the rest here; http://www.huffingtonpost.co.uk/darren-perks/solar-warden-the-secret-space-program_b_1659192.html
+ + +
His experiences are very different from mine. They are so different that there are no points of common reference. Some points;
If he is real, he would have probes inbedded in his skull like mine. All extraterrestrial interaction, and technology transfer falls under MAJestic perview. As such, he would have memory controlling devices, a core kit one inside his skull. He need not have to use the dimensional portal, but he would need to be implanted.
If he spent any period of time on Mars from 1986 until 2004, I would be aware of it.
He would not be part of any kind of research or study unless he possessed a minimum of a technical degree, either in engineering or one of the sciences. This is fundamental. People are not active members in MAJestic unless they have this minimum requirement.
If what he said is true, then he would have been retired as a sex offender.
I think he is full of shit and is a BULLSHIT artist. I do not know why he has made such outrageous statements.
However, that being said, he does know something.
Whether it is in passing, or through a friend of a friend is not clear. I do not believe he is who and what he says he is. I personally believe that he took the little bits and scraps of truth that he discovered and fabricated a large story around them to fit a more conventional narrative in regards to geo-political weapons and technology that was moved to an outer space environment.
What does he know?
Solar Warren
Could he be referring to a SAP known as “Solar Warren”?
When Space Shuttle Atlantis landed at NASA’s Kennedy Space Center in Florida on July 21, 2011 and headed to a museum, we were told that the U.S. Government no longer had any space-capable vehicles, and that we would have to rely on other countries and private companies to get into orbit and service the Space Station.
And we have. For decades, it has been the Russians that provided shuttle capability for LEO operations.
But according to others, who have elaborated on the Solar Warden project, they have stated that this program is an active Space Fleet!
This program, code-named 'Solar Warden', apparently has now grown to 85 small disc-shaped "scout ships" and 10 elongated-delta-shaped motherships [each longer than three football fields joined end to end]. (There are also apparently additional intermediate-length deltoid spacecraft as well. )
The Solar Warden Space Fleet is operated by Naval Network Warfare Command's subcomponent Naval Network and Space Operations Command (NNSOC), headquartered at Naval Support Facility Dahlgren, VA.
The Solar Warden Fleet utilizes launch facilities at Vandenberg AFB, Lompoc, California and the Utah Test and Training Range in the desert west of Ogden, Utah.
Apparently NNSOC has approximately 365 personnel on Earth and in space. NNSOC operates in cooperation with the Central Security Service-Operations Division and its work to protect extraterrestrials in near-space and on the ground.
The Solar Warden Space Fleet's vessels are staffed by Naval Space Cadre and Marine Space Cadre officers, whose training has earned them the prestigious 6206-P Space Operations specialty designation, awarded after they have graduated from the Naval Postgraduate School in Monterey, California with a Master of Science degree in Space Systems Operations.
Space Cadre Officers receive space operations training at NASA, and after graduating and a space flight are awarded the Naval Astronaut or Naval Flight Officer Astronaut insignia.
Other member countries' Navies and Marines furnish men and women officers to this program also.
That’s pretty amazing! Not only is this program enormous, but it is integrated within existing systems BUT not associated with MAJestic or even use the ONI oversight!
Their justification for the existence of this super-dooper top secret amazing program is two-fold.
One part [1] of the Space Fleet’s mission is to prevent rogue countries or terrorist groups from using near space to conduct warfare against other countries, or to fire from space on Earth-bound targets. The Federation has made it quite clear that space is to be used for peaceful purposes only.
A second part [2] of Earth’s Space Fleet’s mission is to prevent the rogue global-elite control group, the Cabal or related organizations, from using its orbital weapons systems, including nuclear missiles and directed-energy beam weapons, to intimidate or attack anyone or any group on Earth it decides to target or extort.
Because this Space Fleet has the job of being “Space Policeman” within our solar system, its program has been named Solar Warden.
WOW! Not only isn’t it part of MAJestic, but it’s not part of the UN either!
How to they justify this?
The Space Fleet operates under authority granted by a secret Resolution of the UN Security Council.
The U.S. component is so highly classified that when British civilian Gary McKinnon hacked into U.S. Space Command computers during 2001-2002 and learned of the existence of "non-terrestrial officers", "fleet-to-fleet transfers", and a secret program called "Solar Warden", he was charged by the Bush Justice Department with having committed "the biggest military computer hack of all time."
Corroboration and Verification
What makes all these flights of fantasy believable is selective extracts of defense authorization bills.
But, let me tell youse guys something. Waived SAP authorizations are not provided within authorization acts in anything other than an alpha-numerical designation. If this was an actual SAP, there would not be any white paper trail at all.
Thus this statement below is just disinformation…
Lest anyone think that Solar Warden is an errant flight of fancy, important corroboration of this information is found in the National Defense Authorization Act for FY 2012. Section 912 of that Defense Bill refers to the Secretary of Defense being authorized to purchase and take delivery of "space vehicles". (Relevant Section 912 shown here.)
Summary; Not only do I not believe Corey Goode, but I also do not believe the story about Solar Warden either.
It does not mean that I am an expert and that my opinions are gold, but that I am part of MAJestic and everything associated with this Corey Goode disclosure seems like bullshit to me. Sorry to say. I know that many, many of you all believe his story and the idea that there is a space fleet as part of the Solar Warden fantasy.
It’s just simply not true. There is only one singular umbrella organization. It is MAJestic, and if the information disclosed regarding this Goode / Solar Warden nonsense is incompatible with it.
Here is another “new age” “nut case” trying to cash in on the financial opportunities presented by the gullible. I present the following for the reader to make heads or tails out of it and to determine if my appraisal has any validity.
“My name is Michael Relfe and I helped produce “The Perfect Health System”. My wife Stephanie supplied the talent, healing expertise and the raw determination to create a training system that would allow anyone to learn kinesiology and possess a technology that would help them make fantastic improvements in their life.”
“I want to tell you a little about myself and why you need Disk 11 (The Wernicke’s Correction). I have spent 24 years in the IT industry and have been an employee or consultant for Fortune 50 companies such as AMEX, IBM, American Airlines and The US Navy. I hold a degree in Computer Science and am a graduate of United States Naval Nuclear Power School. I am not sharing these things to attempt to impress you or to be a smartass. I want to help you understand that your success in life and the completion of your goals is in your hands and that with kinesiology….a special kind of kinesiology, you now have the technology to change your situation and get what you want out of life…”
“Kinesiology is scientific. Chiropractors and Licensed Massage Therapists using Kinesiology put treatments on insurance. And this is the actual hands on, repeatable, meat-and-potatoes kinesiology correction. Some kinesiology corrections are for your body. This kinesiology correction is for your brain. And it is demonstrated completely in "Perfect Health With Kinesiology & Muscle Testing - Disk 11"”. And no, it's not available separately. You need to learn Kinesiology from the other disks before you can use it correctly.
After the sales pitch he describes how he found out about this marvelous scientific breakthrough. Of course it involves an adventure of sorts on the surface of Mars. This adventure is outlined in the work titled “The Mars Records”, Book 1 and book 2[i]. Essentially it involves a convoluted mix of astral projection[ii], hypnotic regression[iii], reincarnation[iv], and general gallivanting around the surface of the planet meeting all kinds of curious and interesting individuals. Some of which are quite dangerous; such as those pesky Reptilians[v].
[ii]Astral projection (or astral travel) is an interpretation of out-of-body experience (OBE) that assumes the existence of an "astral body" separate from the physical body and capable of travelling outside it. Astral projection or travel denotes the astral body leaving the physical body to travel in an astral plane. The idea of astral travel is rooted in common worldwide religious accounts of the afterlife in which the consciousness' or soul's journey or "ascent" is described in such terms as "an... out-of body experience, wherein the spiritual traveller leaves the physical body and travels in his/her subtle body (or dreambody or astral body) into ‘higher’ realms." It is frequently reported in association with dreams, and forms of meditation.
[iii]Past life regression is a technique that uses hypnosis to recover what practitioners believe are memories of past lives or incarnations, though others regard them as fantasies or delusions or a type of confabulation. Past life regression is typically undertaken either in pursuit of a spiritual experience, or in a psychotherapeutic setting. Most advocates loosely adhere to beliefs about reincarnation, though religious traditions that incorporate reincarnation generally do not include the idea of repressed memories of past lives
[iv]Reincarnation is the religious or philosophical concept that the soul or spirit, after biological death, begins a new life in a new body. This doctrine is a central tenet of the Indian religions. It is also a common belief of various ancient and modern religions such as Spiritism, Theosophy, and Eckankar and is found in many tribal societies around the world, in places such as Siberia, West Africa, North America, and Australia.
[v]Reptilians (also called reptoids, reptiloids, or draconians) are purported reptilian humanoids that play a prominent role in science fiction, as well as modern ufology and conspiracy theories. The idea of reptilians on Earth was popularized by David Icke, a conspiracy theorist who claims shape-shifting reptilian aliens control Earth by taking on human form and gaining political power to manipulate our societies. Icke has claimed on multiple occasions that many of the world leaders are, or are possessed by, reptilians.
It all begins so innocently;
“The Mars Records, authored by Stephanie Relfe, is a 300-plus page document http://www.surfingtheapocalypse.com/mars_records.html chronicling the biofeedback sessions of her husband Michael who discovered he had been involved in a secret black project while in the Navy. Michael was astonished to find thathe had been living a double life as a covert operative for The Mars Defense Force. Some of his assignments were covert ops, piloting spacecraft, remote viewing, psychic defense and even psychic assassinations.
Michael’s recruitment, training and service for Mars Defense Force was carried out via sophisticated alien and military mind control technology. This included implants, hypno-programming, dissociation of specifically trained alter personalities, advanced psi training, speed learning, psi enhancing drugs and time travel. Michael’s case is unique and very important because he is one of a very handful of persons who have been able to clear, recall and deprogram the sophisticated alien and military mind programming. His success in memory retrieval and deprogramming is due to deliverance prayer and the excellent therapeutic skills of his wife, Stephanie Relfe. She uses a combination of biofeedback clearing sessions and kinesiology .”
-From an interview with Eve Lorgen
I do not believe anything that is written here. I think that this is just simply a traditional “snake oil salesman” who have updated their time honored technique to fleece the gullible by using the opportunities presented by the New Age movement. I believe that activities such as this make real and actual disclosures fall into the realm of the insane.
Henry Deacon(Project Camelot)
Arthur Neumann is his real name. He has made some remarkable statements. Part of which involved the participation in top secret programs authored by the United States government. Initially, when he first came forward he did so under an assumed name (Henry Deacon) to protect himself and his family. In 2009 he decided to come forward under his real name.
Henery Deacon
He has a background as a physicist and is now engaged in a profitable money making project known as “Project Camelot”.
http://projectcamelotportal.com/
On his website one can purchase all kinds of video and audio transcripts as well as books that describe the upcoming US –China war in 2008 (WTF?) and the secret conspiracies involving the United States government and time portals.
As of 2020, there were no overt hostilities between the United States and China.
Interesting stuff, but I rather doubt all of it. Of course it doesn’t really match or fit anything that I was exposed to, but that means nothing. What is important and germane to this discussion is what part of his testimony agrees or disagrees with mine.
Sorry, but I do not believe in time travel. The concept of time is a human fabrication to describe a universally evolving universe subject to the thoughts of all sentient creatures that inhabit it. It's world-line travel.
However, I do believe in dimensional portals. Please read elsewhere to see how a person can utilize dimensional travel to achieve apparent time-travel.
On July 25, 2009, at the European Exopolitics Congress in Barcelona, Mr. Neumann publicly stated,
“There is life on Mars. There are bases on Mars. I have been there.”
The following day, Mr. Neumann participated in Future-talk, a Project Camelot documentary interview, in which he provided details of his teleporting to a base on Mars and participating in a one-hour project meeting, which was also attended by representatives of an intelligent civilization that lives in cities under the surface of Mars.
This experience is indeed, similar to mine in that he describes [1] teleporting to a place, but he fails to discuss the process, the equipment and the mandatory implantation. That sounds quite strange to me. He describes [2] cities under the surface of Mars that are [3] occupied by creatures belonging to an intelligent civilization. That <redacted>.
If fact, if he just left his experiences to the “bare bones”, no-nonsense aspects of visiting the facility, and discusses his implantation I would believe him. But he relates such a large amount of disinformation that it has polluted anything of value that he must contribute to this discussion. In effect, he renders his testimony null and void.
My conclusion of this individual is that he actually might of teleported to the facility, but the other things that he discusses are wholly outside my experience range and thus appear fantastical to me.
I do NOT think he is a crackpot. However, the other statements garnered from him are so far-fetched and outlandish that they make it difficult for me to want to associate with his testimony in any way. I want to believe him. I want to say to him; “Yes, I too was involved in similar programs!” But, alas his descriptions of life on Mars; time portals that bend time and space and strange secret cabals are beyond my experience base. I want to believe him, but I just cannot.
Our mutual experiences are too different.
Andrew D. Basiago(Project Pegasus)
Andrew D. Basiago is a Vancouver, Washington lawyer. As a side project, he runs Project Pegasus. This is a group dedicated to lobbying the government to release the secrets of teleportation and time travel. Basiago also refers to himself as “the discoverer of life on Mars.”
Andrew D. Basiago running for the US Presidency.
He makes many amazing and fantastic claims. They are just and wild and crazy as my own. For instance, he claims to be one of two “planetary-level whistle blowers”. He claims to have teleported to Mars in the 1980s[i] as an Earth ambassador[ii] to the Martian civilization[iii]. Which is why he is mentioned here.
[i] I teleported in the 1980’s, why couldn’t he have also?
[ii] As such, this implies an organization that represents the earth. He has to be an ambassador who he would represent . There isn’t any. The closest organization would be MAJestic, and that organization is primiarily a United States organization that represents human interests in a fractured and dysfunctional global alliance of nations.
[iii] On our dimensional track, there isn’t any indigenous native intelligent Martian life.
This is strange because when he published his article nearly three decades later, he claims to have been “astonished” to discover life on Mars. Along with William B. Stillings, a comrade he dug up somewhere, Basiago now claims that President Obama was a fellow Mars traveller back in the day, then living under the moniker “Barry Soetoro.” In fact, the fact that Barack Obama used to go by Barry Sotero may be the only truth in Basiago’s claims. Basiago and Stillings say they met Obama on Mars, and the government is now covering up the president’s space travel past.
Barrack Obama, or what ever name he used, was NEVER at the facility where <redacted>. The only people who visited the facility were MAJestic members tied with industry and space technologies. No political personages, lawyers, attorneys, or “grass root” fundraisers were ever granted permission to visit the facility. Selection of the particular individuals who would visit was determined by our extraterrestrial partners. They had no interest in any “service to self” individual ever being privy to the projects that we were all involved in.
Mr. Basiago was featured in a six-hour interview posted by Jessica Schab on YouTube. The name of this video is “A Conversation with Andrew D. Basiago” . ( I would hazard a guess that the interview was too controversial for mainstream media.)
Curiously, he has stated that he was involved in time travel. Another person known as Vonheldon also has a compelling narrative. His photos are convincing, though anyone can use Photoshop these days, so that might not be convincing enough. I think this person has a lot to say, but as far as his experiences compared with mine are concerned, I have to offer a “shrugged shoulders” expression. I find all of these stories quite interesting, but unfortunately are far beyond my realm of experience to offer any kind of verification or validity.
In the 39-part interview, he related his experiences in DARPA’s Project Pegasus as one of America’s early time-space explorers during the period 1969-72 and narrates the seven episodes over 40 years in which the CIA, in possession of a “quantum access” capability since 1967-68, briefed him about his destiny as a public figure who would one day be principally associated with the discovery of life on Mars.
Could this be the same as the dimensional portal that I was transported in?
Ms. Schab writes that in this,
“…six-hour interview, American lawyer Andrew D. Basiago, 47, narrates the hidden history of his discovery of life on Mars in 2008 and reveals the fact that by 1968 the US intelligence community was already aware of aspects of his later Mars work. Andy tells the phenomenal story of seven briefings over 40 years in which he was shown evidence of his destiny involving the discovery of life on Mars, and explains how the emergence of time travel and this epochal future event were interlinked.
According to Andy, by 1968, the CIA was already teleporting individuals to the past and future to retrieve artifacts there and bring them back, while propagating holograms of past and future events with devices called chrono-visors to also gather intelligence.
Incredibly, as a result of this quantum access, Andy was given a copy of his landmark paper The Discovery of Life on Mars in 1971 and asked to read and remember it, so that when, in 2008, he wrote it, it would contain as much data about Mars as possible!”
I know nothing about his version of time travel. I know nothing about the CIA. I know nothing about the “discovery of life on Mars” in 1971. They are beyond my base of experience.
As I understand it, “time travel” as is perceived today is not possible. However, apparent “time travel” is possible, but this isn’t so much as travelling forward and backwards in time as it is mostly dimensional swapping. By swapping in and out of the multi-world reality, one could experience universes that were apparently further back or forth in time relative to our departure universe.
Ms. Schab continues,
“During his lecture, Andy shared numerous photographic images evidencing his discovery of life on Mars, including many photos of humanoid beings, different animal species, carved statues and built structures on Mars that put him at the forefront of Mars research.
Throughout the weekend, Andy lectured at his table to small groups of conference-goers, who came and sat in rapt attention as he shared stories about his experiences as a child in Project Pegasus, the secret US research program in which time travel was the focus.
I know that, like me, everybody who took part in those impromptu seminars was certain that Andy is, as Bill Ryan of Project Camelot stated recently, the real deal - a truth-teller with significant new information to share about the real Philadelphia Experiment.”
Again, I must state that I know nothing about “Project Pegasus”, and the “Philadelphia Experiment”. To me it all sounds so fantastical and outrageous. Maybe that is its intention. However, anyone who would actually spend any time of significance on Mars would work in conjunction with us at the base. I do not know any of the afore mentioned people. I never saw them there (not that that means anything), and so their testimony, while outlandish does not mesh up well with my experiences.
Aside from the movie and what I read in the book. It all sounds too fantastical to me. Chances are that it, at most, is derived partially from truth with a lot of fiction thrown in for good measure.
On the other hand, some of the things that he says does absolutely agree with my experience. Though, I never recall seeing him at the facility in any capacity. (This is critical. I was there at the facility through entanglement. It was a large facility, but a small community. We all knew each other quite well, and thus knew everything that went on around us. I knew when we had visitors and who they were. Though I generally did not meet the visitors myself, we monitored them, and knew what was going all at all times. I do not ever recall anyone like him at the facility where I was entangled.)
He states that;
He had secretly teleported to bases on Mars.
There is the existence of a permanent teleportation mechanism linking Earth and Mars.
An intelligent civilization lives under the surface of Mars.
This Mr. Basiago says some pretty outlandish things; things that absolutely do not mesh with my experiences at all. Was he really on Mars, or was he somewhere else? Is all this a big lie, or is there really some truth in what he has to say? For me, it all seems nonsensical and just out and out lies. He for instance, makes the following statements;
There is the existence of native life forms on the “ecologically fragile” surface of Mars.
The US government has had a fully operational teleportation capability since 1967-68[i].
By 1969-70 the United States government was already training a cadre of gifted and talented American schoolchildren, including himself, to become America’s first generation of “chrononauts” or time-space explorers.
Look guys; the planet Mars is pretty much a sterile world today.
The actual surface of Mars within a 2% world-line variance.
It is mostly rocks with some frozen liquids in the shape of crystals scattered about. There once was flowing water on the planet, but it was geologically a long; long time ago [ii]. And, when the water did flow there was not enough time [iii] for any kind of evolutionary process to take place. There are no statues, or ruins on Mars suggestive of a great glorious human-compatible civilization. There are no carved faces the size of mountains on the planet. There are no statues or fossilized bones or remains to be seen.
[i] Perhaps they did. Nevertheless, how would he actually know this. No one told us anything about how the system was developed. They only taught us how to use it. This date he gives places this capability to transport humans across the distances of space before Neil Armstrong stepped on the Moon. I just can’t reconcile this statement that he made. We only started to investigate the facility in the late 1970’s. I just can’t believe this statement.
[ii] Perhaps two billion years ago. That is over a billion years before the first microbes started to form on the earth.
[iii] By all accounts; the presence of standing liquid water on the surface of Mars was a relatively short lived event. Certainly lasting more than a few million years. One must take into account that it took about 700 million years to go from microbes to humans on the earth.
Mars does have relics; bases and facilities. But nothing approaches the size; scope and breadth as what is proclaimed by many of these Martian enthusiasts (Who perhaps want to relive the fictional adventures on Barsoon.).
Barsoom is a fictional representation of the planet Mars created by American pulp fiction author Edgar Rice Burroughs.The world of Barsoom is a romantic vision of a dying Mars. Writers and science popularizers like Camille Flammarion were convinced that Mars was at a later stage of evolution than Earth and therefore much drier, took the ideas farther and published books like Les Terres du Ciel (1884), which contained illustrations of a planet covered with canals.
There are no native Martian inhabitants. There are extraterrestrial colonists who live there underground but there is no way that anyone could mistake them as being native to Mars.
The Mars-analog in this world-line possess none of the things outside of the dimensional portal that this individual claims. If he conducted operations in another world-line, it would have to be so different from this one that returning here would be a near impossibility. (Just saying.)
The Mars-analog in this world-line possess none of the things outside of the dimensional portal that this individual claims. If he conducted operations in another world-line, it would have to be so different from this one that returning here would be a near impossibility. (Just saying.)
The problem with disinformation is that the actual is often mixed up with the fantastical. Thus polluting the entire narrative. Taken in total, this is more like an intelligent profiteer who is trying to capitalize on a niche segment of the population for personal gain.
Laura Magdalene Eisenhower
In a public statement, Laura Magdalene Eisenhower, great-granddaughter of former President Dwight David Eisenhower (1890-1969), has exposed her attempted recruitment from April 2006 through January 2007 by a secret Mars colony project. (This is pretty amazing, precisely because of her relationship with a former United States president.)
Interview with Laura Magdalene Eisenhower.
Ms. Eisenhower’s account of her [1] targeting by time travel surveillance and [2] attempted manipulation by trained intelligence agents attached to a Mars colony project were revealed in an ExopoliticsRadio.org interview. Further, there is an extensive written statement at Ms. Eisenhower’s website. Ki’ Lia, a Stanford-educated artist, futurist and colleague of Ms. Eisenhower (!), has provided a corroborating first hand witness account of her and Ms. Eisenhower’s attempted recruitment into a secret human survival colony (!) on Mars. The alleged purpose of the secret Mars colony was to provide a survival civilization for the human race on Earth in the event of a planned (such as HAARP or bio-weapon induced) or natural cataclysm (such as by solar flares) that might depopulate the Earth.
+ + +
What can I say? I know nothing about all of this. Their experiences are wholly different than anything that I have experienced. It all sounds so fantastical, and outrageous, not to mention that odd and obscure Science-fictiony name of Ki’Lia.
LOL, Look if you really are going to do some actual technical work regarding another race use simple and easy to remember and pronounce names for Pete’s sake. Jeeze! Even though my drone pilot was an extraterrestrial, I always considered him as a “Paul”. I don’t know why. I just did. It is human nature. We humanize things that we know in comfortable terms that we can understand. We vilify that which we do not understand and do not know with strange words, terms and iconography.
I personally think she is more than just a little off. Her belief structures and experiences are quite unlike mine. For me, she appears crazy. But you know, she might not be; instead she might just be a lousy communicator. In any event, I do not want what I write to be associated with her experiences in any way. She is a little way too “new age-y” for my tastes.
Oh, by the way... LOL is an abbreviation of slang that arose during the growth of the Internet in the 1990’s. If you don’t already know that LOL stands for Laughing Out Loud, then welcome to the Internet!
Other variations of this include ROFL and LMAO.
ROFL is another way to say LOL and it stands for Rolling On Floor Laughing.
LMAO is yet another alternative to LOL or ROFL and it stands for Laughing My Ass Off.
(Yet) This woman is apparently a great expert on time-travel and alternative realities. In fact, she claims that she can open up her own time and dimensional portals at will! (Wow!) I suppose the best thing for me to present to the reader is what this woman writes on her own website, and let the reader come to their own conclusions;
“…She is also a Whistleblower and has been speaking out about being recruited to go to a Colony on Mars that represented a time-line that she refused to go along with. She has been able to uncover some necessary truths and agendas that humanity is being kept in the dark about and lectures and does workshops on these issues along with topics such as Global Alchemy, Christ-Sophia, Sacred Union, ET races, Esoteric Cosmology, the Positive Time-line and seeks to empower the individual so that harmony can be restored.
For more than 15 years, she has been providing clairvoyant readings and transformative healings for individuals with the assistance of many divination tools and astrology. Focusing on chakra systems, Laura has advised on topics such as soulpath, abduction, mind-control, core issues, relationships, past lives and physical ailments. She has been strategizing to solve the roots of major world problems including epidemics, war, environmental degradation and injustices that have been a result of the misuses of power of the shadow government. She also covers hidden agendas connected to ET races and the exile of the Divine Feminine energies.
Going through an intense World Soul journey of the labyrinth, Laura has discovered an ability to open a Natural stargate by co-creating with the Venus transits and weaving through the multi-dimensions of the higher and lower worlds. Clearing portals and moving past gatekeepers, Laura works to free us from the 3-D holographic time-loop and guide us back to the Pleroma, the totality of divine powers. With great passion and courage, she is helping to return Sacred Union, divine wisdom, and the many faces of the Goddess that have been buried and forgotten for thousands of years.”
What can I say? I am speechless.
Conclusion
I think that along with all these other individuals, my story seems just as far fetched. It seems just as fantastical, and just as insane and unlikely.
And perhaps, that’s exactly the point, eh?
But if I could disclose EVERYTHING, well, then things would make much more sense, I’ll tell you what. But I can’t, and thus, you need to discern.
Discernment.
An underappreciated fundamental.
Let’s compare why these people all say that they were part of a top secret program…
Captain Kaye. Space Marines to protect the Earth!
Corey Goode. Space Police to protect the Earth!
Michael Relfe. Space Army to protect Mars!
Henry Deacon. Martian time travel to prevent war!
Andrew D. Basiago. Ambassador to the Martian civilization.
Laura Magdalene Eisenhower. World War III life boat.
What do all these people have in common? Can you figure it out? Aside from all the standard cliche’s like California going to slide into the Pacific Ocean, an upcoming war, or climate change, or social upheaval, or the need to defend the earth from those dangerous extraterrestrials, what is it? Is it the military, war, Martian life, time travel…
… heck, we’ve even got Barrack Obama involved as a time-travelling politician! I mean according to all these people anyone can become a member of a top secret super-dooper program. We’ve got everyone from a jar-head to a confused woman who was asked to preserve the human species on Mars. I’m just surprised there’s no LGBT or “women of color” on the list.
Now.
Discern.
My MAJestic disclosure…
Sentence evolution of the human race within a nursery used for the emergence of young developing species.
So I have to ask you. Now think about it. Really, think about it. Can you tell the difference between Metallicman and all the other “disclosures”? Is this “just another disclosure” in a long, long string of disclosures? Or is it something different?
It’s very easy to confuse the real with the fake if you do not have the tools of discernment.
This is true whether you are trying to figure out things about your life, about the United States government, top secret projects or if you are trying to scam someone.
You need the power of discernment.
You need the power of discernment, or else you risk being led astray by the confused. You can be lead off the edge of a cliff, or follow the pied piper who would gleefully empty your bank accounts. Or even worse.
Worse.
You could end up messing around with the wrong person. And sometimes that person can be way, way out of your league.
Ripley 8.
Do you want more?
I have more posts along these lines in my MAJestic Index, here…
You’ll not find any big banners or popups here talking about cookies and privacy notices. There are no ads on this site (aside from the hosting ads – a necessary evil). Functionally and fundamentally, I just don’t make money off of this blog. It is NOT monetized. Finally, I don’t track you because I just don’t care to.
Please kindly help me out in this effort. There is a lot of effort that goes into this disclosure. I could use all the financial support that anyone could provide. Thank you very much.
I had previously posted the complete text of the Journey of Souls by Michael Newton. This post, unfortunately, was fraught with problems. It was poorly formatted, had errors galore, and most strikingly created confusion. The book, as great as it is, was written by an imperfect person who did not understand the MWI and world-lines. Neither did his patients. They were stuck in the quaint notion of a Heaven and a Hell, and a shared physical universe. And their answers, and comments, reflected those beliefs. And, as a result, ended up generating confusion.
And I ended up having to deal with it.
Jeeze! Guys!
"Why did you, of all people, put such new age mumbo jumbo in your blog? Just when I was starting to understand things, you throw a wrench into everything and show that you are just another con artist. "
Sigh…
I can understand the anguish.
Doctor Newton, and his patients, would make statements along the lines of “shared experiences” which implied that two consciousnesses would occupy the same world-line simultaneously. Which is wrong, or at best, partially true. Or discuss instances of a consciousness communicating with a living person in the physical. Sure, all these things are observations from the point of view of a given consciousness; one that does not fully understand what is going on.
Thus this post.
Here, we are going to take the great writings of the good Doctor Newton and expand upon them. We will elaborate on what is actually going on from a (dispassionate) fourth person perspective, instead of the second-person narrative.
Which is unfortunate. I kind of hoped that people would be able to have some degree of discernment. A work by someone else ALWAYS includes their own personal biases, and misunderstandings.
So this post is going to take the good writings of the good doctor and try to edit out the misconceptions and place some insight into what is actually going on.
This thus is useful for a person to understand the following things about the non-physical world;
Firstly, the point of view of a given consciousness. (The book.)
Secondly, what is going on pertaining to the mechanics of the non-physical reality. (My comments.)
For us, as a person using our consciousness, we are often confused as things might or might not make sense to us.
It is like we are trapped in a car that we just woke up in. We look out the window and see a storm of water, wind and movement.
We look at the toddler in the front seat to tell us what is going on, but they are not much help.
It's only when the car-wash attendant comes to the window do we realize that we were actually inside a car wash.
This post discusses the operation of the car wash, in reference to a book that describes the feelings and perceptions of the inhabitants inside the car.
Thus, this is a very useful post. It provides both the stories and the experiences of consciousness, along with the “nuts and bolts’ mechanics of the operation and what is actually going on.
Multiple Part Post
This post is a multiple part post. I have labeled them…
This is an annotation to the Journey of Souls book
I politely suggest that the reader, go ahead and read the initial post (the raw book) first HERE, and then start going thought this post. As this is a “study guide” that uses the book as a medium from which to discuss the nature of the non-physical world.
About the MAJestic disclosure and this…
OK. Well it took a long time to come about, but now we are finally getting to the part of “the disclosure” that I am entrusted with disclosing. Nope. It’s not about who our extraterrestrial benefactors are, or about the nature of our physical universe. It is about our role inside the physical universe as it pertains to the non-physical universe.
What? You think that MAJestic was “only” about the reverse engineering of extraterrestrial artifacts? Did you, eh?
Maybe the bulk of it was, but my role and the role of Sebastian was far deeper and involved interaction / interfacing with a society of individuals who’s very nature was inherently much larger than what we humans perceive. And for us to improve our lot, as humans on Earth, we need to understand why our non-physical reality is so darn important.
This is about our role inside the physical universe as it pertains to the non-physical universe.
For mankind, human-kind, or our species to advance in a unified sentience, we will need to understand our role in the “big picture”, and that boys and girls means the non-physical reality; the so called “Heaven”.
And those of you that are worried about what the “Big Boys” think about all this, rest easy. The PTB are concerned with the overall well-being of a world that is increasingly overpopulated, greedy and “out of control”. They want a smaller, more compact, and far more “reasonable” world for us to live in. And unfortunately, that means that there will need to be a sorting process…
We all must need to know our place and role in the big scale of things. This is the first step to our personal enlightenment.
Journey of Souls by Michael Newton
Table of Contents
Death and Departure
Gateway to the Spirit World
Homecoming
The Displaced Soul
Orientation
Transition
Placement
Our Guides The Beginner Soul
The Intermediate Soul
The Advanced Soul
Life Selection
Choosing a New Body
Preparation for Embarkation
Rebirth
Introduction by Dr. Newton
You would know the hidden realm where all souls dwell. The journey’s way lies through death’s misty fell. Within this timeless passage a guiding light does dance, Lost from conscious memory, but visible in trance.
-M.N.
ARE you afraid of death? Do you wonder what is going to happen to you after you die? Is it possible you have a spirit which came from somewhere else and will return there after your body dies, or is this just wishful thinking because you are afraid?
It is a paradox that humans, alone of all creatures of the Earth, must repress the fear of death in order to lead normal lives. Yet our biological instinct never lets us forget this ultimate danger to our being. As we grow older, the specter of death rises in our consciousness. Even religious people fear death is the end of personhood. Our greatest dread of death brings thoughts about the nothingness of death which will end all associations with family and friends. Dying makes all our earthly goals seem futile.
If death were the end of everything about us, then life indeed would be meaningless.
However, some power within us enables humans to conceive of a hereafter and to sense a connection to a higher power and even an eternal soul. If we do actually have a soul, then where does it go after death? Is there really some sort of heaven full of intelligent spirits outside our physical universe? What does it look like? What do we do when we get there? Is there a supreme being in charge of this paradise? These questions are as old as humankind itself and still remain a mystery to most of us.
The true answers to the mystery of life after death remain locked behind a spiritual door for most people. This is because we have built-in amnesia about our soul identity which, on a conscious level, aids in the merging of the soul and human brain.
Comment 1
The ability to remember non-physical events is innate with all creatures. Including humans. We do not simply because of two reasons. [1] Our soul structure is such that the garbions are not configured for “easy” (physical) mental access, and [2] we have purposefully atrophied our physical ability to access these memories while in particle form.
In the last few years the general public has heard about people who temporarily died and then came back to life to tell about seeing a long tunnel, bright lights, and even brief encounters with friendly spirits. But none of these accounts written in the many books on reincarnation has ever given us anything more than a glimpse of all there is to know about life after death.
This book is an intimate journal about the spirit world. It provides a series of actual case histories which reveal in explicit detail what happens to us when life on Earth is over. You will be taken beyond the spiritual tunnel and enter the spirit world itself to learn what transpires for souls before they finally return to Earth in another life.
I am a skeptic by nature, although it will not seem so from the contents of this book. As a counselor and hypnotherapist, I specialize in behavior modification for the treatment of psychological disorders. A large part of my work involves short-term cognitive restructuring with clients by helping them connect thoughts and emotions to promote healthy behavior. Together we elicit the meaning, function, and consequences of their beliefs because I take the premise that no mental problem is imaginary.
In the early days of my practice, I resisted past life requests from people because of my orientation toward traditional therapy. While I used hypnosis and age- regression techniques to determine the origins of disturbing memories and childhood trauma, I felt any attempt to reach a former life was unorthodox and non-clinical. My interest in reincarnation and metaphysics was only intellectual curiosity until I worked with a young man on pain management.
This client complained of a lifetime of chronic pain on his right side. One of the tools of hypnotherapy to manage pain is directing the subject to make the pain worse so he or she can also learn to lessen the aching and thus acquire control. In one of our sessions involving pain intensification, this man used the imagery of being stabbed to recreate his torment. Searching for the origins of this image, I eventually uncovered his former life as a World War I soldier who was killed by a bayonet in France, and we were able to eliminate the pain altogether.
With encouragement from my clients, I began to experiment with moving some of them further back in time before their last birth on Earth. Initially I was concerned that a subject’s integration of current needs, beliefs, and fears would create fantasies of recollection.
However, it didn’t take long before I realized our deep-seated memories offer a set of past experiences which are too real and connected to be ignored. I came to appreciate just how therapeutically important the link is between the bodies and events of our former lives and who we are today.
Comment 2
When the subconscious is “opened up”, everyone will recall their past physical events, as well as past reincarnated lives. This is with a 100% certainty. You might argue that this is a natural ability of the mind to lie and tell falsehoods, if you prefer. However, you MUST accept the fact that the ability to recall memories is a normal event under regressive hypnosis..
Then I stumbled on to a discovery of enormous proportions. I found it was possible to see into the spirit world through the mind’s eye of a hypnotized subject who could report back to me of life between lives on Earth.
The case that opened the door to the spirit world for me was a middle-aged woman who was an especially receptive hypnosis subject. She had been talking to me about her feelings of loneliness and isolation in that delicate stage when a subject has finished recalling their most recent past life. This unusual individual slipped into the highest state of altered consciousness almost by herself Without realizing I had initiated an overly short command for this action, I suggested she go to the source of her loss of companionship. At the same moment I inadvertently used one of the trigger words to spiritual recall. I also asked if she had a specific group of friends whom she missed.
Suddenly, my client started to cry. When I directed her to tell me what was wrong, she blurted out,
“I miss some friends in my group and that’s why I get so lonely on Earth.”
I was confused and questioned her further about where this group of friends was actually located.
“Here, in my permanent home,”
She answered simply,
“...and I’m looking at all of them right now!”
After finishing with this client and reviewing her tape recordings, I recognized that finding the spirit world involved an extension of past life regression. There are many books about past lives, but none I could find which told about our life as souls, or how to properly access the spiritual recollections of people.
I decided to do the research myself and with practice I acquired greater skill in entering the spirit world through my subjects. I also learned that finding their place in the spirit world was far more meaningful to people than recounting their former lives on Earth.
How is it possible to reach the soul through hypnosis?
Visualize the mind as having three concentric circles, each smaller than the last and within the other, separated only by layers of connected mind-consciousness. The first outer layer is represented by the conscious mind which is our critical, analytic reasoning source. The second layer is the subconscious, where we initially go in hypnosis to tap into the storage area for all the memories that ever happened to us in this life and former lives. The third, the innermost core, is what we are now calling the superconscious mind. This level exposes the highest center of Self where we are an expression of a higher power.
The Human Mind as described by Dr. Newton. All of these elements are PHYSICAL elements that reside within the physical brain. However they can tap into the non-physical reality.
The superconscious houses our real identity, augmented by the subconscious which contains the memories of the many alter-egos assumed by us in our former human bodies. The superconscious may not be a level at all, but the soul itself. The superconscious mind represents our highest center of wisdom and perspective, and all my information about life after death comes from this source of intelligent energy.
Comment 3
What doctor Newton is saying that that the physical components of the physical brain have an ability to tap into the non-physical universe. He breaks down the functions into catagories. But that need not concern us here. All that matters is the understanding that the physical brain has the ability to connect with the non-physical reality.
How valid is the use of hypnosis for uncovering truth?
People in hypnosis are neither dreaming nor hallucinating. We don’t dream in chronological sequences nor hallucinate in a directed trance state.
When subjects are placed in trance, their brain waves slow from the Beta wake state and continue to change vibration down past the meditative Alpha stage into various levels within the Theta range. Theta is hypnosis-not sleep. When we sleep we go to the final Delta state where messages from the brain are dropped into the subconscious and vented through our dreams. In Theta, however, the conscious mind is not unconscious, so we are able to receive as well as send messages with all memory channels open.
When under a “trance” the brain waves slow from the woke state (Beta) into the (Theta) range. This is hypnosis, it is not sleeps. In this state our physical brain is completely functional and able to access both the physical reality as well as the non-physical reality simultaneously.
Once in hypnosis, people report the pictures they see and dialogue they hear in their unconscious minds as literal observations.
In response to questions, subjects cannot lie, but they may misinterpret something seen in their unconscious mind, just as we do in the conscious state. In hypnosis, people have trouble relating to anything they don’t believe is the truth.
Some critics of hypnosis believe a subject in trance will fabricate memories and bias their responses in order to adopt any theoretical framework suggested by the hypnotist. I find this generalization to be a false premise.
In my work, I treat each case as if I were hearing the information for the first time. If a subject were somehow able to overcome hypnosis procedure and construct a deliberate fantasy about the spirit world, or free-associate from pre-set ideas about their afterlife, these responses would soon become inconsistent with my other case reports.
I learned the value of careful cross-examination early in my work and I found no evidence of anyone faking their spiritual experiences to please me.
In fact, subjects in hypnosis are not hesitant in correcting my misinterpretations of their statements. As my case files grew, I discovered by trial and error to phrase questions about the spirit world in a proper sequence. Subjects in a superconscious state are not particularly motivated to volunteer information about the whole plan of soul life in the spirit world.
One must have the right set of “keys” for specific “doors”.
In the hypnosis session you need the proper combination of words or phrases to obtain access to specific memories. That can be considered to be like finding the right key to open the right door.
Eventually, I was able to perfect a reliable method of memory access to different parts of the spirit world by knowing which door to open at the right time during a session.
As I gained confidence with each session, more people sensed I was comfortable with the hereafter and felt it was all right to speak to me about it. The clients in my cases represent some men and women who were very religious, while others had no particular spiritual beliefs at all. Most fall somewhere in between, with a mixed bag of personal philosophies about life.
The astounding thing I found as I progressed with my research was that once subjects were regressed back into their soul state they all displayed a remarkable consistency in responding to questions about the spirit world. People even use the same words and graphic descriptions in colloquial language when discussing their lives as souls.
Comment 4
Regardless of religion, or education, people described the same things about the non-physical world while under hypnosis. Obviously those under hypnosis were able to tap into a shared understand or reality that all humans experience as part of the non-physical world.
However, this homogeneity of experience by so many clients did not stop me from continually trying to verify statements between my subjects and corroborate specific functional activities of souls.
There were some differences in narrative reporting between cases, but this was due more to the level of soul development than to variances in how each subject basically saw the spirit world.
The research was painfully slow, but as the body of my cases grew I finally had a working model of the eternal world where our souls live. I found thoughts about the spirit world involve universal truths among the souls of people living on Earth.
It was these perceptions by so many different types of people which convinced me their statements were believable. I am not a religious person, but I found the place where we go after death to be one of order and direction, and I have come to appreciate that there is a grand design to life and afterlife.
Comment 5
There is a reason; a design, a functional purpose that connects the physical world with the non-physical world.
When I considered how to best present my findings, I determined the case study method would provide the most descriptive way in which the reader could evaluate client recall about the afterlife. Each case I have selected represents a direct dialogue between myself and a subject. The case testimonies are taken from tape recordings from my sessions.
This book is not intended to be about my subjects’ past lives, but rather a documentation of their experiences in the spirit world relating to those lives.
For readers who may have trouble conceptualizing our souls as non-material objects, the case histories listed in the early chapters explain how souls appear and the way in which they function. Each case history is abbreviated to some extent because of space constraints and to give the reader an orderly arrangement of soul activity.
The chapters are designed to show the normal progression of souls into and out of the spirit world, incorporated with other spiritual information.
The travels of souls from the time of death to their next incarnation has come to me from a ten-year collection of clients.
Comment 6
This is the first book that was written after a ten year period. After the success of this book was completed, a second (far more detailed book) was published. It is called / titled “Destiny of Souls”, and is here in Metallicaman as well..
It surprised me at first, that I had people who remembered parts of their soul life more clearly after distant lifetimes than recent ones. Yet, for some reason, no one subject was able to recall the entire chronology of soul activities I have presented in this book. My clients remember certain aspects of their spiritual life quite vividly, while other experiences are hazy to them. As a result, even with these twenty-nine cases, I found I could not give the reader the full range of information I have gathered about the spirit world. Thus, my chapters contain details from more cases than just the twenty-nine listed.
The reader may consider my questioning in certain cases to be rather demanding. In hypnosis, it is necessary to keep the subject on track. When working in the spiritual realm, the demands on a facilitator are higher than with past life recall.
In trance, the average subject tends to let his or her soul-mind wander while watching interesting scenes unfold. My clients often want me to stop talking so they can detach from reporting what they see and just enjoy their past experiences as souls. I try to be gentle and not overly structured, but my sessions are usually single ones which run three hours in length and there is a lot to cover. People may come long distances to see me and not be able to return.
Comment 7
Individuals usually had to travel a long distance to obtain the session. At that, each session was very difficult and lasted no more than three hours. It was not an easy restful event.
I find it very rewarding to watch the look of wonder on a client’s face when his or her session ends.
For those of us who have had the opportunity to actually see our immortality, a new depth of self-understanding and empowerment emerges.
Before awakening my subjects, I often implant appropriate post-suggestion memories. Having a conscious knowledge of their soul life in the spirit world and a history of physical existences on planets gives these people a stronger sense of direction and energy for life.
Finally, I should say that what you are about to read may come as a shock to your preconceptions about death. The material presented here may go against your philosophical and religious beliefs. There will be those readers who will find support for their existing opinions.
For others, the information offered in these cases will all appear to be subjective tales resembling a science fiction story. Whatever your persuasion, I hope you will reflect’ upon the implications for humanity if what my subjects have to say about life after death is accurate.
Comment 8
Thus ends the introduction by Dr. Newton in his first book “Journey of Souls”.
Death and Departure Case 1
S. (Subject): Oh, my god! I’m not really dead-am I? I mean, my body is dead-I can see it below me-but I’m floating… I can look down and see my body lying flat in the hospital bed. Everyone around me thinks I’m dead, but I’m not. I want to shout, hey, I’m not really dead! This is so incredible … the nurses are pulling a sheet over my head… people I know are crying. I’m supposed to be dead, but I’m still alive! It’s strange, because my body is absolutely dead while I’m moving around it from above. I’m alive!
THESE are the words spoken by a man in deep hypnosis, reliving a death experience. His words come in short, excited bursts and are full of awe, as he sees and feels what it is like to be a spirit newly separated from a physical body.
This man is my client and I have just assisted him in recreating a past life death scene while he lies back in a comfortable recliner chair. A little earlier, following my instructions during his trance induction, this subject was age-regressed in a return to childhood memories. His subconscious perceptions gradually coalesced as we worked together to reach his mother’s womb.
I then prepared him for a jump back into the mists of time by the visual use of protective shielding.
Comment 9
This technique of “protective shielding” is a method where you isolate the subject from experiencing pain or suffering. You essentially disconnect the troublesome aspects of reliving an event. If you do not do so, a subject might end up reliving the pain of giving birth, or dying under torture, or experiencing a great loss. There are numerous ways and techniques to do this all utilized by the hypnotist.
When we completed this important step of mental conditioning, I moved my subject through an imaginary time tunnel to his last life on Earth.
It was a short life because he had died suddenly from the influenza epidemic of 1918.
As the initial shock of seeing himself die and feeling his soul floating out of his body begins to wear off a little, my client adjusts more readily to the visual images in his mind. Since a small part of the conscious, critical portion of his mind is still functioning, he realizes he is recreating a former experience. It takes a bit longer than usual since this subject is a “younger soul” and not so used to the cycles of birth, death, and rebirth as are many of my other clients.
Comment 10
It is widely common to expect a person under hypnosis to remember past lives. However the number of past lives differ from individual to individual. Those with only a few previous past lives and past reincarnation events are considered to be “young” or “young souls”. While those with many, many, many previous past lives are considered to be “old” or “ancient souls”.
Yet, within a few moments he settles in and begins to respond with greater confidence to my questions. I quickly raise this subject’s subconscious hypnotic level into the superconscious state. Now he is ready to talk to me about the spirit world, and I ask what is happening to him.
S: Well … I’m rising up higher … still floating … looking back at my body. It’s like watching a movie, only I’m in it!
The doctor is comforting my wife and daughter. My wife is sobbing (subject wiggles with discomfort in his chair).
I’m trying to reach into her mind … to tell her everything is all right with me. She is so overcome by grief I’m not getting through.
I want her to know my suffering is gone … I’m free of my body … I don’t need it any more … that I will wait for her.
I want her to know that … but she is … not listening to me.
Oh, I’m moving away now …
And so, guided by a series of commands, my client starts the process of moving further into the spirit world.
It is a road many others have traveled in the security of my office.
Typically, as memories in the superconscious state expand, subjects in hypnosis become more connected to the spiritual passageway. As the session moves forward, the subject’s mental pictures are more easily translated into words.
Short descriptive phrases lead to detailed explanations of what it is like to enter the spirit world.
We have a great deal of documentation, including observations from medical personnel, which describes the out-of-body near-death experiences of people severely injured in accidents.
These people were considered clinically dead before medical efforts brought them back from the other side.
Souls are quite capable of leaving and returning to their host bodies, particularly in life-threatening situations when the body is dying’. People tell of hovering over their bodies, especially in hospitals, watching doctors perform life-saving procedures on them. In time these memories fade after they return to life.
Comment 11
So much to explain here. Firstly, our consciousness (who we are) goes in and out of the world-lines quickly. Roughly about 144 times a second. Each time it does so, it is momentarily outside of the physical body. It is there outside for roughly 1/144 of a second. so being outside the body, between world-lines, within a fraction of “time” is a normal occurrence. What isn’t is staying there in particle form and leaving the train of world-lines by staying in wave from.
In the early stages of hypnosis regression into past lives, the descriptions of subjects mentally going through their past deaths do not contradict the reported statements of people who have actually died in this life for a few minutes.
The difference between these two groups of people is that subjects in hypnosis are not remembering their experiences of temporary death. People in a deep trance state are capable of describing what life is like after permanent physical death.
Comment 12
What is different during “death” is that this time the consciousness has stayed in wave form, and not particle form. And thus the body is dead. What most people do not realize is that, they as consciousness, can actually “jump” to another world-line in this state (if it is adjacent”) and not go through the death sequence. (But that is an involved process, and might take about ten posts just to start explaining the basics of it.) The thoughts of the consciousness over the life-time has created this world-line ending and departure.
What are the similarities of afterlife recollection between people reporting on their out-of-body experiences as a result of a temporary physical trauma and a subject in hypnosis recalling death in a past life?
Both find themselves floating around their bodies in a strange way, trying to touch solid objects which dematerialize in front of them.
Both kinds of reporters say they are frustrated in their attempts to talk to living people who don’t respond.
Both state they feel a pulling sensation away from the place where they died and experience relaxation and curiosity rather than fear.
All these people report a euphoric sense of freedom and brightness around them. Some of my subjects see brilliant whiteness totally surrounding them at the moment of death, while others observe the brightness is farther away from an area of darker space through which they are being pulled. This is often referred to as the tunnel effect, and has become well known with the public.
Most people who have died and then returned back to life describe a tunnel of light that they see and experience.
Comment 13
This “tunnel of light” is quite different from normal “everyday” travel in and out of the world-lines. What is going on here is that the consciousness is leaving the area of the physical constructions. It is leaving a “plane of existence” that includes the near-infinite numbers of world-lines and moving “upwards” to a different universe. One in which we call “Heaven”..
This is what is going on. There are two (possibly many other) universes involved. Our consciousness experiences “time” in one universe. This time is a sequence of trips in and out through multiple world-lines. All the time in a frequency of vibration around 4Hz. It switches back and forth between wave and particle. Up until he moment of death. Then, it is in the universe of physical realities, but not within a given world-line. To leave this universe it needs to “cross over” and exit it and go to a different universe. This is often described as going through a tunnel of light.
My second case will take us further into the death experience than Case 1.
The subject here is a man in his sixties describing to me the events of his death as a young woman called Sally, who was killed by Kiowa Indians in an attack on a wagon train in 1866.
Map showing the location of the Kiowa Indians in the Oklahoma / Texas region. This regression describes the death of “White” settlers encroaching on Indian Territories and Nations.
Although this case and the last one relate death experiences after their most immediate past lives, a particular death date in history has no special relevance because it is recent. I find no significant differences between ancient and modern times in terms of graphic spirit world recall, or the quality of lessons learned.
I should also say the average subject in trance has an uncanny ability to zero in on the dates and geographic locations of many past lives. This is true even in earlier periods of human civilization, when national borders and place names were different than exist today. Former names, dates, and locations may not always be easily recalled in every past life, but descriptions about returning to the spirit world and life in that world are consistently vivid.
Wagon train in the Americas. During this period of time, European settlers formed these convoys of wagons and people moved West to find lands to settle upon. It is unfortunate that they lands were already occupied and the Indians that occupied them did not want these strangers taking their lands.
The scene in Case 2 opens on the American southern plains right after an arrow has struck Sally in the neck at close range. I am always careful with death scenes involving violent trauma in past lives because the subconscious mind often still retains these experiences. The subject in this case came to me because of a lifetime of throat discomfort. Release therapy and deprogramming is usually required in these cases. In all past life recall, I use the time around death for quiet review and place the subject in observer status to soften pain and emotion.
Case 2 – Sally dies by an arrow
Dr. N: Are you in great pain from the arrow?
S: Yes … the point has torn my throat … I’m dying (subject begins to whisper while holding his hands at the throat). I’m choking… blood pouring down … Will (husband) is holding me … the pain … terrible … I’m getting out now … it’s over, anyway.
Note: Souls often leave their human hosts moments before actual death when their bodies are in great pain. Who can blame them? Nevertheless, they do stay close by the dying body. After calming techniques, I raise this subject from the subconscious to the superconscious level for the transition to spiritual memories.
Dr. N: All right, Sally, you have accepted being killed by these Indians. Will you please describe to me the exact sensation you feel at the time of death?
S: Like … a force … of some kind … pushing me up out of my body.
Dr. N: Pushing you? Out where?
S: I’m ejected out the top of my head.
Dr. N: And what was pushed out?
S: Well-me!
Dr. N: Describe what “me” means. What does the thing that is you look like going out of the head of your body?
S: (pause) Like a … pinpoint of light … radiating…
Dr. N: How do you radiate light?
S: From… my energy. I look sort of transparent white my soul…
Dr. N: And does this energy light stay the same after leaving your body?
S: (pause) I seem to grow a little … as I move around.
Dr. N: If your light expands, then what do you look like now?
S: A… wispy … string… hanging …
Dr. N: And what does the process of moving out of your body actually feel like to you?
S: Well, it’s as if I shed my skin … peeling a banana. I just lose my body in one swoosh!
Dr. N: Is the feeling unpleasant?
S: Oh no! It’s wonderful to feel so free with no more pain, but … I am… disoriented … I didn’t expect to die …
(sadness is creeping into my client’s voice and I want him to stay focused on his soul for a minute more, rather than what is taking place on the ground with his body)
Dr. N: I understand, Sally. You are feeling a little displacement at the moment as a soul. This is normal in your situation for what you have just gone through. Listen and respond to my questions. You said you were floating. Are you able to move around freely right after death?
S: It’s strange … it’s as if I’m suspended in air that isn’t air … there are no limits… no gravity… I’m weightless.
Dr. N: You mean it’s sort of like being in a vacuum for you?
S: Yes… nothing around me is a solid mass. There are no obstacles to bump into… I’m drifting…
Dr. N: Can you control your movements-where you are going?
S: Yes … I can do some of that … but there is … a pulling … into a bright whiteness … it’s so bright!
Dr. N: Is the intensity of whiteness the same everywhere?
S: Brighter … away from me … it’s a little darker white … gray … in the direction of my body … (starts to cry) oh, my poor body … I’m not ready to leave yet. (subject pulls back in his chair as if he is resisting something)
The subject is reliving the moment of death when an Indian arrow kills her by slicing open her neck.
Dr. N: It’s all right, Sally, I’m with you. I want you to relax and tell me if the force that took you out of your head at the moment of death is still pulling you away, and if you can stop it.
S: (pause) When I was free of my body the pulling lessened. Now, I feel a nudge … drawing me away from my body … I don’t want to go yet … but, something wants me to go soon …
Dr. N: I understand, Sally, but I suspect you are learning you have some element of control. How would you describe this thing that is pulling you?
S: A … kind of magnetic … force … but … I want to stay a little longer …
Dr. N: Can your soul resist this pulling sensation for as long as you want?
S: (there is a long pause while the subject appears to be carrying on an internal debate with himself in his former life as Sally) Yes, I can, if I really want to stay. (subject starts to cry) Oh, it’s awful what those savages did to my body. There is blood all over my pretty blue dress … my husband Will is trying to hold me and still fight with our friends against the Kiowa.
Note: I reinforce the imagery of a protective shield around this subject, which is so important as a foundation to calming procedures. Sally’s soul is still hovering over her body after I move the scene forward in time to when the Indians are driven off by the wagon train rifles.
Dr. N: Sally, what is your husband doing right after the attack?
S: Oh, good … he isn’t hurt … but … (with sadness) he is holding my body … crying over me … there is nothing he can do for me, but he doesn’t seem to realize that yet. I’m cold, but his hands are around my face … kissing me.
Dr. N: And what are you doing at this moment?
S: I’m over Will’s head. I’m trying to console him. I want him to feel my love is not really gone … I want him to know he has not lost me forever and that I will see him again.
Dr. N: Are your messages getting through?
S: There is so much grief, but he … feels my essence … I know it. Our friends are around him … and they separate us finally … they want to reform the wagons and get started again.
Dr. N: And what is going on now with your soul?
S: I’m still resisting the pulling sensation … I want to stay.
Dr. N: Why is that?
S: Well, I know I’m dead … but I’m not ready to leave Will yet and I want to watch them bury me.
Dr. N: Do you see or feel any other spiritual entity around you at this moment?
S: (pause) They are near … soon I will see them … I feel their love as I want Will to feel mine … they are waiting until I’m ready.
Dr. N: As time passes, are you able to comfort Will? S: I’m trying to reach inside his mind.
Dr. N: And are you successful?
S: (pause) I … think a little … he feels me … he realizes … love…
Dr. N: All right, Sally, now we are going to move forward in relative time again. Do you see your wagon train friends placing your body in some kind of grave?
S: (voice is more confident) Yes, they have buried me. It’s time for me to go … they are coming for me now… I’m moving… into a brighter light…
Contrary to what some people believe, souls often have little interest in what happens to their bodies once they are physically dead. This is not callousness over personal situations and the people they leave behind on Earth, but an acknowledgement of these souls to the finality of mortal death. They have a desire to hurry on their way to the beauty of the spirit world.
Comment 14
The consciousness usually leaves quite readily once the world-line is over. Any attachment is residual, but as time progresses they realize that the person that they love is still there. They are not tied to a given specific world-line. But that they can visit that part of soul or consciousness that is merrily hopping in and out of world-lines all the time.
What the person’s consciousness sees at this moment in time is the shock of an abrupt ending of a time track at death.
However, many other souls want to hover around the place where they died for a few Earth days, usually until after their funerals. Time is apparently accelerated for souls and days on Earth may be only minutes to them. There are a variety of motivations for the lingering soul. For instance, someone who has been murdered or killed unexpectedly in an accident often does not want to leave right away. I find these souls are frequently bewildered or angry. The hovering soul syndrome is particularly true of deaths with young people.
Comment 15
Again, there is not one singular world-line. There are multitudes all with different outcomes.
When a given consciousness wants to “stay” and visit loved ones, its mostly due to the fact that the traumatic events of the death is preventing them from seeing the reality around them.
They are not looking around and seeing their loved ones (or a percentage part off their loved ones) are outside of the physical reality as well. You are never alone.
To abruptly detach from a human form, even after a long illness, is still a jolt to the average soul and this too may make the soul reluctant to depart at the moment of death. There is also something symbolic about the normal three- to five-day funeral arrangement periods for souls. Souls really have no morbid curiosity to see themselves buried because emotions in the spirit world are not the same as we experience here on Earth. Yet, I find soul entities appreciate the respect given to the memory of their physical life by surviving relatives and friends.
As we saw in the last case, there is one basic reason for many spirits not wanting to immediately leave the place of their physical death.
This comes from a desire to mentally reach out to comfort loved ones before progressing further into the spirit world. Those who have just died are not devastated about their death, because they know those left on Earth will see them again in the spirit world and probably later in other lives as well.
Comment 16
For every world line is one consciousness. These “others” that surround the person are what I refer to as “quantum shadows”. They are a partial percentage of another consciousness.
Consciousnesses might spend the bulk of their time in one world-line as they experience time, but that is not where all the consciousness or soul is.
It is all over the place in many different world-lines simultaneously. Thus, in this case Sally died. Her consciousness left the last world-line. Those others that she cared about (Will) did not die on that world line. However, Will’s consciousness is not limited to that world-line. He is in other world-lines as well. Most as “quantum shadows”, but also in a non-physical state as well.
And as such, all Sally need do is look for Will OUTSIDE of the given world-line to see him, or at least part of him.
On the other hand, mourners at a funeral generally feel they have lost a loved one forever.
During hypnosis, my subjects do recall frustration at being unable to effectively use their energy to mentally touch a human being who is unreceptive due to shock and grief. Emotional trauma of the living may overwhelm their inner minds to such an extent that their mental capabilities to communicate with souls are inhibited. When a newly departed soul does find a way to give solace to the living-however briefly- they usually are satisfied and want to then move on quickly away from Earth’s astral plane.
I had a typical example of spiritual consolation in my own life.
My mother died suddenly from a heart attack. During her burial service, my sister and I were so filled with sadness our minds were numb at the ceremony. A few hours later we returned to my mother’s empty house with our spouses and decided to take a needed rest.
My sister and I must have reached the receptive Alpha state at about the same time.
Appearing in two separate rooms, my mother came through our subconscious minds as a dream-like brush of whiteness above our heads. Reaching out, she smiled, indicating her acceptance of death and current well-being. Then she floated away. Lasting only seconds, this act was a meaningful form of closure, causing both of us to release into a sound sleep of the Delta state.
Comment 16
When I was attending University, one of our close friends died. He was playing football and had an aneurysm and died suddenly. His name was Marty. And he went by the name of “Rhino” because of his cute habit of head bumping everyone who he met.
About four days later, me and my two friends were sleeping the dorm after a night of drinking beer. At around 3am we all suddenly woke up and all of us were sitting up. We all had a dream that Marty was telling us that he was fine and well and not to worry about him. It was so loving and kind that we have never forgot that experience..
We are capable of feeling the comforting presence of the souls of lost loved ones, especially during or right after funerals. For spiritual communication to come through the shock of mourning it is necessary to try to relax and clear your mind, at least for short periods. At these moments our receptivity to a paranormal experience is more open to receive positive communications of love, forgiveness, hope, encouragement, and the reassurance your loved one is in a good place.
When a widow with young children says to me, “A part of my husband comes to me during the difficult times,” I believe her.
My clients tell me as souls they are able to help those on Earth connect their inner minds to the spirit world itself As it has been wisely said, people are not really gone as long as they are remembered by those left on Earth.
In the chapters ahead, we will see how specific memory is a reflection of our own soul, while collective memories are the atoms of pure energy for all souls.
Comment 17
There are different types of memories. There is not one singular generic thing called a “memory”. There are memories that are attached to a specific consciousness. There are memories attached to a specific soul that controls that consciousness, and then there are group memories that are shared with other consciousnesses.
Death does not break our continuity with the immortal soul of those we love simply because they have lost the physical personhood of a mortal body. Despite their many activities, these departed souls are still able to reach us if called upon.
Occasionally, a disturbed spirit does not want to leave the Earth after physical death. This is due to some unresolved problem which has had a severe impact on its consciousness. In these abnormal cases, help is available from higher, caring entities who can assist in the adjustment process from the other side. We also have the means to aid disturbed spirits in letting go on Earth, as well. I will have more to say about troubled souls in Chapter Four, but the enigma of ghosts portrayed in books and movies has been greatly overblown.
Comment 18
Ghosts, spirits and sprites do exist, as do all sorts of other non-physical entities. However most humans need not fear them. They are typically harmless. What does happen is that other create situations to generate fear. And they use that to control us. Don’t permit others to manipulate you..
How should we best prepare for our own death?
Our lives may be short or long, healthy or sick, but there comes that time when we all must meet death in a way suited for us. If we have had a long illness leading to death, there is time to adequately prepare the mind once initial shock, denial, and depression have passed.
The mind takes a short cut through this sort of progression when we face death suddenly.
As the end of our physical life draws near, each of us has the capacity to fuse with our higher consciousness. Dying is the easiest period in our lives for spiritual awareness, when we can sense our soul is connected to the eternity of time.
Although there are dying people who find acceptance to be more difficult than resignation, caregivers working around the dying say most everyone acquires a peaceful detachment near the end. I believe dying people are given access to a supreme knowledge of eternal consciousness and this frequently shows in their faces. Many of these people realize something universal is out there waiting and it will be good.
Comment 19
At or approaching the moment of death, the consciousness changes the frequency of world-line changes.
This can be slower or faster.
In any event, the brain and the person interprets this as a general calming effect as there is a greater percentage of conscious “duration” within a wave state..
Dying people are undergoing a metamorphosis of separation by their souls from an adopted body. People associate death as losing our life force, when actually the opposite is true. We forfeit our body in death, but our eternal life energy unites with the force of a divine oversoul.
Death is not darkness, but light.
My clients say after recalling former death experiences they are so filled with rediscovered freedom from their earthbound bodies that they are anxious to get started on their spiritual journey to a place of peace and familiarity. In the cases which follow, we will learn what life is like for them in afterlife.
Gateway to the Spirit World
For thousands of years the people of Mesopotamia believed the gates into and out of heaven lay at opposite ends of the great curve of the Milky Way, called the River of Souls. After death, souls had to wait for the rising doorway of Sagittarius and the autumn equinox, when day and night are equal. Reincarnation back to Earth could only take place during the spring equinox through the Gemini exit in their night sky.
The Milkyway in the night sky.
My subjects tell me that soul migration is actually much easier.
The tunnel effect they experience when leaving Earth is the portal into the spirit world. Although souls leave their bodies swiftly, it seems to me entry into the spirit world is a carefully measured process. Later, when we return to Earth in another life, the route back is described as being more rapid.
The location of the tunnel in relation to the Earth has some variations between the accounts of my subjects.
Some newly dead people see it opening up next to them right over their bodies, while others say they move high above the Earth before they enter the tunnel. In all cases, however, the time lapse in reaching this passageway is negligible once the soul leaves Earth.
There are variations on where the “tunnel of light” appears when a person dies. Some report that it opens up right next to them, while others report it to be far away and they must travel to it.
Here are the observations of another individual in this spiritual location.
Case 3 – The Tunnel of Light
Dr. N: You are now leaving your body. See yourself moving further and further away from the place where you died, away from the plane of Earth. Report back to me what you are experiencing.
S: At first … it was very bright … close to the Earth … now it’s a little darker because I have gone into a tunnel.
Dr. N: Describe this tunnel for me.
S: It’s a … hollow, dim vent … and there is a small circle of light at the other end. Dr. N: Okay, what happens to you next?
S: I feel a tugging … a gentle pulling… I think I’m supposed to drift through this tunnel … and I do. It is more gray than dark now, because the bright circle is expanding in front of me. It’s as if… (client stops)
Dr. N: Go on.
S: I’m being summoned forward …
Dr. N: Let the circle of light expand in front of you at the end of the tunnel and continue to explain what is happening to you.
S: The circle of light grows very wide and … I’m out of the tunnel. There is a … cloudy brightness … a light fog. I’m filtering through it.
Dr. N: As you leave the tunnel, what else stands out in your mind besides the lack of absolute visual clarity?
S: (subject lowers voice) It’s so … still … it is such a quiet place to be in … I am in the place of spirits
Comment 20
The space directly outside of our immediate reality is the “universe” of the many, many world-lines. Within that space we can “hear” or “perceive” things. And as such it tends to be rather noisy…
Not just the sounds of the physical world-lines that lie as part of the “time track” that the consciousness was part of, but the thoughts of all the “quantum shadows” nearby.
Dr. N: Do you have any other impressions at this moment as a soul?
S: Thought! I feel the … power of thought all around …….
Dr. N: Just relax completely and let your impressions come through easily as you continue to report back to me exactly what is happening to you. Please go on.
S: Well, it’s hard to put into words. I feel… thoughts of love companionship … empathy … and it’s all combined with … anticipation … as if others are … waiting for me.
Dr. N: Do you have a sense of security, or are you a little scared?
S: I’m not scared. When I was in the tunnel, I was more … disoriented. Yes, I feel secure … I’m aware of thoughts reaching out to me of caring … nurturing. It is strange, but there is also the understanding around me of just who I am and why I am here now.
Dr. N: Do you see any evidence of this around you?
S: (in a hushed tone) No, I sense it-a harmony of thought everywhere.
Dr. N: You mentioned cloud-like substances around you right after leaving the tunnel. Are you in a sky over Earth?
S: (pause) No-not that-but I seem to be floating through cloud stuff which is different from Earth.
Dr. N: Can you see the Earth at all? Is it below you?
S: Maybe it is, but I haven’t seen it since I went in the tunnel.
Dr. N: Do you sense you are still connected to Earth through another dimension, perhaps?
S: That’s a possibility-yes. In my mind Earth seems close … and I still feel connected to Earth … but I know I’m in another space.
Dr. N: What else can you tell me about your present location?
S: It’s still a little … murky … but I’m moving out of this.
This particular subject, having been taken through the death experience and the tunnel, continues to make tranquil mental adjustments to her bodiless state while pulling further into the spirit world. After some initial uncertainty, her first reported impressions reflect an inviting sense of well-being.
This is a common feeling among my subjects.
Once through the tunnel, our souls have passed the initial gateway of their journey into the spirit world. Most now fully realize they are not really dead, but have simply left the encumbrance of an Earth body which has died.
With this awareness comes acceptance in varying degrees depending upon the soul. Some subjects look at these surroundings with continued amazement while others are more matter-of-fact in reporting to me what they see.
Much depends upon their respective maturity and recent life experiences.
The most common type of reaction I hear is a relieved sigh followed by something on the order of, ” wonderful, I’m home in this beautiful place again.”
There are those highly developed souls who move so fast out of their bodies that much of what I am describing here is a blur as they home into their spiritual destinations. These are the pros and, in my opinion, they are a distinct minority on Earth.
The average soul does not move that rapidly and some are very hesitant.
If we exclude the rare cases of highly disturbed spirits who fight to stay connected with their dead bodies, I find it is the younger souls with fewer past lives who remain attached to Earth’s environment right after death.
Most of my subjects report that as they emerge from the mouth of the tunnel, things are still unclear for awhile. I think this is due to the density of the nearest astral plane surrounding Earth, called the kamaloka by Theosophists.
The Astral Plane is just another term for the universe that houses our many, many world-lines.
The next case describes this area from the perspective of a more analytical client. The soul of this individual demonstrates considerable observational insight into form, colors, and vibrational levels. Normally, such graphic physical descriptions by my subjects occur deeper into the spirit world after they get used to their surroundings.
Case 4 – Exiting the “Tunnel of Light” and entering the “Heaven” Universe.
Dr. N: As you move further away from the tunnel, describe what you see around you in as much detail as possible.
S: Things are … layered.
Dr. N: Layered in what way?
S: Umm, sort of like … a cake.
Dr. N: Using a cake as a model, explain what you mean?
S: I mean some cakes have small tops and are wide at the bottom. It’s not like that when I get through the tunnel. I see layers … levels of light … they appear to me to be .. translucent… indented…
Dr. N: Do you see the spirit world here as made up of a solid structure?
S: That’s what I’m trying to explain. It’s not solid, although you might think so at first. It’s layered-the levels of light are all woven together in … stratified threads. I don’t want to make it sound like things are not symmetrical-they are. But I see variations in thickness and color refraction in the layers. They also shift back and forth. I always notice this as I travel away from Earth.
Comment 21
What we consider to be physical is actually the movement of quanta. It’s quantum physics. And all quanta are stratified and form patterns and relationships.
Our consciousness can interpret the visualization of this effect as light. For after all, that is the way our eyes see things, through colors and light.
What is actually going on is that the subject is perceiving the different levels of quanta that make up the physical universe. He / she “sees” it as light.
The quanta has the ability to move from one universe to another, so it should not be misunderstood. The consciousness can see quanta in different universes.
Dr. N: Why do you think this is so?
S: I don’t know. I didn’t design it.
Dr. N: From your description, I picture the spirit world as a huge tier with layers of shaded sections from top to bottom.
S: Yes, and the sections are rounded-they curve away from me as I float through them.
Dr. N: From your position of observation, can you tell me about the different colors of the layers?
S: I didn’t say the layers had any major color tones. They are all variations of white. It is lighter … brighter where I’m going, than where I have been. Around me now is a hazy whiteness which was much brighter than the tunnel.
Comment 22
A color is the absorption of light by a material. What you see is the colors not absorbed by the material. Thus it makes sense that the sensing of the “light” would be full-spectrum by the senses of our consciousness.
Dr. N: As you float through these spiritual layers, is your soul moving up or down?
S: Neither. I am moving across.
Dr. N: Well, then, do you see the spirit world at this moment in linear dimensions of lines and angles as you move across?
S: (pause) For me it is … mostly sweeping, non-material energy which is broken into layers by light and dark color variations. I think something is … pulling me into my proper level of travel and trying to relax me, too …
Dr. N: In what way?
S: I’m hearing sounds.
Dr. N: What sounds?
S: An … echo … of music … musical tingling … wind chimes … vibrating with my movements … so relaxing.
Dr. N: Other people have defined these sounds as vibrational in nature, similar to riding on the resonance from the twang of a tuning fork. Do you agree or disagree with this description?
Comment 23
All of these perceptions by the consciousness as it moves in the Heaven(s), whether in the physical universe (Astral plane) or the heavenly universe are interpretations of the quanta.
Each interpretation is based on a human sense. As that this the soul construction that the consciousness is familiar with.
This includes all the sense, from sight to taste, to sound, to vibration, to touch. And since the consciousness can apply human sensations to these quanta, the ability to manipulate the quanta can create human-like constructions.
S: (nods in assent) Yes, that’s what this is … and I have a memory of scent and taste, too.
Dr. N: Does this mean our physical senses stay with us after death?
S: Yes, the memory of them … the waves of musical notes here are so beautiful … bells … strings. such tranquility.
Many spirit world travelers report back to me about the relaxing sensations of musical vibrations. Noise sensations start quite early after death. Some subjects tell me they hear humming or buzzing sounds right after leaving their physical bodies. This is similar to the noise one hears standing near telephone wires and may vary in volume before souls pull away from what I believe to be the Earth’s astral plane.
People have said they hear these same sounds when under general anesthesia. These flat, ringing sounds become more musical when we leave the tunnel. This music has been appropriately called energy of the universe because it revitalizes the soul.
The Buddhism 31 planes of existence is one such believe that maps out and categorizes the various planes in the “Heavenly” realms.
With subjects who speak about spiritual layering, I mention the possibility that they could be seeing astral planes. In metaphysical writing, we read a lot about planes above the Earth.
Comment 24
The use of the term “planes” is a way for our human mind to understand the complexities of the different “textures” and attributes of how quanta behave outside of the physical world-lines.
The reason for this has to do with the construction of our own individual souls. Most specifically the garbions and the swales that connect them.
Other species, with different soul constructions, and different types of garbions and swale arrangements would interpret these variations quite differently and might even have a difficult time understanding what we are talking about.
Beginning with ancient Indian scriptures called the Vedas, followed by later Eastern texts, astral planes have historically represented a series of rising dimensions above the physical or tangible world, which blend into the spiritual. These invisible regions have been experienced by people over thousands of years through meditative, out-of-body observations of the mind. Astral planes also have been described as being less dense as one moves farther away from the heavy influences of Earth.
Theravada Buddhist cosmology describes the 31 planes of existence in which rebirth takes place. The order of the planes are found in various discourses of the Gautama Buddha in the Sutta Pitaka. For example, in the Saleyyaka Sutta of the Majjhima Nikaya the Buddha mentioned the planes above the human plane in ascending order. In several sūtras in the Anguttara Nikaya, the Buddha described the causes of rebirth in these planes in the same order. In Buddhism, the devas are not immortal gods that play a creative role in the cosmic process. They are simply elevated beings who had been reborn in the celestial planes as a result of their words, thoughts, and actions. Usually, they are just as much in bondage to delusion and desire as human beings, and as in need of guidance from the Enlightened One. The Buddha is the "teacher of devas and humans (satthadevamanussanam). The devas come to visit the Buddha in the night. The Devatasamyutta and the Devaputtasamyutta of the Samyutta Nikaya gives a record of their conversations. The devaputtas are young devas newly arisen in heavenly planes, and devatas are mature deities.
There are more than 10,000 crore (100 billion) solar systems in our Galaxy, and more than 10,000 crore (100 billion) galaxies in our Universe. There are many Universes in space. Past and future lives may occur on other planets. The data for the 31 planes of existence in samsara are compiled from the Majjhima Nikaya, Anguttara Nikaya, Samyutta Nikaya, Digha Nikaya, Khuddaka Nikaya, and others. The 31 planes of existence can be perceived by a Buddha's Divine eye (dibbacakkhu) and some of his awakened disciples through the development of jhana meditation. According to the suttas, a Buddha can access all these planes and know all his past lives as well as those of other beings.
-Buddhist cosmology of the Theravada school - Wikipedia
The next case represents a soul who is still troubled after passing through the spiritual tunnel. This is a man who, at age thirty-six, died of a heart attack on a Chicago street in 1902. He left behind a large family of young children and a wife who was deeply loved.
They were very poor.
Case 5 – Death in 1902 Chicago.
Dr. N: Can you see clearly yet as you travel beyond the tunnel?
S: I’m still passing through these… foamy clouds around me.
Dr. N: I want you to move all the way through this and tell me what you see now.
S: (pause) Oh … I’m out of it … my God, this place is big! It’s so bright and clean-it even smells good. I am looking at a beautiful ice palace.
A big beautiful ice palace.
Dr. N: Tell me more.
S: (with amazement) It’s enormous … it looks like bright, sparkling crystal … colored stones shining all around me.
Dr. N: When you say crystalline, I think of a clear color.
S: Well, there are mostly grays and white … but as I float along I do see other colors … mosaics … all glittery.
Dr. N: Look into the distance from within this ice palace-do you see any boundaries anywhere?
S: No, this space is infinite … so majestic … and peaceful.
Dr. N: What are you feeling right now?
S: I… can’t fully enjoy it … I don’t want to go further … Maggie (subject’s widow)
When a person dies, they care about those that are left behind. Yet, they are actually not really left behind. They are “quantum shadows” of the person. Their consciousness exists in both the physical and the nearby non-physical word. As they too are cycling in and out for form; wave / particle… wave / particle. A well-trained (spiritually or quantum-trained) individual can easily communicate to them at this period of death.
Dr. N: I can see you are still disturbed about the Chicago life, but does this inhibit your progress into the spirit world?
S: (subject jerks upright in my office chair) Good! I see my guide coming towards me-she knows what I need.
Dr. N: Tell me what transpires between you and your guide.
S: I say to her I can’t go on… that I need to know Maggie and the children are going to be okay.
Dr. N: And how does your guide respond?
S: She is comforting me-but I’m too loaded down.
Dr. N: What do you say to her?
S: (shouting) I tell her, “Why did you allow this to happen? How could you do this to me? You made me go through such pain and hardship with Maggie and now you cut off our life together.”
Dr. N: What does your guide do?
S: She is trying to soothe me. Telling me I did a good job and that I will see my life ran its intended course.
Dr. N: Do you accept what she says?
S: (pause) In my mind… information comes to me … of the future on Earth … that the family is getting on without me … accepting that I am gone … they are going to make it … and we will all see each other again.
Dr. N: And how does this make you feel?
S: I feel … peace … (with a sigh) .. I am ready to go on now.
Comment 24
After spending years in a given body, our consciousness becomes attached to the physical world. Even if we see our guides, angels or friends, we often have to be reminded that the entire time in the various physical world is but a learning event.
Before touching on the significance of Case 5 meeting his guide here, I want to mention this man’s interpretation of the spirit world appearing as an ice palace.
Further into the spirit world, my subjects will talk about seeing buildings and being in furnished rooms.
The state of hypnosis by itself does not create these images.
Logically, people should not be recalling such physical structures in a non-material world unless we consider these scenes of Earth’s natural environment are intended to aid in the soul’s transition and adjustment from a physical death. These sights have individual meaning for every soul communicating with me, all of whom are affected by their Earth experiences.
Comment 25
Perhaps. However, the consciousness can manipulate quanta and shape it. More on this later on. Thus all consciousness can create things through the manipulation of quanta, and it is much, much, MUCH easier to do outside of the physical universe.
When the soul sees images in the spirit world which relate to places they have lived or visited on Earth, there is a reason.
An unforgotten home, school, garden, mountain, or seashore are seen by souls because a benevolent spiritual force allows for terrestrial mirages to comfort us by their familiarity. Our planetary memories never die-they whisper forever into the soul-mind on the winds of mythical dreams just as images of the spirit world do so within the human mind.
I enjoy hearing from subjects about their first images of the spirit world. People may see fields of wildflowers, castle towers rising in the distance, or rainbows under an open sky when returning to this place of adoration after an absence.
Many people report amazing views that they “see” when in the spirit form. They report beautiful skies, flat surfaces with flowers, grasses, pleasant scents and fresh breezes.
These first ethereal Earth scenes of the spirit world don’t seem to change a great deal over a span of lives for the returning soul, although there is variety between client descriptions. I find that once a subject in trance continues further into the spirit world to describe the functional aspects of spiritual life, their comments become more uniform.
The case I have just reviewed could be described as a fairly unsettled spirit bonded closely to his soulmate, Maggie, who was left behind.
There is no question that some souls do carry the negative baggage of a difficult past life longer than others, despite the calming influences of the spirit world.
People tend to think all souls become omniscient at death.
This is not completely true because adjustment periods vary. The time of soul adjustment depends upon the circumstances of death, attachments of each soul to the memories of the life just ended, and level of advancement.
Comment 26
The adjustment period varies. It depends on the “age” of the soul and how many previous incarnations he has had. It also depends on the duration and the harshness of his previous life.
I frequently hear anger during age-regression when a young life ends suddenly.
Souls reentering the spirit world under these conditions are often bewildered and confused over leaving people they love without much warning. They are unprepared for death and some feel sad and deprived right after leaving their bodies.
If a soul has been traumatized by unfinished business, usually the first entity it sees right after death is its guide. These highly developed spiritual teachers are prepared to take the initial brunt of a soul’s frustration following an untimely death.
After a particularly difficult and grueling lifetime of hurt and trauma, the spiritual guides, also known as angels, will come and meet the distressed soul / consciousness and help them return home. This painting is titled “Hind’s feet” by Daniel Gerhartz and can be found on the Art Renewal Center website.
Case 5 will eventually make a healthy adjustment to the spirit world by allowing his guide to assist him during the balance of his incoming trip.
However, I have found our guides do not encourage the complete working out of thought disorders at the spiritual gateway. There are more appropriate times and places for detailed reviews about karmic learning lessons involving life and death, which I will describe later.
The guide in Case 5 offered a brief visualization of accelerated Earth time as a means of soothing this man about the future of his wife and children so he could continue on his journey with more acceptance.
Regardless of their state of mind right after death, my subjects are full of exclamations about rediscovered marvels of the spirit world.
Usually, this feeling is combined with euphoria that all their worldly cares have been left behind, especially physical pain. Above all else, the spirit world represents a place of supreme quiescence to the traveling soul. Although it may at first appear we are alone immediately following death, we are not isolated or unaided. Unseen intelligent energy forces guide each of us through the gate.
Comment 27
The non-physical world is not void empty blackness, but rather a warm and sunny place filled with those that care about you. You might well be surprised at how lushly populated it is and the great number of people and souls that care about your well-being.
New arrivals in the spirit world have little time to float around wondering where they are or what is going to happen to them next. Our guides and a number of soulmates and friends wait for us close to the gateway to provide recognition, affection, and the assurance we are all right. Actually, we feel their presence from the moment of death because much of our initial readjustment depends upon the influence of these kindly entities toward our returning soul.
Homecoming
SINCE encountering friendly spirits who meet us after death is so important, how do we recognize them?
I find a general consensus of opinion among subjects in hypnosis about how souls look to each other in the spirit world. A soul may appear as a mass of energy, but apparently it is also possible for non-organic soul energy to display human characteristics.
Souls often use their capacity to project former life forms when communicating with each other.
Comment 28
A soul / consciousness can project any image that it wishes to project. Mostly the “default” images projected to others is the image associated with the last (or current) earthly incarnation.
Now this can get confusing. What happens when you are moving about world-line sliding and in one world-line you are a poor beggar, and the next a heavily tattooed weight-lifter, and the third, a frail sickly man? What is the default image that is projected?
The default image projected is always the image that the consciousness associates with itself.
Further, the projected image is usually the upper torso. This will be apparent once one migrates about in the non-physical reality.
Projecting a human life form is only one of an incalculable number of appearances which can be assumed by souls from their basic energy substance. Later on, in Chapter Six, I will discuss another feature of soul identity-the possession of a particular color aura.
Most of my subjects report the first person they see in the spirit world is their personal guide.
However, after any life we can be met by a soulmate.
A soulmate is a person with whom one has a feeling of deep or natural affinity. This may involve similarity, love, romance, platonic relationships, comfort, intimacy, sexuality, sexual activity, spirituality, compatibility and trust.
-Wikipedia
Guides and soulmates are not the same.
If a former relative or close friend appears to the incoming soul, their regular guide might be absent from the scene. I find that usually guides are somewhere in close proximity, monitoring the incomer’s arrival in their own way.
The soul in my next case has just come through the spiritual gateway and is met by an advanced entity who obviously has had close connections with the subject over a prolonged series of past lives. Although this soulmate entity is not my client’s primary guide, he is there to welcome and provide loving encouragement for her.
Case 6 – Meetup with long-time friends
Dr. N: What do you see around you?
S: It’s as if … I’m drifting along on … pure white sand … which is shifting around me … and I’m under a giant beach umbrella-with brightly colored panels-all vaporized, but banded together, too …
Dr. N: Is anyone here to meet you?
S: (pause) I … thought I was alone … but … (a long hesitation) in the distance … uh … light … moving fast towards me … oh, my gosh!
Dr. N: What is it?
S: (excitedly) Uncle Charlie! (loudly) Uncle Charlie, I’m over here!
Dr. N: Why does this particular person come to meet you first?
S: (in a preoccupied far-off voice) Uncle Charlie, I’ve missed you so much.
Dr. N: (I repeat my question)
S: Because, of all my relatives, I loved him more than anybody. He died when I was a child and I never got over it. (on a Nebraska farm in this subject’s most immediate past life)
Nebraska farm house.
Dr. N: How do you know it’s Uncle Charlie? Does he have features you recognize?
S: (subject is squirming with excitement in her chair) Sure, sure-just as I remember him-jolly, kind, lovable-he is next to me. (chuckles)
Dr. N: What is so funny?
S: Uncle Charlie is just as fat as he used to be.
Dr. N: And what does he do next?
S: He is smiling and holding out his hand to me
Dr. N: Does this mean he has a body of some sort with hands?
S: (laughs) Well, yes and no. I’m floating around and so is he. It’s … in my mind … he is showing all of himself to me … and what I am most aware of … is his hand stretched out to me.
Comment 29
The appearance by a given consciousness is actually a compromise.
One one hand, it is the residual memories that you might have of an individual, and on the other hand it is greatly influenced by the default image associated with the other consciousness.
Dr. N: Why is he holding out his hand to you in a materialized way? S: (pause) To … comfort me … to lead me … further into the light.
Dr. N: And what do you do?
S: I’m going with him and we are thinking about the good times we spent together playing in the hay on the farm.
Dr. N: And he is letting you see all this in your mind so you will know who he is?
S: Yes … as I knew him in my last life … so I won’t be afraid. He knows I am still a little shocked over my death. (subject had died suddenly in an automobile accident)
Automobile accident.
Dr. N: Then, right after death, no matter how many deaths we may have experienced in other lives, it is possible to be a little fearful until we get used to the spirit world again?
S: It’s not really fear-that’s wrong-more like I’m apprehensive, maybe. It varies for me each time. The car crash caught me unprepared. I’m still a little mixed up.
Dr. N: All right, let’s go forward a bit more. What is Uncle Charlie doing now? S: He is taking me to the … place I should go …
Dr. N: On the count of three, let’s go there. One-two-three! Tell me what is happening.
S: (long pause) There… are … other people around … and they look… friendly… as I approach … they seem to want me to join them…
Dr. N: Continue to move towards them. Do you get the impression they might be waiting for you?
S: (recognition) Yes! In fact, I realize I have been with them before (pause) No, don’t go!
Dr. N: What’s happening now?
S: (very upset) Uncle Charlie is leaving me. Why is he going away?
Dr. N: (I stop the dialogue to use standard calming techniques in these circumstances, and then we continue.) Look deeply with your inner mind. You must realize why Uncle Charlie is leaving you at this point?
S: (more relaxed but with regret) Yes … he stays in a … different place than I do … he just came to meet me .. to bring me here.
Comment 30
Sometimes that is the only role that a friend might have. To help take you to where you need to be and where you are wanted and missed..
Dr. N: I think I understand. Uncle Charlie’s job was to be the first person to meet you after your death and see you were okay. I’d like to know if you feel better now, and more at home.
S: Yes, I do. That’s why Uncle Charlie has left me with the others.
A curious phenomenon about the spirit world is that important people in our lives are always able to greet us, even though they may already be living another life in a new body. This will be explained in Chapter Six. In Chapter Ten, I will examine the ability of souls to divide their essence so they can be in more than one body at a time on Earth.
Comment 31
Consciousness can split and spend percentages in multiple world-lines, and in various places in the “Heavenly realms”. One should not get too “hot and bothered” about it. We are consciousness and that is facilitated by quanta.
Usually at this juncture in a soul’s passage, the carry-on luggage of Earth’s physical and mental burdens are diminishing for two reasons. First, the evidence of a carefully directed order and harmony in the spirit world has brought back the remembrance of what we left behind before we chose life in physical form. Secondly, there is the overwhelming impact of seeing people we thought we would never meet again after they died on Earth.
Here is another example.
Case 7 – Reunions with loved ones.
Dr. N: Now that you have had the chance to adjust to your surroundings in the spirit world, tell me what effect this place has on you.
S: It’s so … warm and comforting. I’m relieved to be away from Earth. I just want to stay here always. There is no tension, or worries, only a sense of well-being. I’m just floating … how beautiful…
Dr. N: As you continue to float along, what is your next major impression as you pass the spiritual gateway?
S: (pause) Familiarity.
Dr. N: What is familiar?
S: (after some hesitation) Uh mm… people … friends … are here, I think.
Dr. N: Do you see these people as familiar people on Earth?
S: I … have a sensation of their presence … people I knew
Dr. N: All right, keep moving along. What do you see next?
S: Lights… soft… kind of cloudy-like.
Dr. N: As you are moving, does this light continue to look the same?
S: No, they are growing … blobs of energy … and I know they are people!
Dr. N: Are you moving toward them, or are they coming toward you?
S: We are drifting toward each other, but I am going slower than they are because … I’m uncertain what to do
Dr. N: Just relax and continue floating while reporting back to me everything you see.
S: (pause) Now I’m seeing half-formed human shapes-from the waist up only. Their outlines are transparent, too … I can see through them.
Dr. N: Do you see any sort of features to these shapes?
S: (anxiously) Eyes!
Dr. N: You see just eyes?
S: … There is only a trace of a mouth-it’s nothing. (alarmed) The eyes are all around me now… coming closer …
Dr. N: Does each entity have two eyes?
S: That’s right.
Dr. N: Do these eyes have the appearance of human eyes with an iris and pupil?
S: No … different … they are … larger … black orbs … radiating light… towards me … thought … (then with a relieved sigh) oh!
Dr. N: Go on.
S: I’m starting to recognize them-they are sending images into my mind-thoughts about themselves and … the shapes are changing into people!
Dr. N: People with physical human features?
S: Yes. Oh … look! It’s him!
Dr. N: What do you see?
S: (begins to laugh and cry at the same time) I think it’s … yes it’s Larry-he is in front of everybody else-he is the first one I really see … Larry, Larry!
Dr. N: (after giving my subject a chance to recover a little) The soul entity of Larry is in front of an assortment of people you know?
S: Yes, now I know the ones I want most to see are in front… some of my other friends are in the back.
Dr. N: Can you see them all clearly?
S: No, the ones in back are … hazy … far off… but, I have the sensation of their presence. Larry is in front … coming up to me Larry!
Comment 32
Soul and consciousness works together with other souls. It’s sort of like how and internet connection makes a “handshake” with a host. The images you see are a mix of what you know and what the other entity wants you to see, with automatic defaults at all levels..
Dr. N: Larry is the husband from your last life you told me about earlier?
S: (subject rushes on) Yes-we had such a wonderful life together–Gunther was so strong-everyone was against our marriage in his family-Jean deserted from the navy to save me from the bad life I was living in Marseilles – always wanting me
This subject is so excited her past lives are tumbling one on top of the other. Larry, Gunther, and Jean were all former husbands, but the same soulmate. I was glad we had a chance to review earlier who these people were in sessions before this interval of recall in the spirit world. Besides Larry, her recent American husband, Jean was a French sailor in the nineteenth century and Gunther was the son of German aristocrats living in the eighteenth century.
Dr. N: What are the two of you doing right now?
S: Embracing.
Dr. N: If a third party were to look at the two of you embracing at this moment, what would they see?
S: (no answer)
Dr. N: (the subject is so engrossed in the scene with her soulmate there are tears streaming down her face. I wait a moment and then try again.) What would you and Larry look like to someone watching you in the spirit world right now?
S: They would see… two masses of bright light whirling around each other, I guess … (subject begins to settle down and I help wipe the tears off her face with a tissue)
Dr. N: And what does this signify?
S: We are hugging … expressing love … connecting … it makes us happy …
Dr. N: After you meet your soulmate, what happens next?
S: (subject tightly grips the recliner arms) Oh-they are all here-I only sensed them before. Now more are coming closer to me.
Dr. N: And this happens after your husband comes near you?
S: Yes … Mother! She is coming over to me … I’ve missed her so much… oh, Mom… (subject begins to cry again)
Dr. N: All right …
S: Oh, please don’t ask me any questions now-I want to enjoy this (subject appears to be in silent conversation with her mother of the last life)
Dr. N: (I wait for a minute) Now, I know you are enjoying this meeting, but I need you to help me know what is going on.
S: (in a faraway voice) We … we are just holding each other … it’s so good to be with her again
Dr. N: How do you manage to hold each other with no bodies?
S: (with a sigh of exasperation at me) We envelop each other in light, of course.
Dr. N: Tell me what that is like for spirits?
S: Like being wrapped in a bright-light blanket of love.
Dr. N: I see, then ….
S: (subject interrupts with a high pitched laugh of recognition) Tim!… it’s my brother-he died so young (a drowning accident at age fourteen in her last life). It’s so wonderful to see him here. (subject waves her arm) And there is my best girl friend Wilma-from next door-we are laughing together over boys like we did while sitting up in her attic.
Dr. N: (after subject mentions her aunt and a couple of other friends) What do you think determines the sequence of how all these people come here to greet you?
S: (pause) Why, how much we all mean to each other-what else?
Dr. N: And with some, you have lived many lives, while with others perhaps only one or two?
S: Yes … I have been with my husband the most.
Dr. N: Do you see your guide around anywhere?
S: He is here. I see him floating off to the side. He knows some of my friends, too … Dr. N: Why do you call your guide a “him?”
We can contact our guardian angels, and our soul support group through prayer and intention. While I have addressed using intention to navigate our world lines, we can also use it to ask our friends, relatives and angels to help us. If we do the prayers properly they will actually help us. It’s nothing to laugh or scoff about. We live in a universe of thought, and clear directed thoughts are messages that will go to their intended recipient.
S: We all show what we want of ourselves. He always relates to me with a masculine nature. It’s right and very natural.
Dr. N: And does he watch over you in all your lives?
Important advice
As I have stated previously in my SHTF posts, it is our relationships that make our life worthwhile. Use this time in your day to day lives to be the best friend that you can be.
S: Sure, and after death too … here, and he is always my protector.
Our reception committee is planned in advance for us as we enter the spirit world. This case demonstrates how uplifting familiar faces can be to the incoming younger soul.
I find there are a different number of entities waiting in greeting parties after each life.
Although the meeting format varies, depending on a soul’s special needs, I have learned there is nothing haphazard about our spiritual associates knowing exactly when we are due and where to meet us upon our arrival in the spirit world.
Frequently, an entity who is significant to us will be waiting a little in front of the others who want to be on hand as we come through the gateway.
The size of welcoming parties not only changes for everyone after each life, but is drastically reduced to almost nothing for more advanced souls where spiritual comfort becomes less necessary. Case 9, at the end of this chapter, is an example of this type of spiritual passage.
Cases 6 and 7 both represent one of the three ways newly arrived souls are received back into the spirit world. These two souls were met shortly after death by a principal entity, followed by others of decreasing influence. Case 7 recognized people more quickly than Case 6. When we meet such spirits in a gathering right after our death, we find they have been spouses parents, grandparents, siblings, uncles, aunts, cousins, and dear friends in our past lives. I have witnessed some gut- wrenching emotional scenes with my clients at this stage of their passage.
The emotional meetings which take place between souls at this interval in a spiritual passage are only a prelude to our eventual placement within a specific group of entities at our own maturity level.
These meetings provide another emotional high for a subject in superconscious recall. Spiritual organizational arrangements, involving how groups form and are cross-matched with other entities, will be described in subsequent chapters.
For the present, it is important we understand welcoming entities may not be part of our own particular learning group in the spirit world. This is because all the people who are close to us in our lives are not on the same developmental level.
Simply because they choose to meet us right after death out of love and kindness does not mean they will all be part of our spiritual learning group when we arrive at the final destination of this journey.
For instance, in Case 6, Uncle Charlie was clearly a more advanced soul than my subject and may even have been serving in the capacity of a spiritual guide. It was evident to me that one of the primary tasks of Uncle Charlie’s soul was to help Case 6 as a child in the life just ended, and his responsibility continued right after my subject’s death.
With Case 7, the important first contact was Larry, a true soulmate on the same level as this subject. Notice also in Case 7, that my subject’s spiritual guide was not conspicuous among her former relatives and friends. However, as the scene unfolded, there were indications of a spiritual guide orchestrating the whole meeting process while remaining in the background.
I see this in many cases.
The second manner in which we are met right after death involves a quiet, meaningful encounter with one’s spiritual guide where no one else is revealed in the immediate vicinity, as in Case 5.
Case 8 further illustrates this sort of meeting.
What type of after-death meeting we do experience appears to involve the particular style of our spiritual guide along with requisites of our individual character. I find the duration of this first meeting with our guides does vary after each life depending upon the circumstances of that life.
Case 8 shows the very close relationships people have with their spiritual guides.
Many guides have strange sounding names, while others are rather conventional. I find it interesting that the old-fashioned religious term of having a “guardian angel” is now used metaphysically to denote an empathetic spirit.
A Catholic version of a Guardian Angel.
To be honest, this is a term I once denigrated as being foolishly loaded with wishful thinking and representing an out-dated mythology at odds with the modern world. I don’t have that belief anymore about guardian angels.
Comment 33
There are all sorts of non-physical beings. Many of which we know, deep down inside us. They can appear to us in many forms, but the form will always be the one that is most comforting to us.
I am repeatedly told that the soul itself is androgynous, and yet, in the same breath, clients declare sex is not an unimportant factor.
In the movie “Contact”, an extraterrestrial took the comforting shape of the astronauts’ father to put her at ease and comfort her. In the non-physical reality, our friends and angles will take on the forms that we find most appealing and meaningful to us.
I have learned all souls can and do assume male and female mental impressions toward other entities as a form of identity preference. Cases 6 and 7 show the importance of the newly arrived soul in seeing familiar “faces” identified by gender.
This is also true of the next case. Another reason why I selected Case 8 is to indicate how and why souls choose to visually appear in human form to others in the spirit world.
Case 8 – Spirits in human form
Dr. N: You have just started to actually leave the Earth’s astral plane now, and are moving further and further into the spirit world. I want you to tell me what you feel.
S: The silence … so peaceful …
Dr. N: Is anyone coming to meet you?
S: Yes, it’s my friend Rachel. She is always here for me when I die.
Dr. N: Is Rachel a soulmate who has been with you in other lives, or is she someone who always remains here?
S: (with some indignation) She doesn’t always stay here. No, she is with me a lot-in my mind-when I need her. She is my own guardian (said with possessive pride).
Note: The attributes of guides as differentiated from soulmates and other supportive entities will be examined in Chapter Eight.
Spirits can take the form of humans or angels as they deem necessary.
Dr. N: Why do you call this entity a “she”? Aren’t spirits supposed to be sexless?
S: That’s right-in a literal way, because we are capable of both attributes. Rachel wants to show herself to me as a woman for the visual knowing and it is a mental thing as well with her.
Dr. N: Are you locked into male or female attributes during your spiritual existence?
S: No. As souls there are periods in our existence when we are more inclined toward one gender than another. Eventually, this natural preference evens out.
Dr. N: Would you describe how Rachel’s soul actually looks to you at this moment? S: (quietly) A youngish woman … as I remember her best … small, with delicate features … a determined expression on her face … so much knowledge and love.
Dr. N: Then you have known Rachel on Earth?
S: (responding with nostalgia) Once, long ago, she was close to me in life … now she is my guardian.
Dr. N: And what do you feel when you look at her?
S: A calmness … tranquility … love …
Dr. N: Do you and Rachel actually look at each other with eyes in a human way?
S: (hesitates) Sort of … but different. You see the mind behind what we take to be eyes, because that is what we relate to on Earth. Of course, we can do the same thing as humans on Earth, too …
Comment 34
Those creatures in spirit perceive the quanta around them by the same senses that they had when they were living on earth. For a human, the dominant sense is visual, for a dog it would be through scents..
Dr. N: What can you do on Earth with your eyes that can also be done in the spirit world?
S: When you look into a certain person’s eyes on the ground-even people you have just met-and see a light you have known before well, that tells you something about them. As a human you don’t know why-but your soul remembers.
Note: I have heard about the light of spiritual identity being reflected in the human eyes of a soulmate expressed in a variety of ways from many clients. As for myself, I have knowingly experienced this instant recognition only once in my life at the moment I first saw my own wife. The effect is startling, and a bit eerie as well.
Dr. N: Are you saying that sometimes on Earth when two people look at each other, they may feel they have known one another before?
S: Yes, it’s deja vu.
Dr. N: Let’s go back to Rachel in the spirit world. If your guardian did not project an image of herself in human form to you, would you have known her anyway?
S: Well, naturally we can always identify each other by the mind. But, it’s nicer this way. I know it sounds crazy, but it’s a … social thing … seeing a familiar face puts you at ease.
Dr. N: Seeing human features of people you knew in past lives is a good thing then, particularly in the readjustment period right after leaving Earth?
S: Yeah, otherwise you feel a little lost at first … lonesome … and maybe confused, too … seeing people as they were helps me get used to things here faster when I first come back, and seeing Rachel is always a big boost.
Dr. N: Does Rachel present herself to you in human form right after each death on Earth as a way of getting you readjusted to the spirit world?
S: (eagerly) Oh, yes-she does! And she gives me security. I feel better when I see others I have known before too …
Dr. N: And do you speak to these people?
S: No one speaks, we communicate by the mind.
Dr. N: Telepathically?
S: Yes.
Comment 35
Most of the extraterrestrials that I have been exposed to utilize quantum technologies, and also have a far better understanding of the non-physical worlds than we do. Thus, many of them communicate telepathically.
Dr. N: Is it possible for souls to have private conversations which cannot be telepathically picked up by others?
S: (pause) … for intimacy-yes.
Dr. N: How is this done?
S: By touch-it’s called touching communication.
Note: When two spirits come so close to each other they are conjoined, my subjects say they can send private thoughts by touch which passes between them as “electrical sound impulses.” In most instances, subjects in hypnosis do not wish to talk to me about these personal confidences.
Dr. N: Could you clarify for me how human features can be projected by you as a soul?
S: From … my mass of energy… I just think of the features I want … but I can’t tell you what gives me the ability to do this.
Dr. N: Well, then, can you tell me why you and the other souls project certain features at different times?
S: (long pause) It depends on where you are in your movements around here … when you see another… and your state of mind then.
Dr. N: That’s what I want to get at. Tell me more about recognition.
S: You see, recognition depends on a person’s … feelings when you meet them here. They will show you what they want you to see of themselves and what they think you want to see. It also depends on the circumstances of your meeting with them.
Dr. N: Can you be more specific? What different circumstances can cause energy forms to materialize in a certain way toward other spirits?
S: It is the difference between your being on their turf or your turf. They may choose to show you one set of features in one place, while in another you might see something else.
Note: Spiritual “territory” will be explained as we proceed further into the spirit world.
Dr. N: Are you telling me that a soul may show you one face at the gateway to the spirit world and another image later in a different situation?
S: That’s right. Dr. N: Why?
S: Like I was telling you, a lot of how we present ourselves to each other depends on what we are feeling right then … what relationship we have with a certain person and where we are.
Dr. N: Please tell me if I understand all this correctly. The identity souls project to each other depends on timing and location in the Spirit world as well as mood, and maybe psychological states of mind when they meet?
S: Sure, and it works both ways … it’s interconnecting.
Dr. N: Then, how can we know the true character of a soul’s consciousness with all these changes in each other’s image?
S: (laughs) The image you project never hides who you really are from the rest of us. Anyway, it’s not the same kind of emotion we know on Earth. Here it is more … abstract. Why we project certain features and thoughts … is based on a … confirmation of ideas.
Dr. N: Ideas? Do you mean your sentiments at the time?
S: Yes … sort of… because these human features were part of our physical lives in other places when we discovered things … and developed ideas … it is all a … continuum for us to use here.
Dr. N: Well, if in each of our past lives we have a different face, which one do we assume between lives?
S: We mix it up. You assume those features which the person you see will most recognize as you, depending on what you want to communicate.
Comment 36
This action and behavior is automatic and natural. It is much the way that we humans use facial expressions and body language when talking to others. There just isn’t any conscious control over our actions, we just behave that way.
Dr. N: What about communication without projecting features?
S: Sure, we do that-it’s normal-but I mentally associate with people more quickly with features.
Dr. N: Do you favor projecting a certain set of facial features?
S: Hmm … I like the face with the mustache … having a rock-hard jaw…
Dr. N: You mean when you were Jeff Tanner, the cowpuncher from Texas in the life we discussed earlier?
S: (laughs) That’s it-and I have had faces like Jeff’s in other lives, too.
Dr. N: But, why Jeff? Was it just because he was you in your last life?
S: No, I felt good as Jeff. It was a happy, uncomplicated life. Damn, I looked great! My face resembled those billboard smoking ads you used to see along the highway. (chuckling) I enjoy showing off my handle-bar mustache as Jeff.
A Marlboro man billboard.
Dr. N: But that was only one life. People not associated with you in that life may not recognize you here.
S: Oh, they would get it was me soon enough. I could change to something else, but I like myself as Jeff the best right now.
Dr. N: So, this goes back to what you were saying about all of us really only having one identity, regardless of the number of facial features we might project as souls?
S: Yeah, you see everyone as they truly are. Some only want their best side to show because of what you might think of them-they don’t fully appreciate that it is what you are striving for which is important, not how you appear. We get a lot of laughs about how spirits think they should look, even taking faces they never had on Earth, and that’s okay.
Comment 37
Vanity persists in the non-physical worlds.
Dr. N: Are we talking about the more immature souls, then?
S: Yes, usually. They can get stuck … we don’t judge … in the end they are going to be all right.
Dr. N: I think of the spirit world as a place of supreme all-knowing intelligent consciousness and you make it appear that souls have moods and vanity as though they were back on Earth?
S: (burst of laughter) People are people no matter how they look on their physical worlds.
Dr. N: Oh, do you see souls who have gone to planets other than Earth?
S: (pause) Once in a while …
Dr. N: What features do souls from other planets besides Earth show you?
S: (evasively) I … kind of stick with my own people, but we can assume any features we want for communication …
Note: Gaining information from the subjects I have had who are able to recall leading physical past lives in non-human form on other worlds is always challenging. Recollection of these experiences are usually limited to older, more advanced souls, as we will see later.
Comment 38
This can be confusing. Each species has it’s own “region” within a universe. This region is also treated as a “universe”. Thus, it can be very confusing.
For now, and apologies to any loose statements that I have made in the past, we can consider the “universe” outside or next to the physical universe to be segregated into sub-universe or regions that each favor a certain species. It’s a spawning process and the lack of proper terminology can hamper our study of this.
This is how the different universes connect together. That being said, a human or a dog, or a cat, or a Mantid can visit all of them if they desire. But the universe of preference is our “home” universe. We go to our “home” universe (human universe for humans) via a space known as the non-physical universe. And of course, we enter the non-physical universe through a “bridge” known as the “tunnel of light”.
Dr. N: Is this ability to transmit features to each other as souls a gift the creator provided for us based upon spiritual need?
S: How should I know-I’m not God!
The concept of souls having fallibility comes as a surprise to some people. The statements of Case 8 and all my other clients indicate most of us are still far from perfect beings in the spirit world. The essential purpose of reincarnation is self- improvement. The psychological ramifications of our development, both in and out of the spirit world, is the foundation of my work.
We have seen the importance of meeting other entities while entering the spirit world. Besides uniting with our guides and other familiar beings, I have mentioned a third form of reentry after death. This is the rather disconcerting manner in which a soul is met by no one.
Comment 39
For whatever it is worth, it is not all that bad. You arrive in Heaven, in the same way that you put on your favorite piece of clothing. It just fits naturally, and you don’t need, nor want anyone to see you. You just go about your business, and that’s it..
Although it is an uncommon occurrence for most of my clients, I still feel a little sorry for those subjects who describe how they are pulled by unseen forces all alone to their final destinations, where contact is finally made with others. This would be akin to landing in a foreign country where you have been before, but without any baggage handlers or a tourist information desk to assist you with directions. I suppose what bothers me the most about this type of entry is the apparent lack of any soul acclimation.
My own conceptions of what it must be like to be alone at the spiritual gateway and beyond is not shared by those souls who utilize the option of going solo. Actually, people in this category are experienced travelers. As older, mature souls, they seem to require no initial support system. They know right where they are going after death. I suspect the process is accelerated for them as well, because they manage to more rapidly wind up where they belong than those who stop to meet others.
Case 9 is a client who has had a great number of lives, spanning thousands of years. About eight lives before his current one, people finally stopped meeting him at the spiritual gate.
Case 9 – Arriving alone in Heaven.
Dr. N: What happens to you at the moment of death?
S: I feel a great sense of release and I move out fast.
Dr. N: How would you characterize your departure from Earth into the spirit world?
S: I shoot up like a column of light and I’m on my way.
Dr. N: Has it always been this fast for you?
S: No, only after my last series of lives.
Dr. N: Why?
S: I know the way, I don’t need to see anybody-I’m in a hurry.
Dr. N: And it doesn’t bother you that you are not met by anyone?
S: (laughs) There was a time when it was good, but I don’t require that sort of thing anymore.
Dr. N: Whose decision was it to allow you to enter the spirit world without assistance?
S: (pause and then with a shrug) It was … a mutual decision … between my teacher and me … when I knew I could handle things by myself.
Dr. N: And you don’t feel rather lost or lonely right now?
S: Are you kidding? I don’t need my hand held anymore. I know where I’m going and I’m anxious to get there. I’m being pulled along by a magnet and I just enjoy the ride.
Dr. N: Explain to me how this pulling process works which will take you to your destination?
S: I am riding on a wave … a beam of light.
Dr. N: Is this beam electromagnetic, or what?
S: Well … it’s similar to the bands of a radio with someone turning the dial and finding the right frequency for me.
Comment 40
Quanta behaves similarly to that of electronic wave patterns, with frequency, harmonics and amplitude.
Dr. N: Are you saying you are being guided by an invisible force without much voluntary control and that you can’t speed things up as you did right after death?
S: Yes. I must go with the wave bands of light … the waves have direction and I’m flowing with it. It’s easy. They do it all for you.
Dr. N: Who does it for you?
S: The ones in control … I don’t really know.
Dr. N: Then you are not in control. You don’t have the responsibility of finding your own destination.
S: (pause) My mind is in tune with the movement … I flow with the resonance …
Dr. N: Resonance? You hear sounds?
S: Yes, the wave beam … vibrates … I’m locked into this, too.
Dr. N: Let’s go back to your statement about the radio. Is your spiritual travel influenced by vibrational frequencies such as high, medium, and low resonance quality?
S: (laughing) That’s not bad-yes, and I’m on a line, like a homing beacon of sound and light… and it’s part of my own tonal pattern-my frequency.
Dr. N: I’m not sure I understand how light and vibration combine to set up directional bands.
S: Think of a monster tuning fork inside a flashing strobe light.
Dr. N: Oh, then there is energy here?
S: We have energy-within an energy field. So, it isn’t just the lines we travel on … we generate energy ourselves … we can use these forces depending on our experience.
Comment 41
Quanta can be treated as an energy, or a light, or a carrier wave, or a homing beacon. There is an enormous science behind the manipulation of quanta.
Dr. N: Then your maturity level does give you some element of control in the rate and direction of travel.
S: Yes, but not right here. Later, when I am settled I can move around much more on my own. Now, I’m being pulled and I’m supposed to go with it.
Dr. N: Okay, stay with this and describe to me what happens next.
S: (short pause) I’m moving alone … being homed into my proper space… going where I belong.
In hypnosis, the analytical conscious mind works in conjunction with the unconscious mind to receive and answer messages directed to our deep-seated memories. The subject in Case 9 is an electrical engineer and thus he utilized some technical descriptions to express his spiritual sensations. This client’s predisposition to explain his thoughts on soul travel in technical terms was encouraged, but not dictated, by my suggestions. All subjects bring their own segments of knowledge to bear on answering my questions about the spirit world. This case used physical laws familiar to him to describe motion, whereas another person might have said souls move in this tract within a vacuum.
Comment 42
In all instances, the person describing their experiences utilize the terminology of their human experiences to describes their adventures in the non-physical worlds..
Before continuing with the passage of souls into the spirit world, I want to discuss those entities who either have not made it this far after physical death, or will be diverted from the normal travel route.
The Displaced Soul
THERE are souls who have been so severely damaged they are detached from the mainstream of souls going back to a spiritual home base. Compared to all returning entities, the number of these abnormal souls is not large. However, what has happened to them on Earth is significant because of the serious effect they have on other incarnated souls.
There are two types of displaced souls:
Those who do not accept the fact their physical body is dead and fight returning to the spirit world for reasons of personal anguish, (ghosts) and…
Those souls who have been subverted by, or had complicity with, criminal abnormalities in a human body.
In the first instance, displacement is of the soul’s own choosing.
While in the second case, spiritual guides deliberately remove these souls from further association with other entities for an indeterminate period.
In both situations, the guides of these souls are intimately concerned with rehabilitation.
But because the circumstances are quite different between each type of displaced soul, I will treat them separately.
Ghosts
The first type we call ghosts. These spirits refuse to go home after physical death and often have unpleasant influences on those of us who would like to finish out our own human lives in peace.
These displaced souls are sometimes falsely called “demonic spirits” because they are accused of invading the minds of people with harmful intent.
The subject of negative Spirits has produced serious investigations in the field of parapsychology. Unfortunately, this area of spirituality has also attracted a fringe element of the unscrupulous associated with the occult, who prey on the emotions of susceptible people.
Ghosts can sometimes be photographed if the conditions are right.
The troubled spirit is an immature entity with unfinished business in a past life on Earth.
They may have no relation to the living person who is disrupted by them.
It is true that some people are convenient and receptive conduits for negative spirits who wish to express their querulous nature. This means that someone who is in a deep meditative state of consciousness might occasionally pick up annoying signal patterns from a discarnated being whose communications can range from the frivolous to provocative. These unsettled entities are not spiritual guides.
Real guides are healers and don’t intrude with acrimonious messages.
More often than not, these uncommon haunted spirits are tied to a particular geographic location.
On November 19, 1995, Wem Town Hall in Shropshire, England burned to the ground. Many spectators gathered to watch the old building, built in 1905, as it was being consumed by the flames. Tony O’Rahilly, a local resident, was one of those onlookers and took photos of the spectacle with a 200mm telephoto lens from across the street. One of those photos shows what looks like a small, partially transparent girl standing in the doorway. Nether O’Rahilly nor any of the other onlookers or firefighters recalled seeing the girl there.
Researchers who have specialized in the phenomena of ghosts indicate those disturbed entities are caught in a “no-man’s land” between the lower astral planes of Earth and the spirit world.
From my own research, I don’t believe these souls are lost in space, nor are they demonic. They choose to remain within the Earth plane after physical death for a time by their own volition due to a high level of discontent. In my opinion, they are damaged souls because they evidence confusion, despair, and even hostility to such an extent they want their guides to stay away from them.
We do know a negative, displaced entity can be reached and handled by various means, such as exorcism, to get them to stop interfering with human beings. Possessing spirits can be persuaded to leave and eventually make a proper transition into the spirit world.
Comment 43
All over the world, throughout history, are tales of demons, ghosts and sprites. Also along with these stories are tales of how people “exorcised” these beings away from them. It is only recently, in the “new”, “progressive”, “modern” and “scientific” age of Newtonian science of the 1930’s that people started to treat the unseen as mere ignorance and superstition. They are not, and they should not be treated that way..
If we have a spirit world governed by order, with guides who care about us, how can maladaptive souls (who exert negative energy upon incarnated beings) be allowed to exist?
One explanation is that we still have free will, even in death.
Another is that since we endure so many upheavals in our physical universe, then spiritual irregularities and deviations from the normal exodus of souls ought to be anticipated as well.
Discarnate, unhappy spirits who trap themselves are possibly part of a grand design.
When they are ready, these souls will be taken by the hand away from Earth’s astral plane and guided to their proper place in the spirit world.
The Evil Soul.
I turn now to the far more prevalent second type of disturbed soul. These are souls who have been involved with evil acts.
We should first speculate if a soul can be considered culpable or guilt-free when it occupied the offending criminal brain? Is the soul mind or human ego responsible, or are they the same?
Occasionally, a client will say to me, “I feel possessed by an inner force which tells me to do bad things.”
There are mentally ill people who feel driven by opposing forces of good and evil over which they believe they have no control.
After working for years with the superconscious minds of people under hypnosis, I have come to the conclusion that the five-sensory human can negatively act upon a soul’s psyche.
We express our eternal self through dominant biological needs and the pressures of environmental stimuli which are temporary to the incarnated soul. Although there is no hidden, sinister self within our human form, some souls are not fully assimilated. People not in harmony with their bodies feel detached from themselves in life.
This condition does not excuse souls from doing their utmost to prevent evil involvement on Earth. We see this in human conscience. It is important we distinguish between what is exerting a negative force on our mind and what is not.
Hearing an inner voice which may suggest self-destruction to ourselves or someone else is not a demonic spiritual entity, an alien presence, nor a malevolent renegade guide. Negative forces emanate from ourself.
The destructive impulses of emotional disorders, if left untreated, inhibit soul development. Those of us who have experienced unresolved personal trauma in our lives carry the seeds of our own destruction. This anguish affects our soul in such a way that it seems we are not whole. For instance, excessive craving and addictive behavior, which is the outgrowth of personal pain, inhibits the expression of a healthy soul and may even hold a soul in bondage to its host body.
Does the extent of contemporary violence mean that we have more souls “going wrong” today than in the past?
If nothing else, our over-population and mind- altering drug culture should support this conclusion. On the positive side, Earth’s international level of consciousness toward human suffering appears to be rising. I’ve been told that in every era of Earth’s bloody history there has always been a significant number of souls unable to resist and successfully counter human cruelty. Certain souls, whose hosts have a genetic disposition to abnormal brain chemistry, are particularly at risk in a violent environment.
We see how children can be so damaged by physical and emotional family abuse that, as adults, they commit premeditated acts of atrocity without feelings of remorse. Since souls are not created perfect, their nature can be contaminated during the development of such a life form.
If our transgressions are especially serious we call them evil.
My subjects say to me no soul is inherently evil, although it may acquire this label in human life. Pathological evil in humans is characterized by feelings of personal impotence and weakness which is stimulated by helpless victims.
Although souls who are involved with truly evil acts should generally be considered at a low level of development, soul immaturity does not automatically invite malevolent behavior from a damaged human personality.
The evolution of souls involves a transition from imperfection to perfection based upon overcoming many difficult body assignments during their task-oriented lives.
Souls may also have a predisposition for selecting environments where they consistently don’t work well, or are subverted.
Thus, souls may have their identity damaged by poor life choices.
However, all souls are held accountable for their conduct in the bodies they occupy. We will see in the next chapter how souls receive an initial review of their past life with guides before moving on to join their friends.
But what happens to souls who have, through their bodies, caused extreme suffering to another?
If a soul is not capable of ameliorating the most violent human urges in its host body, how is it held accountable in afterlife? This brings up the issue of being sent to heaven or hell for good and bad deeds because accountability has long been a part of our religious traditions.
On the wall of my office hangs an Egyptian painting, “The Judgment Scene,” as represented in the Book of the Dead, which is a mythological ritual of death over 7,000 years old.
Egyptian painting, “The Judgment Scene,” as represented in the Book of the Dead.
The ancient Egyptians had an obsession with death and the world beyond the grave because, in their cosmic pantheon, death explained life. The picture shows a newly deceased man arriving in a place located between the land of the living and the kingdom of the dead.
He stands by a set of scales about to be judged for his past deeds on Earth.
The master of ceremonies is the god Anubis, who carefully weighs the man’s heart on one pan of the scale against the ostrich feather of truth on the opposite side.
The heart, not the head, represented the embodiment of a person’s soul-conscience to the Egyptians.
It is a tense moment.
A crocodile-headed monster is crouched nearby with his mouth open, ready to devour the heart if the man’s wrongs outweigh the good he did in life. Failure at the scales would end the existence of this soul.
I get quite a few comments from my clients about this picture.
A metaphysically oriented person would insist no one is denied entrance into the kingdom of afterlife, regardless of how unfavorably balanced the scales might be toward past conduct.
Is this belief true? Are all souls given the opportunity to transmute back into the spirit world the same way, irrespective of their association with the bodies they occupied?
To answer this question, I should begin by mentioning that a large segment of society believes all souls do not go to the same place. More moderate theology no longer stresses the idea of hellfire and brimstone for sinners. However, many religious sects indicate a spiritual coexistence of two mental states of good and evil.
For the “bad” soul there are ancient philosophical pronouncements denoting a separation from the God-Essence as a means of punishment after death.
The Tibetan Book of the Dead, a source of religious belief thousands of years older than the Bible, describes the state of consciousness between lives (the Bardo) as a time when “the evil we have perpetrated projects us into spiritual separation.”
If the peoples of the East believed in a special spiritual location for evil doers, was this idea similar to the concept of purgatory in the Western world?
From its earliest beginnings, Christian doctrine defined purgatory as a transitory state of temporary banishment for sins of a minor nature against humanity. The Christian purgatory is supposed to be a place of atonement, isolation, and suffering.
Christian purgatory.
When all negative karma is removed, these souls are eventually allowed into heaven. On the other hand, souls committing major (deadly) sins are condemned to hell forever.
Comment 44
I have very little experience in these “sorting” matters as described. I do believe that they exist. I do believe that Doctor Newton has correctly identified and discussed these matters, but my role in MAJestic did not deal with these issues and thus I have nothing to add to this dialog…
Does hell exist to permanently separate good souls from bad ones? All my case work with the spirits of my subjects has convinced me there is no residence of terrible suffering for souls, except on Earth. I am told all souls go to one spirit world after death where everyone is treated with patience and love.
However, I have learned that certain souls do undergo separation in the spirit world.
This happens at the time of their orientation with guides.
They are not activated along the same travel routes as other souls. Those of my subjects who have been impeded by evil report that souls whose influence was too weak to turn aside a human impulse to harm others will go into seclusion upon reentering the spirit world. These souls don’t appear to mix with other entities in the conventional manner for quite a while.
I have also noticed that those beginner souls who are habitually associated with intensely negative human conduct in their first series of lives must endure individual spiritual isolation.
Ultimately, they are placed together in their own group to intensify learning under close supervision.
This is not punishment, but rather a kind of purgatory for the restructuring of self-awareness with these souls.
Because wrongdoing takes so many forms on Earth, spiritual instruction and the type of isolation used is varied for each soul. The nature of these variations apparently is evaluated during orientation at the end of each life.
Relative time of seclusion and reindoctrination is not consistent either.
For instance, I have had reports about maladjusted spirits who have returned back to Earth directly after a period of seclusion in order to expunge themselves as soon as possible by a good incarnated performance.
Here is an example, as told to me by a soul who was acquainted with one of these spirits.
Case 10 – The “second chance ” at redemption.
Dr. N: Do souls bear responsibility for their involvement with flawed human beings who injure others in life?
S: Yes, those who have wronged others savagely in a life-I knew one of those souls.
Dr. N: What do you know about this entity? What happened after this soul returned to the spirit world following that life?
S: He … had hurt a girl … terribly … and did not rejoin our group. There was extensive private study for him because he did so poorly while in that body.
Dr. N: What was the extent of his punishment?
S: Punishment is … a wrong interpretation … it’s regeneration. You have to recognize this is a matter for your teacher. The teachers are more strict with those who have been involved with cruelty.
Dr. N: What does “more strict” mean to you in the spirit world?
S: Well, my friend didn’t go back with us … his friends … after this sad life where he hurt this girl.
Dr. N: Did he come through the same spiritual gateway as yourself when he died?
S: Yes, but he did not meet with anybody … he went directly to a place where he was alone with the teacher.
Dr. N: And then what happened to him?
S: After awhile … not long … he returned to Earth again as a woman … where people were cruel … physically abusive … it was a deliberate choice … my friend needed to experience that …
Comment 45
Always a fit punishment for those that have used and abused us. I live to believe that this is true, and I actually do believe it to be the case. Firstly because it is so easy to do. In the MWI you get to pick the world-line to experience that kind of terror and pain. And the selection would be such that you would really learn humility and the consequences of your actions. I also like to believe that all those people who commit unkind actions, in the name of “business”, or for “profit”, or for other non-overt actions will experience the results of their lust and greed…
Dr. N: Do you think this soul blamed the human brain of his former host body for hurting the girl?
S: No, he took what he had done … back into himself … he blamed his own lack of skill to overcome the human failings. He asked to become an abused woman himself in the next life to gain understanding… to appreciate the damage he had done to the girl.
Dr. N: If this friend of yours did not gain understanding and continued involving himself with humans who committed wrongful acts, could he be destroyed as a soul by someone in the spirit world?
S: (long pause) You can’t destroy energy exactly … but it can be reworked… negativity which is unmanageable … in many lives … can be readjusted.
Dr. N: How?
S: (vaguely) … Not by destruction … remodeling …
Case 10 did not respond further to this line of questioning, and other subjects who know something about these damaged souls are rather sparse with their information. Later, we will learn a bit more about the formation and restoration of intelligent energy.
Most errant souls are able to solve their own problems of contamination. The price we pay for our misdeeds and the rewards received for good conduct revolve around the laws of karma. Perpetrators of harm to others will do penance by setting themselves up as future victims in a karmic cycle of justice. The Bhagavad Gita, another early Eastern scripture which has stood the test of thousands of years, has a passage which says, “souls of evil influence must redeem their virtue.”
No study of life after death would have any meaning without addressing how karma relates to causality and justice for all souls. Karma by itself does not denote good or bad deeds. Rather it is the result of one’s positive and negative actions in life. The statement, “there are no accidents in our lives,” does not mean karma by itself impels. What it does is propel us forward by teaching lessons. Our future destiny is influenced by a past from which we cannot escape, especially when we injure others.
The key to growth is understanding we are given the ability to make mid-course corrections in our life and having the courage to make necessary changes when what we are doing is not working for us. By conquering fear and taking risks, our karmic pattern adjusts to the effects of new choices. At the end of every life, rather than having a monster waiting to devour our souls, we serve as our most severe critic in front of teacher-guides.
This is why karma is both just and merciful. With the help of our spiritual counselors and peers we decide on the proper mode of justice for our conduct.
Some people who believe in reincarnation also think if negative souls do not learn their lessons within a reasonable span of lives, they will be eliminated and replaced by more willing souls.
My subjects deny this premise.
There is no set path of self-discovery designed for all souls. As one subject told me, “souls are assigned to Earth for the duration of the war.”
This means souls are given the time and opportunity to make changes for growth. Souls who continue to display negative attitudes through their human hosts must overcome these difficulties by continually making an effort to change. From what I have seen, no negative karma remains attached to a soul who is willing to work during their many lives on this planet.
It is an open question whether a soul should be held entirely at fault for humanity’s irrational, unsocialized, and destructive acts.
Souls must learn to cope in different ways with each new human being assigned to them. The permanent identity of a soul stamps the human mind with a distinctive character which is individual to that soul.
However, I find there is a strange dual nature between the soul mind and human brain.
I will discuss this concept further in later chapters, after the reader learns more about the existence of souls in the spirit world…
This is the first part of a multiple part series. To go to the next part, please click HERE.
Do you want to see the main index?
You can access the main index of these kinds of articles here…
You’ll not find any big banners or popups here talking about cookies and privacy notices. There are no ads on this site (aside from the hosting ads – a necessary evil). Functionally and fundamentally, I just don’t make money off of this blog. It is NOT monetized. Finally, I don’t track you because I just don’t care to.
Please kindly help me out in this effort. There is a lot of effort that goes into this disclosure. I could use all the financial support that anyone could provide. Thank you very much.
Consider “the Baltic UFO”. This is an “object” that was discovered by sonar in 2011. I have to tell you, this is quite an interesting object, and the story, itself, is also quite interesting. When the story broke in 2011, the Internet was “alive” with buzz concerning the discovery of an undersea “UFO”. The interest peaked throughout the year and then slowly died off into obscurity when it was announced that nothing unusual was found under the water…
Well, the true and real story is much more interesting and curious than what one can find today on the Internet. (Remember, the Internet is constantly being rewritten and history retold with every passing day. The reader should never forget that.)
Indeed, a crashed object was actually found, by sonar, in the Baltic sea on June 19, 2011. It is true, and what’s more, the object had a disc shaped form (60 meters in diameter). From the sonar images it looked identical to an (typical saucer shaped) extraterrestrial UFO. Thus, people began to assume that this object was a sunken crashed mystery UFO.
Location map for the Baltic Sea Anomaly.
Further, a debris track and path was clearly visible on the sonar images.
The debris field and impact path were clearly visible on the sonar images released to the public, as well as on the first initially released pictures. But yet, today this is all forgotten. It is believed that nothing lies under the sea, and that only a small cluster of rocks were found.
What make this example of NSA cover-up so interesting is that it was completely unexpected by the NSA. Both Sonar and close up pictures were released to the Internet before a (United States government) task team could be sent to the site to acquire the wreckage. They clearly show a circular disc shaped, (aircraft sized) object, resting on the floor of the Baltic Sea. The images clearly depict a long debris field and associative carved-out track over 360 meters long.
This amazing discovery has been “hushed up” and “repainted” as just a normal ordinary rock of no unique interest to anyone. All of the initial photographs of the object have been deleted from the Internet. The only remaining photos that can be found are the topographical sonar images of relatively low quality. What happened to them? Why are they missing? How could this happen? Are all the photographs and sonar images wrong?
Crashed objects possess characteristics such as debris fields, crash and path marks of linear shape unless they hit a rebounding surface, (underseas) settlement fields that account for drift of submerged objects, and impact mounds. Since this object possessed all these characteristics, it is considered to be crashed.
Here is the original sonar scan of the “Baltic UFO object” as initially detected. It is an object, located underwater, which possesses a debris track and skid marks.
Background
Screenshot of an infographic when the Baltic UFO object discovery was first released.
Let’s just start at the beginning.
The Baltic Sea anomaly is a 60-metre (200 ft) circular formation on the floor of the Baltic Sea. It was discovered by Peter Lindberg, Dennis Åsberg and their Swedish “Ocean X” diving team in June 2011.
The team reported that the sonar has detected a 60 meter in diameter spherical object resting on the floor of the sea. Trailing behind it was a “track” or debris field that extended for 360 meters. In addition, there were “clumps” or groups of other associated objects in the debris track suggestive of a breakup of the rear of the spherical object.
The discovery was made on June 19, 2011 by the team during a dive in the Baltic Sea between Sweden and Finland while searching for an old shipwreck.
Here is the original sonar scan of the object resting on the sea floor under the Baltic sea. It clearly resembles a circular shaped structure.
Upon discovery the investigation team immediately dove underwater to photograph the object. (This was done before anything was posted on the Internet.)
What they found was not a strange rock formation, as subsequent reports have stated, but rather the presence of a [1] submerged spherical object suggestive of a “flying saucer”. It was [2] clearly circular and had a [3] curved shaped underside. There were [4] rectangular and box shaped areas that were [5] obviously removed or ejected from the rear or aft of the object upon descent. Furthermore there was the [6] presence of a “dome” or tear-drop shaped canopy on the top starboard side of the object.
They immediately released two photographs on the Internet.
The first [1] was the sonar scan of the object as it rested on the sea floor. It showed the object as well as the debris field and “skid” track that the object made when it “crashed”.
The second photograph [2] was of the object itself, as taken by the divers who went down to the object to study it. While one can occasionally find photos of the sonar scan on the Internet today, it is much more difficult to find the close-up photos of the object that was released, as they keep on getting deleted from the Internet servers (!).
In fact, I urge the reader to try to search for the original photographs on the Internet. Try it. They cannot be found.
See the attached picture below. It is a “screen-cut” of the (first) object photo along with the associated commentary of the frustrated person who kept on trying to repost to the Internet. Every time he posted the photo to the Internet, it would “mysteriously” get deleted.
This is the true initial photo that was placed on the Internet that raised all the consternation with the United States government. They immediately kept pulling it off the Internet. It became so problematic that UFO enthusiast commented on their inability to keep this photo on line. This picture is a screen capture of the original photo along with the UFO enthusiast’s commentary concerning it.
Now, just WHY would the photo be constantly deleted off the Internet? After all, there is no such thing as a UFO. Right?
It’s just a normal event that is misunderstood by the observer. Right?
Well, lucky for us, there are actually photos of the object that you can readily find. Why, my goodness, just look at the “approved” and released photos. Hum. Big change from the initial photo release.
Here is what we are expected to believe the object actually looks like;
This picture clearly shows the site as it looks today. There just simply isn’t any kind of disk shaped object, whether it be rock or spacecraft there. All that remains at that site is a circular pile of rocks and debris of where a disc shaped object once lay. Where did it go? Who took it? Why did they take it? Why is the United States government so intent in keeping the story behind this object so secret?
History Rewritten
A comparison of the two photos above tells the entire story. The first picture to the left is the original photo of the object as first found. This photo was released to the Internet and disseminated quickly. But every time it was posted or re-posted, it would be deleted. This is the object that was discovered in the Baltic sea. Note that it is indeed spherical and appears to have a curved underside body that is apparently resting on the silt.
The photo next to it is the “official” post-NSA version of the wreckage. Obviously there isn’t any object there. All that remains is just an odd and simple rock formation. The formation looks like a ring of stones with a circular central area devoid of debris. The point is that the two photos are the same place. The second photo show the area with the apparent UFO-shaped object removed. All that a person can see is the circular debris field that surrounds where the object once lay.
Obviously someone came and removed the object because it is no longer there.
Commentary
Through the control of the Internet, the government has rewritten history. They have make access to most of the original photos of the object impossible to procure. Thus the only things that can be found are what the government wants the population to believe. Their now official story is that the objects are but a simple natural rock formation of no significance in any way. Thus, through control of the Internet, media and history, people are now convinced that the Baltic UFO was just a misidentified rock formation.
In a like manner; the professional divers, the professional archeologists, the professional sonar operators and the professional photographers who were on the investigative team onboard the boat were all wrong. They made “honest” mistakes. They could not tell the difference between a scattered pile of rocks and a large saucer shaped object. They did not have the necessary skill to make accurate judgements as to what the object was.
The Actual Story
What happened is that, for reasons entirely unclear, the United States has taken it upon itself to hide all information related to extraterrestrial technology, or unexplainable events, even if it is outside the United States sphere of influence.
The pure truth , and the reason why this example is so special, is because the release of this information and information to the Internet was an unexpected surprise. The immediate reaction by the NSA was to procure ( and then investigate) the object, and rewrite the history surrounding its discovery. The information however, was already irreversibly released, still had to be suppressed. The (MAJestic) acquisition team went out to the site, and had numerous meetings with the owner of the ship and crew that discovered this anomaly. A combination of [1] substantial cash incentives along with [2] time-honed scare tactics was able to suppress any further release of information, and rewrite the discovery into a more conventional explanation.
Obviously a “weather balloon” or “swamp gas” explanation was not a suitable conventional explanation. Instead, the official explanation became one of an “unusual” pile of rocks.
Using a technique known as Infrared Spectroscopy, a sample taken from the anomaly by one of the divers was brought back and then subsequently sent for analysis to the Weizmann institute in Israel. The results are very unexpected indeed. The results indicate that a piece which was from the circle anomaly is made of Limonite and Goethite. These materials are part of the Iron oxides/hydroxide family – “that it is metal” and that “these materials would most likely to be found in a modern construction”.
Currently
As it stands today, this object has been “officially” identified as an unusual geologic formation. Mysterious in the way the known geologic process might have caused it to be formed, but not at all associated with extraterrestrial aircraft of any type. All investigations and analysis of this object are through samples, and images provided by NSA front organizations. No purely independent investigations are involved with this object at this time.
“It’s not obviously an alien spacecraft. It’s not made of metal.”
- Peter Lindberg
Currently, one can search the Internet for information on this object. There one will find a great deal of analysis and discussions on the samples provided by the NSA. But not one of the discussions and the samples are the originals as obtained directly, and independently from the site itself. What is provided, instead, are the “approved” photos and samples as provided by “official” sources. The NSA writes the reports. The NSA controls and disseminates all the samples. The NSA rewrites and modifies the histories published on the Internet.
This is how the NSA and their MAJestic umbrella controls the dissemination of information that it wants suppressed.
It works. Today, the “Baltic Sea anomaly” refers to “interpretations of an indistinct sonar image“. It does not refer to actual photographs of a disc shaped object lying on the ocean floor.
Baltic Sea anomaly. (Redirected from Baltic Sea UFO) The Baltic Sea anomaly refers to interpretations of an indistinct sonar image taken by Peter Lindberg, Dennis Åsberg and their Swedish "Ocean X" diving team while treasure hunting on the floor of the northern Baltic Sea at the center of the Bothnian Sea in June 2011.
-Wikipedia
Takeaways
An object was discovered under the water in the Baltic sea.
The object had the shape of a conventionally understood “extraterrestrial source” UFO.
The discovers posted detailed photos and sonar scans of the object on the Internet.
The detailed photos were taken down, and it is nearly impossible to find them on the Internet today.
Someone removed the object from where it was found.
Once the object was removed, photos of the empty debris field was posted on the Internet.
Today, the Baltic UFO is considered a trivial misunderstanding of a discovery of some normal rocks on the sea floor.
FAQ
Q: What is the Baltic UFO?
A: It is a large saucer shaped object that left a long crash skid mark and debris field. It was found under the Baltic sea in 2011.
Q: Is the object actually a UFO?
A: No. It is called a UFO simply because it resembles a saucer-shaped UFO.
Q: Who moved the object?
A: That is unknown. However, the person or organization that did so had the financial resources to do so, and the political pull to erase and rewrite history. It certainly seems to be the work of elements of the United States government. If so, then the hand of the NSA could possibly be at work. I cannot positively state that it was MAJestic. However, I am sure that some elements of MAJestic might have been aware of the effort.
Q: Why was the object moved?
A: There are two reasons. [1] To reverse engineer, study and record the object. [2] To keep all knowledge of extraterrestrial technology, and events secret from the general populace.
Q: What is the statist explanation of the Baltic UFO?
A: It’s just a normal pile of “everyday” rocks on the bottom of the seafloor.
MAJestic Related Posts – Training
These are posts and articles that revolve around how I was recruited for MAJestic and my training. Also discussed is the nature of secret programs. I really do not know why the organization was kept so secret. It really wasn’t because of any kind of military concern, and the technologies were way too involved for any kind of information transfer. The only conclusion that I can come to is that we were obligated to maintain secrecy at the behalf of our extraterrestrial benefactors.
MAJestic Related Posts – Our Universe
These particular posts are concerned about the universe that we are all part of. Being entangled as I was, and involved in the crazy things that I was, I was given some insight. This insight wasn’t anything super special. Rather it offered me perception along with advantage. Here, I try to impart some of that knowledge through discussion.
Enjoy.
MAJestic Related Posts – World-Line Travel
These posts are related to “reality slides”. Other more common terms are “world-line travel”, or the MWI. What people fail to grasp is that when a person has the ability to slide into a different reality (pass into a different world-line), they are able to “touch” Heaven to some extent. Here are posts that cover this topic.
John Titor Related Posts
Another person, collectively known by the identity of “John Titor” claimed to utilize world-line (MWI egress) travel to collect artifacts from the past. He is an interesting subject to discuss. Here we have multiple posts in this regard.
This is part two of a two part post. It concerns the calibration and training that I was part of . I needed this training to complete my mission parameters as part of MAJestic. Now, of course, none of this is supposed to exist. You can go anywhere on the Internet and type in “majestic” or “MJ-12”, and the first fifty or so sites will all be about it being a hoax or something that appeals to the “tin foil hat” fringe. You can believe them, right? After all, everyone knows that you can trust Google. You can trust them like you can trust CNN.
Anyways, if you believe them you don’t belong here. You can go away. Don’t waste your time here. Because it WILL be a waste of your time. There are no “secrets” or extraterrestrials out there in outer space. It is all just delusion. Right? Now, fucking leave. Thank you.
This post discusses a period of specialized training that I underwent in support of my role within MAJestic. It concerns “calibration” and “adjustment” exercises for a number of probes and devices that were implanted inside my brain. These devices consisted of three “sets”. One set, was extraterrestrial in nature and performance. The remaining two were terrestrially derived MAJestic implants.
All of the “training” and calibration exercises could ONLY be conducted within a specialized chamber, while all three probe “kits” were engaged.
Programming
There was a certain degree of “programming” I had to be involved in. I do not think that this had anything to do with the terrestrial core kit #1 or #2 probes. Rather, I think that it had to do with the interface with the core kit #2 probes and the base extraterrestrial probes. I was not instructed in the entire programming language. I was only taught the bare minimum of what I needed to know.
Numbers
For starters, instead of numbers, two means of conveyance are used. [A] Numbers were conveyed using a set of funky “O” shaped symbols (It was a base-8 octal system using (from what I can tell) seven symbols plus an “empty” symbol. Though I can be wrong, after all that was all many decades ago.) when used to identify a location or object. When used to convey an amount of a measure, [B] a set of lines were used. The lines looked like a comb, and could be presented in either a straight, curved, overlaid or stacked appearance. The closer together the lines were to each other was a measure of the mathematical power of the value. The height of the lines denoted proximity and / or magnitude. However, at no time were any words or sentences visible. It was all graphic.
The numbers were not based on a base-10. They were based on a base-8 system. (Luckily for me, I learned how to compute using base-8 in Middle School. Seventh grade, maybe eighth grade, I believe.) I suppose that my eighth grade teacher would have a heart attack, knowing what I was using what they taught me, for.
Cut-scene
As strange as this might seem, while under the ELF field, I underwent a “cut-scene” image of why the icons looked like they did. The reader must remember that, at that time, cut-scenes did not exist except in movies. I went through an event that was very much like a cut-scene in a video game. However, as I witnessed or viewed the scene, it was as if it was a memory to me.
This is how I learned. This is how I was taught how to use the symbols.
In the “cut-scene”, I could see a short hand with three very long fingers. (One thumb and three long fingers. The fingers were similar to our own human fingers, but much longer. Perhaps twice as long! They had fingernails, and knuckles, and a smooth complexion.) The hand hovered over some (highly reflective) soft tan sand on a very bright yellowish day.
It was like everything was sepia (Sepia tones are used in photography; the hue resembles the effect of aging in old photographs, and of older photographs chemically treated either for visual effect or for archival purposes. Most photo graphics software programs and many digital cameras include a sepia tone option.).
Then, very slowly, the index finger made long (easy and relaxed) movements in the sand. It went down and traced a long slightly curved line in the sand. Then the hand went and made another line perpendicular to it, and yet another, and finally depressed it’s long finger in the sand. That action made a “dot” that had a longish (miniature “I”) shape.
That was how and why many of the icons had long easy curves. It was a naturally easy thing to do. That is why the icons look like they do. They duplicate the writing method of the “parent species” that devised this system of pictorial icons.
That is how I learned. I “participated” in memories that instructed me as to what the symbols represented and why.
For numbers, the (four fingered) hand took the index finger and pressed it into the sand. It then dug a shallow hole with the hand. Then, it went and dug another shallow hole, but this time it put a pebble in it. Again, it went and dug another shallow hole. This time it put two pebbles in it. This continued until there were eight holes. Each hole was filled with pebbles or a oriented “dash” that was representative of them. Thus, the iconic depiction of an “O” was really a representation of the hole, and whatever was placed inside the hole.
During my training, I utilized numbers for certain roles and functions. However, they were unfamiliar. Instead of being base 10, they were in base 8. They also used these odd iconic glyph for them.
They based their numerical system on their eight fingers. Much like we based our numerical system on our ten digits (four fingers and a thumb on each hand).
Graphic Icons
Everything was in graphics through the use of graphic icons.
This wasn’t any kind of programming language using words as we would use today (in Basic, Java, C++, or Pascal). In computing languages today, they use commands that were derived from English words. This was NOT the way my graphical program worked. Here is a typical C++ line of code;
Here is a line of typical computer code. No matter what specific language a person is using, from Basic to C++, the code will always be in this form.
Things were quite different. No derived English words were used. Graphical pictures or symbols were used instead. For instance, functions came between these funky brackets that looked like a cross between fat bumper-car bumpers and a colon ( : ). Control of physical properties of physical items was denoted by a kind of bent “L” shape. Control of the material behaviors of specific elements (the “defaults” that we ASSUME are fixed in this universe ruled by the laws of physics) were denoted with a group of two symbols that reminded me of an “S8” appearance.
Orientation of the symbols was critical. There were also post and pre command modifiers that would affect the function within the brackets. Commands within the It was a coding language not unlike APL, but instead of automating functions, it created “ladder diagrams” to control the operation of various aspects of my implants.
Most of what I was involved with involved the selection of range modifiers for set controls. I didn’t actually write control stack language. However, I could as the option was there, but it was way, way beyond my skill set and ability. Instead I only knew the basics and adjusted what I was directed (by the facility manager) to adjust.
In function, he was simply reading to me over the microphone. I would then confirm when I had completed the instruction. I would imagine that the facility manager was simply reading typed instructions from a document to me, without any comprehension, what he was reading. Then, once completed, he more than likely shredded the document.
In every instance, I was able to do the exercises that were presented to me. I was able to run diagnostic scans, operate the limited debugging tools provided, switch in and out of secure communication links, secure a command and lock it in place. I was able to make certain abilities “soft” and then “harden” them into place, where necessary (float above and then sink into clay). Unlike conventional windows, no pop-up window or box ever appeared. Instead, the indicating icons would appear overlaid on the base overlay. Strangely enough, this never obscured the working desktop presented in front.
Once I completed a specific sequence, a new image would fill my visual cortex. I would need to complete the entire new sequence before I could exit. In other words, there was no “abort” key, or “exit” command. I do not know why this is (was) the case. Once a sequence was set in motion, I had to go through the entire sequence before I could exit it. Otherwise, it just sat there waiting for me to do something.
The calibration segment consisted of setting up presets and learning the basics on how to individually program the probes within an ELF environment.
Setting Up Presets
Setting up the presets was very easy as most of the presets were already set in place. All I needed to do was make minor corrections. These tended to be a matter of degree. For instance, one of the presets revolved around the scope or amplitude for the field. I had set it “close”, but later on, during my retirement, I wanted it to be more comfortable, and I changed the setting with the techs that came to retire me. Like stated previously, it was just a simple matter of moving a hovering or floating reticle over a specific setting and then hardening it into “clay”.
The presets were probably the most critical part of this segment. Programming wasn’t really ever used. (Once, I modified the code to enable entanglement.) In fact, I can honestly say that I never used the programming as part of my role. So, it really didn’t make much sense to train me to be able to access the “source code”. It was simply a great coincidence that I had the ability to reprogram the probes.
Programming
In general, in programming the various features of the probes, I had to learn to conduct rough “function chains”. These were just ladder diagram commands. They were identified with a start command symbol (looked like a big plump four-pointed star) and ended with an end command which kind of looked like a leaner and smaller four-point star. (Yes, I know the symbology is odd.) However, this was not always the case, while line functions always started with the “big star”, it could be “open ended”. That means that there would not be a closing “small star”. Instead, a “goto” command would exist. There were numerous icons for this command depending on what the function would go to next.
Unlike conventional programming, which runs in a line from left to right, I was taught to program from bottom upwards. Once completed, the program line would be presented in a horizontal fashion. It was read right to left. In other words, the “big star” icon would be at the far right, and the “small star” icon would be at the far left.
Further, the “surface” that this programming took place on was not flat. It was not like a piece of paper, a computer printout, or a nice organized surface inside a monitor. It was three dimensional. Elements or sections of “code” could be moved forward or backwards relative to my point of view. Thus, if I were to take a two-dimensional snapshot of the programming, you could see code in different sizes. From HUGE code “up front”, to unbelievably tiny code way in the back.
There were “objects” or “features” that I could manipulate. These looked like orbs, balls or concentric circles. They were connected to other “objects” through the use of lines. The lines would follow the curve of the larger objects that the smaller objects would be part of.
On top of all this, the programming was not in front of a monitor. It was all in my head. It was conducted while I sat down on the chair inside the ELF chamber at China Lake. The way these symbols materialized and moved about was by thought. Each one had an associated “feel”, “presence”, or “memory” (for lack of better terms) that I could “understand” and which helped me use the symbols. When I focuses on the component symbol, I would also access the associated “memory” or “abilities” that it possessed.
To me, they “felt” like thick cookies that fit together like dominoes. There were laws or rules that restricted placement. It was sort of like moving magnets around each other. The feelings, understandings and movements of the component glyphs only lased while my attention was focused on them.
Components
Within this command sequence were two major components. This consisted of [1] the program action itself, and [2] the objects to modify or manipulate. The objects to modify were themselves placed within a kind of bracket system that looked like plump baby bumpers. The objects themselves can either [1] be “named” by use of these kind of funky “O” shaped designs, or be [2] a set process that is described using other characters. Often these other characters would look like (backwards) curvy “L” or other odd shapes. Often, but not always, these objects were associated with a “position” within another process. In this case, they would utilize a queue icon (location within the ladder chain), which looks like a capital “I” with a dot in the middle of it.
All of the symbol glyphs that I accessed had a structure. Each structure had a purpose, and even a history. I could automatically understand an entire history and utilization of each symbol when I focused my attention onto it. Reader please note that the picture is derived from my memories, nearly 40 years ago. I drew up these symbols from memory using MS Visio. They are NOT what I used. Instead they are a pictorial representation of what I remember them to look like.
Naming of Objects
Each probe had a specific name (address or location finder) associated with it. When a given function would access the probe or groups of probes, a set object identification pattern would manifest. It would always be between the two (plump baby bumper) bracket icons. This can be [1] assigned or [2] accessed as part of another function. When assigned, the first line of “code” always specifies these objects first. Usually they were graphically larger than the rest of the code. When displayed horizontally, it was read left to right.
To the left of this object assignment, was an “assign object” code. It was always smaller in font text. It would consist of two icons. A “start assignment” icon which looked like a backward “L” (with a curved backward back) with a little “foot” (at the left end) that was upside down. This icon was also present to the left of the code that enumerated the objects identification code. Only it was a mirror image. The second icon was a “end assignment” icon. It looked like a backwards “L” with a curve backwards with an equal sign though it. It also was at the end of the object naming.
Here is a small example to show and indicate how all the symbols within the programming glyphs fit together. They are all designed around concepts and established understandings honed over centuries. We, as humans, are unfamiliar with these terms and concepts. However, that does not mean that they don’t make sense when we obtain understanding of them.
Example of assigning an object code
Here is the basic format that we used when assigning a code for a group of objects. This can be anything from a single individual probe, to a group of multiple probes, to a specific characteristic of a device or artifice.
Here is an example of assigning a numerical identification code to an object, a process or a sub-routine. No matter what the data involved, it always seemed to take on this general form.
As described previously, when assigning a particular identification to an object or function, it is made larger than the rest of the code. Further, it is preceded with a command that specifies that it is being made. The “to make” command has associated parameters associated with it. A specialized set of “brackets” are used to identify what is going on and why.
Throughout the programming code, the use of a given sequence of icons can be referred to or modified by the start-condition parameters as defined within the object / process definition segment.
Here is an example of assigning a numerical code within a pipeline of the process tree. Note that the entire location or “address” is identified by two thick “baby bumper” icons;
Here is an example of how an object “address” and or location is assigned within a process tree. Note that it is a two part operation that is placed between two plump “baby buggy bumpers”. Thus four iconic glyphs are used for this process. There can be other modifiers that can make the address variable, and these would be placed within the appropriate “bumpers”.
Functions
After the object, came the function. Many of the symbols used in the functions were easily understandable. For instance, a backward “L” (with a curved backward back) with a little “foot” (at the left end) would be “click” then an icon that looked like “two curved swords over a road”(like in the city of Baghdad) would mean “hold” This might be followed by an icon that would look like a stylized equal sign at a 45-degree angle would mean “share” or “interface or act” Finally, an icon that would look like a slash (an oblique slanting line) stylized with a dash next to it would mean “release”. This entire command sequence must be programmed into the system to work, so you would place a queue icon (that looks like a capital “I” with a dot in the middle) next “queue”.
Command Nomenclature
Commands would be read right to left instead of left to right like in English. So the command above is a simple “FETCH” command broken down into a series of icons. Like all functions, f(x) you need to specify the variable (x) or the object that will be modified by the command. This is placed within brackets (big fat ones like baby bumpers) before the function.
You “engage” the process by the “click” command, and then let the process actuate under the “hold pause and continue” command. It works a lttle like a “one shot”. Once the process is completed it then interfaces or runs or collects functions or data. This is the “share” command. Once the task is completed, you “release” of course. The entire process needs to be programmed, so you “queue” with respect to another action. Where and how it performs depends on the relationship of adjacent icons. In the example below, I used an “open arms” icon that means “accept input”, or in other words, I have to specify, what the values would be (or tie to another function that would provide those values).
Example
For instance, the below shows a very simple use of the fore mentioned fetch command. Here, one of the (characteristics) of one of the probes (identified by name, and shown to be part of a process queue) utilizes the fetch command to interface with another process. It assigns properties based upon a list of options. (The options come from the queue index in the object section.)
Here is an example of using a subroutine to institute a “fetch command”. You specify the location of the address and then specify at which point on the ladder tree it is accessed. You then run the function. In this example, we have a simple “fetch” command where “x” of f(x) = “fetch from”.
In the example above, we can see that the entire sub-program is a function. It references a location in the ladder diagram. This location is positioned between the two “baby bumpers” with a queue index icon in the middle of the location address. Then the actual code is specified. This is the function section. Finally, the entire sub-function is identified with a start and an end star.
When looking at the entire programmed function, the first thing that you can see near the end of the function is the objective of the function. Then to the right is the actual sub-program function. Finally the object to be programmed, or the sub-program that is to be modified.
Here is a typical function from above without the address component. It always seemed that the address contained all sorts of modifiers that would result in a much larger subprogram depending on how it was accessed. Here is the basic “fetch from” command all by itself.
The entire set of implants contained reams and reams of codes like this. However, access to specific lines of code was easy. You simply thought about what you wanted to do, and relevant code would appear. For instance, if I wanted full access to all of my memories, I would just simply think about “assess the code associated with my memories” and it would appear. Like all the code, the values for the objects and address location were pretty much meaningless to me. However, I did “understand” what they represented when I thought about it.
Strangely, I thought about it in a kind of 4D manner. I could imagine it moving and changing with different values and aspects as I thought about the function. It was cool, neat and baffling all at the same time. Specific icons (and the associated values and functions) could also be changed. However, if I wanted to change something that might be prohibited for some reason, I would not be able to change anything. There seemed to be a sort of “fail safe” editing command structure inherent in the program.
Initially, I gave a lot of thought as to what this was all about. After all, even though I now was able to retain my memories of the implant procedure, I did not have a clue as to what the overall purpose or what my role would be.
A very abbreviated overview of operation
In short, the programming for the probes was mathematically based but used a system that was employed to control the functions of complex aggregate machine-like artifices. Thus, it was neither a pure ladder diagram, nor a software programing language. It was something altogether different. As my ability to program software is rather primitive, the terms that I use herein is mine own and should not be confused with standardized conventions. The reader should also recognize that my impressions are that of a technically trained engineer that only understood what I needed to understand at the time. I was not, nor was I ever, an expert in this. Additionally, the ravages of time have corrupted my memories and what I think is correct could very well be incorrect. Never the less, I place it here, for the reader to ponder, in it’s impure state.
Functions
A function is what the purpose of the devices do. They can be programmed to do different things. Since we were programming ELF probes, and their interface with a biological artifice, it would make sense that the programming would alter or control the aspects associated with this purpose. In short, a function is a software communication method that would program mechanical devices to behave in certain ways. For our purposes, lets define these “ways” as “functions”.
In general it would take (iconic) arguments (that bracketed the operation command on one or both sides) and would return a specific action as a result. The functions can be;
Primitive – built-in and represented by a single iconic glyph. These icons had fixed operations and functions. They could not change or be modified by other functions or controls.
Defined – as a named and ordered collection of program statements. This functional output is whatever is defined in the parameters established near the objects identification code, and modified by the proper modifiers.
Derived – as a combination of an operator with its arguments.
Arrangement
The functions can be arranged in certain defined manners. These defined manners change the appearance of the specific code. In general, there are three different arrangements, each with a set or limited array of outcomes.
Niladic– not taking or requiring any arguments.
Monadic – requiring only one argument; on the right for a function.
Unary – requiring only one argument; on the left for a function.
Dyadic – requiring both a left and a right argument, binary.
Ambivalent – capable of use in a monadic or dyadic context.
Whereas, in our software code we tend to have binary responses (yes or no), this software code results in far more options than that. Each option can be “flavored” by the associated parameters provided by the objects identification parameter settings.
Operators
We also have a system where you can go “backwards” and derive a function. Here, it would consist of a operation or mapping that takes one (left) or two (left & right) function or an array-valued argument (operands) and derives a function. An operator may be [1] Primitive: built-in and represented by a single glyph, or [2] Defined: as a named and ordered collection of program statements.
Control
Why all this programming if we were implanted to be a robot? Certainly slaves, or robots are not provided with the means for independent control. The reader must recognize that at this time, I still had no idea what my “purpose” was. While it was all pretty cool, interesting and exciting to me, I still had no idea what all this would lead to.
I initially thought that at the most basic level we were to become a robotic slave to the commands issued to us. We were, after all, allowing the person at the other end of the transmitter to control our brains and thus ourselves. Oh, how simple I was then!
That was not the case, we were more valuable than that. They really didn’t need to pull out highly trained Naval Aviators, who have mastered multiple degrees, passes rigorous testing, and meet difficult levels of achievement to turn them into brainless robots. You could do this in other ways and use other people who were not so expensively trained.
Remember, to train a Naval Aviator cost over a couple of million dollars, so we were too expensive to turn into a household appliance. Whether it be as a mindless zombie to pick up a gun and shoot up a school, or to innocently walk into a meeting room and stab a CEO of a company. You did not need the kind of background and training that we had to do these things. The skill level requirements did not match; they were incompatible.
That does not, however, mean that the ELF technology and system isn’t used for those other kinds of tasks and assignments. I can only adequately comment on MY role and how the technology was used concerning my own life. I am quite confident that the technology is also used for other assignments and tasks of a different clandestine nature than mine own.
So, instead of simply being a remote controlled cyborg, we were taught how to reprogram our mind under certain conditions using the ELF signals. We could communicate as if we had Wi-Fi always in our heads, and we had access to control of our bodily functions at a level that was unprecedented previously.
Materialists like Daniel Dennet, Richard Dawkins, and Sam Harris immediately dismiss the possibility of an immaterial soul or mind that interacts with the brain and the physical body. Ah, what is seen in the physical is all that there is. Nothing else exists. Oh sure, there are radio waves, but that too can be explained as a hidden component of the physical.
They argue this on the grounds of classical physics. In this argument, the activity of the soul or any other immaterial entity, placing influences upon the brain violates the law of conservation of energy. They conclude that matter is the fundamental reality of human beings and of the entire Universe. They conclude that nothing else exists. Hogwash!
What is often ignored today is how Dennet, Dawkins, Sam Harris and the materialists fail to realize that the universe is not so simple. It is comprised of many other things that require effort to understand. These lazy folk do not want to leave 1900-era science. Their entire argument for materialism and the denial of the soul is based on an outdated “classical physics” paradigm. This paradigm was overturned in the 20th century with the advent of quantum physics.
The general thinking of many people, however, is still shaped by classical physics and for this reason alone, materialism seems like the most scientific worldview. It is not. Not by any degree of understanding. How in the world can you use a “smart phone” or an iphone and still hold this world view? Those appliances utilize quantum physics to operate gosh-dammit! Thus any comments in support of the materialist argument (against soul-body dualism) falls apart in the face of contemporary physics.
Here’s a quick review. At the quantum level, subatomic particles like electrons do not exist concretely; instead, they exist in a state of potentiality. For example, the electron at the quantum level does not occupy a fixed position or a momentum. Instead, the electron occupies an entire range of possible positions – and the evolution of these possibilities over time can be described by a wave function called the Schrödinger equation. It is only the act of measurement or observation by a conscious observer that [1] assigns concrete probabilities to each possible position, and [2] selects one of the possible positions of the electron and actualizes this possibility as a physical event. Prior to observation, there is no “matter stuff” but only “possibilities”.
Thus the key point; Material substance, as such, does not exist without an observation or act of human consciousness. Consciousness generates thought. Thought creates order of quantum potential. Ordered potential creates our reality.
It is therefore nonsensical to argue that material substances, like the aggregation of atoms, molecules and neurons can produce consciousness. Material objects, prior to conscious observation, exist only as wave-like potentialities and nothing more. The act of observation or measurement by a conscious agent is what reduces the potentialities into actualities, as Schrödinger himself writes about some particle x when it is observed at position K – prior to which particle x has no definite existence except in a cloud of potentialities.
Ah, but I digress…
Big Changes
Now that’s about all there was to the programming section of my training. In the grand scale of things, it didn’t last very long. I was at the ELF facility for maybe a handful of months. I “awoke”, and was taught how to program. I then self-programmed my probes and set the required defaults. Then I was reassigned to work off-base.
Only this time, I received instructions and communication straight from the source. No one needed to tell me anything. I instantly “knew” what to do.
I started to see (feel) immediate changes in myself physically, mentally and emotionally. I learned, then (quite early) that you just do not mess around with certain things. What I was involved in was a serious business that could have negative consequences if you were not careful.
I learned quickly what my skill set was.
I also learned that there were multiple world-lines. As such, I was taught how to adjust world-line programming. This also included time, the passage of, and the (apparent) direction of it. However, each time I ran through the “episodes” associated with the reading by the ELF station manager, it seemed like preprogramed memories would describe what was possibly transpiring at the time the changes were made. It was almost like I was performing within a cut scene and living out the consequences of my activities. This included both world-line alterations and time manipulation.
The capability remained present. Why anyone would want to invoke changes in time is beyond my comprehension. However, it is possible under the proper conditions. Indeed, this aspect is something that even now I am really confused about.
Off Base
I learned and was trained to invoke certain sequences for “advantage”. This training was substantial and is the subject of another post. In short, I learned how to navigate the MWI using link-access.
Anyways…
Bullshit
According to the Internet, there isn’t any extraterrestrials, world-line travel is a hypothetical fantasy, probes inside the brain is a fantastic illusion brought about by people with mental illnesses, and the idea that the United States government would be involved in such things is considered fringe lunacy.
The way things actually are has no bearing on what everyone thinks. In most cases, what everyone things is absolutely and positively in error. Many times it is based on assumptions that are flat out WRONG. Thus, when someone is exposed to the possibilities of truth, they recoil back in horror and dismay.
So, anyways, that’s about it for now. You can believe or not. I personally don’t give a flying fuck. If you want to believe that I spent my 1980’s wearing parachute pants, wearing a mullet, and watching “The Golden Girls”, so be it.
Global warming is a hoax used to siphon more money into programs that are saturated with “kick-back” schemes. Here is a typical example. Here is scientific data that PROVES that climate has been warming. There’s only one tiny problem with it. NOAA didn’t have any satellite data to support these findings. But, you know what, during the Obama Administration, you could get millions of dollars in funding if you could prove that global warming was real. What a scam! Yet, you can believe it if you want. No skin off my back, just don’t expect me to go along with your delusions. Just like I don’t expect you, the reader, to go along with everything that I am saying either.
You can believe everything CNN tells you. You can believe all about Global Warming. You can believe that there are 55 genders. You can believe that you are not paying enough in taxes, and that more taxes are needs “for ma roads!”.
My probes were not passive devices. They are interactive devices that required programming and calibration.
I can only program under the influence of an ELF field in a specialized chamber.
The probes were terrestrial (human) in nature, and they interfaced with extraterrestrial probes that were also inserted within my brain.
Retirement only disables my terrestrial probes. It has no effect on my extraterrestrial probes.
The probes permit certain abilities and advantages.
One such ability is MWI world-line travel.
FAQ
Q: Why did you have probes installed?
A: All members of MAJestic have probes installed. I had two “sets” or “kits” of terrestrial probes. The second kit interfaced with a special set of extraterrestrial probes that most MAJestic members do not have. This kit required a kind of specialized calibration and training.
Q: What was your mission?
A: I really can’t give out specific information. I can only talk in generalities. It was humanistic in nature. It supported the development of the human species in sentience growth. It was not like anything that the reader would think. It was actually pretty boring and dull. It was like selecting potatoes out of a truck-load of potatoes. It was nothing important at all.
Q: Who did you report to?
A: I worked independently and took commands from my probes and our extraterrestrial benefactors instantaneously.
Q: Have you ever used your programming skills since?
A: No. It was a one-time event. I learned how to mess around with the programming of the probes. I set up the defaults, and lived with the results ever since.
Q: Why do you say such nonsense?
A: Why do you read it?
MAJestic Related Posts – Training
These are posts and articles that revolve around how I was recruited for MAJestic and my training. Also discussed is the nature of secret programs. I really do not know why the organization was kept so secret. It really wasn’t because of any kind of military concern, and the technologies were way too involved for any kind of information transfer. The only conclusion that I can come to is that we were obligated to maintain secrecy at the behalf of our extraterrestrial benefactors.
MAJestic Related Posts – Our Universe
These particular posts are concerned about the universe that we are all part of. Being entangled as I was, and involved in the crazy things that I was, I was given some insight. This insight wasn’t anything super special. Rather it offered me perception along with advantage. Here, I try to impart some of that knowledge through discussion.
Enjoy.
MAJestic Related Posts – World-Line Travel
These posts are related to “reality slides”. Other more common terms are “world-line travel”, or the MWI. What people fail to grasp is that when a person has the ability to slide into a different reality (pass into a different world-line), they are able to “touch” Heaven to some extent. Here are posts that cover this topic.
John Titor Related Posts
Another person, collectively known by the identity of “John Titor” claimed to utilize world-line (MWI egress) travel to collect artifacts from the past. He is an interesting subject to discuss. Here we have multiple posts in this regard.
Let’s discuss my training. This wasn’t the kind of training that you would give to a new class of aviators every few months. This wasn’t the kind of training that involved textbooks, and a class instructor. It was something else entirely. It was alien to anything that I have ever experienced previously. Here, we discuss what I did at China Lake NWC, and how I underwent training for my particular role. This training was unique and different; the location itself was unique and different as well. The entire base was situated up high on top of a raised plateau high up in the mountains. Perhaps one might go as far as to consider the place to be equivalent to the Chinese Tibet.
Living in the “High Desert” was a wonderful experience, but not as great and unique as what transpired during my training. It was during the training that I became more than what I ever thought I was, or ever could be. This training and events appear impossible to comprehend, but they did happen; over four decades ago…
This post discusses a period of specialized training that I underwent in support of my role within MAJestic. It concerns “calibration” and “adjustment” exercises for a number of probes and devices that were implanted inside my brain. These devices consisted of three “sets”. One set, was extraterrestrial in nature and performance. The remaining two were terrestrially derived MAJestic implants.
All of the “training” and calibration exercises could ONLY be conducted within a specialized chamber, while all three probe “kits” were engaged.
Training Overview
The training mostly consisted of sitting in a chair inside a huge anechoic chamber.
Vintage head thing or device. How do you program or change one’s brain? Do you open up the skull and cut up the “grey matter”? Do you zap it with radio waves to induce electro-chemical changes internally? Do you flash it with waves? Well, in my case, probes were installed in strategic locations, and then the probes were calibrated and adjusted by ELF radiation.
An anechoic chamber (an-echoic meaning non-reflective, non-echoing or echo-free) is a room or chamber that is designed to completely absorb reflections of either sound or electromagnetic waves. They are also insulated from exterior sources of noise. The combination of both aspects means they simulate a quiet open-space of (apparent) “infinite dimension”, which is useful when exterior influences would otherwise give false results. These chambers are quite usefu for testing any item that is sensitive to electromagnetic radiation.
In fact, there wasn’t any formalized classroom training at all. There were no teachers, or teaching aides. There were no textbooks, notebooks, or classes. I only had but one “class mate” which was Sebastian (not his actual name). This kind of training was unlike any kind of training that I have ever had.
Training Center
The anechoic chamber was located deep within the China Lake Naval Weapon Center complex. It was located inside the complex within its own compartmentalized region. Of course, this base within a base had its own guard and fences as well. To reach it you had to go through the various checkpoints and guard stations. You would show the guard your badge and then the guard would log in your identify and cross reference it against a list of approved people who were on the access list for the day. As you enter into the more restricted and secret areas of the base, the access list becomes more and more exclusive. Thus allowing for more scrutiny on who goes in and out of the facility.
Once inside the restricted are, you had to enter yet another high security area. This was the region inside the security zone that was compartmentalized within the research base. Like all the other guard posts, your identify and your badge is checked against a clearance list to verify that you are who you are represented to be. Since this is a US Navy base, all the guards are marines. Wearing desert camo uniforms and carrying holstered 9mm side arms and combat rifles. (The M9 has been the standard sidearm of the United States Navy, United States Army and the United States Air Force since 1985, replacing the Colt M1911A1 in the Army and Navy and the Smith & Wesson .38 Special in the Air Force. The M9A1 is also seeing limited issue to the United States Marine Corps.)
They were typically young and in their 20’s. They always carried loaded weapons and side arms. They were always friendly and professional, but I have no doubt that they wouldn’t hesitate to shoot me dead if I were not who I was supposed to be.
All Naval bases are guarded by United States marines. At the time of my involvement, they wore desert camouflage clothing. I would pass through three gates when I went to the test facility on base.
They would always check the contents of the car we were driving in, or the bag that I had with me. In those days, I often rode to the complex on a motorcycle. It was great riding my motorcycle out in the desert. As long as it wasn’t too hot, I would ride to “the Pinnicles” (a curious rock formation) off base, or ride the twisty road to Trona and pass by the “painted dinosaur rocks”. They would thus, check my backpack to see if I was bringing in or out any forbidden or suspicious items.
More than one (contractor) left behind briefcase or bag was detonated “sight unseen” for the purposes of safety. (In those days, we typically carried a rectangular briefcase of the traditional 1960’s style. A handful of people carried a backpack, but they were rare at that time.) Mostly, I just carried a homemade lunch with me in my briefcase. I typically strapped it to the back of the motorcycle using bungee cords. I never had any problems with the guards.
Usually I ate baloney, cheese and tomato on plain white bread with mayonnaise or yellow mustard. Usually I ate it with Lettuce, (yellow) onion, and (sweet) mayonnaise (Miracle Whip), but the heat of the desert tended to warm the sandwich and spoil it. So, I oftentimes I simply ended up eating hot peanut butter and jelly sandwiches instead. For the interests of total disclosure, I also tended to eat leftover spaghetti in a sandwich with peanutbutter and tomato. My friends and coworkers thought I was nuts, but it was good and I liked it. Perhaps I was a bit unconventional, but you could chalk that up to personal eccentricity.
As an aside, I love tomatoes. In fact, one of my “little pleasures” has been to grow tomatoes at home. Not the hard, tasteless tomatoes genetically modified to be transported to supermarkets, but rather the soft, huge and sweet tomatoes. These went by names of “Big Boy”, and “Better boy” tomatoes and grew to huge size. Nothing tastes finer than a fresh homegrown heirloom tomato on fresh Italian bread with mayonnaise. One of my pleasures, indeed.
When I rode up to the gate, they would want to see my badge. They would then look at it, and then compare it to the clipboard. Then note when I arrived or left in the log. Then they would wave me forward and beyond. I would say that it never really took more than a minute or two for them to process me. The particular zone or region that I was part of was not a very heavily traveled location. There might be a handful of people with access to that area. Perhaps a total of twenty or so. So they would look on the clipboard, and see that I was who I was and let me go.
The waiting was usually due to all the other people in the various cars and trucks before me. The base was very large and sprawling and as such, there were many, many people that would go in and out of it. It was the duty of the marines to make sure that access was restricted to only those who had legitimate business on the base.
At that time, I lived off-base in Ridgecrest. I rode a black Yamaha 550 cc Vision motorcycle. It was a water-cooled engine, but actually had some problems due to the dust in the desert.
On entering or leaving the base there was generally a small line of cars and trucks that had to be “processed”. This meant a check of the ID badge, and confirmation of our purpose on the base. They also would check our bags, the trunk of a car or the back of a truck. It didn’t take too long. At most, I would say perhaps fifteen minutes would pass while I sat there on my black motorcycle sweltering in the hot desert sun.
The facility that I was trained at was an anechoic chamber located within a special ELF test range. (A test range is a special name that simply refers to an area where tests are constructed. They may or may not have distances “ranged out” for calibration exercises. For instance, like a “rifle range”.) It was NOT a dedicated teaching facility. It was an engineering test facility that was used to test experiments.
During my stay at the facility, it was repurposed for ELF calibration and training for specific MAJestic members (in this particular program) so equipped with Core Kit #2 probes. Our roles were truly unique as no other members required this kind of “training”.
Like many high tech facilities, this was located in a remote part of the base. (The base was divided into ranges, or test centers, often separated from each other by miles of open desert.) It consisted of a simple little cluster of buildings in the middle of an immense stretch of flat desert. To an outside observer you might not have any clue as to what it was. On the outside, it looked like any cluster of buildings in the desert. Moreover, like the desert in the Mojave, all the buildings were surrounded with boxes, crates, strange equipment, debris and a mix of old and new things that never rusted or corroded in the hot desert heat. Everything looked new, though they tended to be faded and dusty.
To get to the complex you drove on this flat road that went far off into the distance in the wide and desolate desert. This road, aside from a couple of turns around some more or less low hills, was straight. Once you reached to the top of a local crest, after the last security gate, you could see the road stretch off into the distance like a straight arrow. Off in the distance it would continue towards another group of low hills. On both sides of the road were the low shrubs, sage brush and rocks, stone and sand so characteristic of the local region. Eventually, there in the middle of the desert sat a cluster of buildings, stationary vans, and portable offices. From the crest it looked like a small remote pin point of objects. As such, it would take a good fifteen minutes to drive to it. The buildings and gear all clustered around a big warehouse prefab building that housed the chamber, and the two electronic labs that occupied the space.
As you rode down the hot asphalt road (on the way to the test facility) you would see the cluster to your right. It sat off a moderate sized parking lot. With perhaps, three to five cars parked there typically. Often times, I was nearly alone at the facility. If I had no scheduled training, and no one was there, I would often sit there inside, reading a manual or killing time waiting for others to arrive.
High Technology in the Desert
Hollywood likes to present a stereotypical image of secret, high technology programs. They envision heavily armed guards, men and women with black sunglasses, ear phones, and lots and lots of gates, fences, and glass. Glass everywhere… it seems. Nice and shiny chrome or brushed metal electronics. Hollywood makes you think that this is what high technology and research are. They give you the impression that there are attractive scientists and specialists who operate this equipment.
Stereotypical Hollywood, from the movie “Independence Day”. In this scene, the President meets up with the chief “Scientist” (actually Aerospace Engineer) who has been sequestered at Area 51 reverse engineering extraterrestrial spacecraft.
Maybe there is a quirky or colorful person who is brilliant, but a little eccentric there. They portray an area that is all high technology with all kinds of cool and mysterious scientific apparatus, with plasma and LCD displays, with brilliant white sterile hallways, and device filled dark rooms and all kinds of cool people wearing trendy clothes and white lab coats. Always very attractive, with usually a “hot” blonde girl who was brilliant but unobtainable (from a dating point of view).
The geniuses tend to be in the early 20’s typically just out of college, and anyone who is older is portrayed as really old with white hair, balding and “out of touch” with the rest of the scientific community. Such is stereotypical Hollywood. They give you the impression that it had all kinds of electric eye and key-activated pass-codes and things like that…
But, I tell you the truth, Hollywood hasn’t a clue! The reality was really, really different. Well, at least in the 1980’s it was.
In the world of Hollywood, the stereotypical scientist and engineer wears a white lab coat, a magnetic card reader badge, and tends to be a bit eccentric. They are the geniuses of the sterile metallic and glass monoliths that they inhabit. They are portrayed as geniuses who are completely out of touch with the world outside their sterile domain.
Well, for one thing, the hallways were plain. They were government hallways for goodness sakes! For those of you who have never been inside a government building in the 1980’s, it was a speckled white linoleum tile floor with two tone, (lower) light pastel green walls / (upper section) off-white, walls and fluorescent lights on the ceilings. The doors were all heavy gauge steel with a stainless steel kick plate and robust knobs.
All the offices used office furniture that was maybe ten to twenty years old, and possibly even older (for the mid-1980’s, placing their manufacture in the 1930’s through the 1960’s). I saw some wooden desks from the 1920’s there, but for most of the base, it consisted of heavy-steel grey desks that were mass produced in the 1940s through to the 1970s. The new equipment were mostly the electronics that we used, (1980’s style push-button) telephones, and (huge black & white non-color print ability) copy machines. Faxes were just becoming popular, but still not prevalent. The use of computers were for specialized projects and for the engineers and techs, not for the secretaries. No word processors were used. This was a time that was way before Microsoft Word and Microsoft Office came into popular use. We used electric typewriters. The labs used state of the art equipment and machinery. However, that tended to be off-the-shelf high-end HP diagnostic and design equipment.
The base was populated with spread-out frame buildings that sat in the hot desert heat. Many were plain and nondescript. You couldn’t tell their purpose from the outside. Some possessed signs, while others just sat there mutely.
The people were government employees.
Brilliant scientists and engineers, but they all dressed conservatively. Typical dress was casual with a white or polo shirt over blue jeans. In fact, they dressed in the western style. Some wore cowboy hats, most wore cowboy boots and jeans. Lee’s, Levi’s and wrangler jeans were the most popular at the time. Plaid shirts and collared T-shirts were the norm. Many wore polyester shirts and pants (this was the 1980’s after all). The wearing of ties was quite rare, though Texas style bolo ties would periodically make their appearance. (At this time, not too many people wore collared polo-shirts. We all tended to wear white or white patterned cotton/polyester blended shirts.) There were very few people in uniform, as most people were civilian employees or contractors working for the government. Many, if not all, had prior active military service.
Most of the people there at the local satellite facility were men. I don’t recall ever seeing a woman there. There were no janitor staff or maintenance staff there, unless on special assignment. Thus the place ended up getting a dusty and cluttered look. As projects came and went, the debris of prior projects would accumulate one on top of the other for months, years, and even decades. In the lab would be industry calendars that would be a year or two out of date. They don’t make these calendars anymore, because they are deemed sexist and inappropriate. But we all loved them. They would often portray an attractive woman, often in a swimsuit, holding some kind of industrial supply or tool. For instance a typical calendar might show a red haired busty girl holding a wrench and leaning against a compressor.
In a male dominated workplace, the most effective means of advertising tools is to utilize imagery that appeals to men. During the Bill Clinton (D) administration, there was a move to make everyone “equal”. In so doing, all efforts to appeal to a anything other than female or neutral gender was discouraged. Know your history.
In the post-President Bill Clinton (D) world, anything deemed to be sexist or demeaning was removed from the American work place by presidential decree. I think that this was a political move initiated by his wife; Hillary Clinton. It was an effort to gain political support by a major feminist voting block that was of significant importance to his Democrat political party. As such, he introduced, what later on become known as, “feel-good” legislation.
I personally think that this was and still is a suppression of “free speech”, but his supporters didn’t. In their eyes is was one of a continuing series of small steps and efforts to build a “more perfect world” in which everything that is objectionable to his electoral block of supporters is suppressed and made illegal.These were rules, or guides, or even laws that mandated the removal of all items that were deemed sexist or demeaning to women in the workforce. Today, you can never see these objects in an American workplace, while they are however still common in other nations.
As an aside, I was once lambasted for having a “Weekly World News” calendar on my desk.
Each day would be a new article from that amazingly funny newspaper. Each day was an outrageous front page article from this newspaper. One day, HR called me to their office at the end of the day. They complained about my calendar. Apparently in it was a picture of an article that it had describing a girl who gave birth to a 54 pound baby (I forgot the actual weight).
I thought that it was funny, but HR did not at all. I was firmly told that the calendar was demeaning to women and that I had to remove it and write a formal apology to go into my permanent record or suffer suspension and loss of my job.
The ELF Substation
The test substation was nothing more than an island of buildings on a hot flat desert plain. There were no trees. Mostly what you would see would be low brittle shrubs and sagebrush. The ground was always covered in a fine sand of coarse rocks, brittle twigs and debris. (This always included these multi-pointy star shaped seeds and burrs that seemed to always grab hold of my trousers and socks no matter how hard I tried to avoid them.)
The desert itself was mostly flat with various groupings of boulders placed haphazardly throughout the terrain. Always, it seemed, that the boulders were grey and the sand was golden. All of this was often framed against a pristine, robin egg blue, sky. In the distance you could see the faded light Blue Mountains (typically a hazy blue tint) obscured by the daytime heat. The Panamint Mountain Range were always viewable from the base no matter where you stood. They seemed to always be covered with snow at their peaks, even in the hot, hot summer sun.
The cluster consisted of one large blue prefabricated building that was perhaps two stories tall, surrounded by a number of smaller trailers, sheds and structures of unknown purpose and function. Many of the cement structures in the surrounding land were former test stands, or facilities that were part of previous research and test projects. Many which were cancelled or killed over the years. The projects, abandoned after being recorded and archived. Their equipment cannibalized for other purposes and projects.
Many people do not realize that in the R&D field, more than 80% of the projects that scientists work on are routinely killed or discarded. The reasons vary. Some [1] are simply due to funding cuts, which is a political matter. Other reasons include a [2] change in research direction, a [3] key individual leaving the program or a [4] decision made elsewhere to focus on something else. The Mohave desert is full of the broken dreams of many an aspiring engineer and scientist.
The Panamint Mountains as viewed from China Lake NWC. Pretty impressive. No matter where you go, you will always be able to see these mountains.
No matter where you were on the base at NAS NASC China Lake, you could see the mountains in the distance. This is what they looked like. In the distance they appeared with a bluish tint. It is an atmospheric phenomena that I cannot explain adequately to the reader. The reader must realize that for the most of the time, it was hot and dry desert, and the view reflected that fact. What was most interesting however was that the valleys as shown in the picture above all had a small stream in the middle of them, and if you followed the valley up higher to towards the top of the mountain the streams got wider and life began to manifest itself in the form of small trees, weeds and grasses.
All the sheds, buildings and trailers were surrounded with all kinds of unused electronics, scientific apparatus and military devices of god-only knows what they were for. (There would often reside many delightful objects of curious contraption inside of numerous cardboard boxes, many of which were never even opened once.) The reader has to understand that it rarely rained, so a person could set the stuff outside for storage and nothing would ever happen to it. So there were piles and piles of boxes of computer and electronic components, wires, containers of all sizes and shapes and gizmos and gadgets of an electronic pedigree of some sorts lying about. To get to the complex (as well as leave it), you had to go through 3 gates with armed guards. So, no one was ever going to steal the stuff…
The electronics varied from scavenged avionics to entire mainframe computers. There were boxes of disassembled antennas, submarine sonar systems, and missile tracking radar. The boxes would hold such things as reams of wire in different gauges to boxes of nuts and bolts. In a way, it was like a cross between Home Depot, a yard sale, and a Military surplus store all located in an old trailer park.
Every time that there was a project, the engineers on the project would store their gear outside. That was usually because there wasn’t enough space inside the offices. Outside were cardboard boxes, some open, and some closed. There were boxes that had never been opened, but had been sitting there for years. Often these boxes were loaded with all kinds of electronics gear. Some boxes would have PCB panels, while others would contain wires. Still others would hold parts of antennas. There were boxes of screws, resistors, and all manner of junk that made the place look like the cross between a hardware shop and a flea market.
As odd as this might seem, generally no one would scavenge for parts unless they obtained permission from the original owners of the components first. This was a small community on the base, and everyone knew everyone else. At least, as far as the grizzly old timers, and managers were concerned. Transient engineers, other contractors, and those individuals like myself were excluded from the good-old-boy network that persisted at the base.
But, while I did not know it at the time, my role in MAJestic was a very unique and important one. I am sure that were there any need to defend me or support me in my role that the entire weight of the MAJestic organization would bear down on anyone who would interfere in my training and purposes there.
The portable office buildings were simply work offices. There were file cabinets, air conditioners, and some even had a sink and fridge. Inside were desks, conference tables and just the normal brick-a-brack associated with any kind of business or work. Mugs with Naval and Weapon Systems logos on them abounded. I well remember one that I used (don’t remember where I picked it up, probably next to the coffee pot – an orphan mug) a CBU-78/B with a picture of some weapons system and some flashy logo design was quite common. We used the port-a-potties that were on the edge of the parking lot for the most part. Though, at least one of the trailers had a fairly decent restroom. All of the buildings were cooled by both Air Conditioners and Evaporative coolers. The most common method of cooling was the evaporative cooler, which we all liked to call a “swamp cooler”.
Here is a typical mobile office. It would hold perhaps three or four rooms and a bathroom. In many cases that meant a central conference room, two offices, with a bathroom at the end.
There were about four large office buildings there and one smaller one. These were usually occupied by other people who I did not know, doing work that I knew nothing about. When I would stick my head in the office to use the head, we’d nod and say hi, but that was about it. One the side of each of the office buildings and the main prefab buildings were numerical designators, or address that things could be delivered to them. There was a mail box in front of the parking lot, and a large dumpster on the edge of the parking lot. There was nothing extraordinary concerning the layout of the complex. It was a typical industrial layout that could be seen anywhere in the United States or in the world.
Off the road in front of this complex was a small parking lot big enough for about thirty cars, though it was mostly empty with no more than five to eight cars there at any given time. It the far end was an area for motorcycles. On the deck were metal plates for the rider to use to put the kickstand upon.
Off from the parking lot was a set of cement steps that led to the main building. Next to the side door was a coke machine. Though, I never saw anyone ever fill it up. I suppose that you would have to have a high security clearance to fill soda machines in this area.
The Test Chamber
The main building, as far as I was concerned, was the big blue prefab warehouse building. It housed the anechoic chamber that I did most of my training in. It was a dual use facility and was used to test and calibrate various munitions at the base. Inside was a really messy control booth, raised up about 10 inches above the floor with cabling below it. The control booth contained a long curved, “L” shaped console desk. In the desk were various knobs, dials and electronic modules. There were also voids and gaping holes in the metal of the desk were modules were removed and not replaced. In these holes, sometimes wires would protrude and they would dangle out of the hole like some kind of colorful dusty snake. Surrounding the desk were rack mounted electronics that controlled the “horns” that would be beamed at us when we were in the chamber.
As strange as it might seem, the ELF control station looked a lot like this abandoned old power station. The colors, the dust, and the various electronic panels in disarray was typical.
Photo is of an abandoned power plant control station. Never the less, the control room to the ELF station looked remarkably similar to this (cluttered, but not so littered. There wasn’t any trash on the floor, etc.). The dim lighting, the greenish-grey colors and the dusty panels were identical to the control station. Off the side were large equipment racks with files of wires that cascaded downwards, and many panels were removed or open so that the workers could access the controls at will to modify, repair or access the equipment inside. It was a wonderous cluttered dim dusty mess.
There were a large number of horns. They ranged in size to big units the size of a small car, to tiny hand held units that could fit into your hand. Each one was labeled and identified and rolled for storage in every nook and cranny of the building. The smaller horns sat on dusty shelves, while the bigger horns were wheeled into the dark hallways surrounding the chamber.
Typically, most horns were unpacked and stored as is. Sometimes they were covered with a tarp of a sheet of plastic, and other times, they just sat there collecting dust. Like everything on the base, there were various tags, labels, and documents that provided code numbers used to track the devices and their ownership.
This is a typical horn used to radiate ELF radiation. They came in different sizes and shapes. The large ones were enormous and were stored elsewhere. The smaller ones were the size of an (old fashioned) bread-box.
A “horn” is a kind of electronic speaker, looking a lot like an old fashioned horn, which radiates different radio frequencies. There are small ones (like tweeters) and large ones (like Bass speakers). But these horns dealt with Extra-Low frequency signals, so they tended to be a different shapes and sizes than you would see in home speakers. For us, and for the military devices being tested, different horns were used. But for us, they were much smaller than the horns used to test missiles and weaponry. (This was a dual use facility, with all kinds of Ordnance lying around).
The horns were controlled by a collection of custom electronics and modified off-the-shelf gadgets on the base. The control room looked like the basement of a mad scientist, with all kinds of junk everywhere. With wires of all kinds snaking about. It was a wiring nightmare, as most of the electronics were custom made on the spot, apparently in the labs nearby. They were all wire wrapped, instead of soldered, and if one came loose, the training had to halt until we repaired it again.
“Wire-wrapping” is a technique that is used to electrically connect electronic components together. Today, most electronics on a given PCB are placed there by “pick and place” automated machines, they then go through a system that melts the solder in the very tiny joints on the electrical board. But there are other methods. One very famous method is to use “wave solder”. This technique connected “wire leaded” electrical components by washing their lower portion into a small stream of liquid lead solder. The wire wrap technique does not use molten solder, instead it relies on the wrapping of a very small wire over the length of a long pin.
Directly adjacent to the chamber was the control station, and next to that was a large electronics lab where parts would be assembled and manufactured. We usually had the entire facility to ourselves. People would come and go while they worked on various projects. Only once was there a spot check whether I belonged there. And that event passed uneventfully.
The control station consisted of a raised plywood deck approximately one foot high off the floor. Under it snaked all kinds of wires, plugs, and cables that serviced the equipment that was used to run the chamber and operate the horns. On the platform were metal consoles that looked identical to that which were used in the SLICK-6 control booths to launch the space shuttle. These desks had wires, chairs and were often cluttered with dusty papers, tools (typically to include a screwdriver and a flashlight), and unused coffee mugs with the logos of various military programs on them. Next to the stations were electronics racks that held a large number of custom made electronics and other elements of modified electronics as well.
In the adjacent electronics lab were the standard workstations. These included work tables, a rack of spools of multicolored wire, cabinets of electronic components, and cabinets of specialized components. There were the standard array of oscilloscopes, power supplies, tool boxes, lams and a litany of miscellaneous debris. These were objects consisting mostly of papers, pencils, half completed projects, and Bric-à-brac of an indescribable nature.
Wire-wrapping technology. You utilized a small tool that looked a little like a tiny pistol and “shot” the wire around posts.
Of course, we all helped get the equipment to work, and my background and training was put to good use on the equipment.
The ELF chamber was huge and dark. It could have fit a small bus easily inside. There was a single incandescent light high up in the ceiling, and a plywood walkway that stood over the triangular cones that lined the floor. The cones themselves were dark grey and covered with a rough finish to absorb all sounds. It was spooky-quiet in the chamber. The door to the chamber was thick and it was easily ten inches thick and studded with cones on the inside. On the outside of the door was an indicator light. This red light would be lit whenever a test sequence was going on. It was a standard 60 watt incandescent bulb with a red (instead of clear) bulb surface. That would warn people to stay away and not go inside. Going inside the chamber would be hazardous if the wrong horn was powered on.
Inside the chamber was empty, but it had an area that permitted large ordinance (it was often used to test the radar and emissions properties of missiles and rockets) to be wheeled in and tested. In my case, an ejection seat was wheeled in and placed in the center of the chamber. It was mounted on to a welded frame and could be wheeled about as needed. This seat was pulled out of a dark corner, dusted off, set in place and secured to the floor. The idea was for it to be located exactly in the proper place in the chamber. The seat itself, was an ordinary enough object, no doubt scrounged from a previous project or obsolete program.
Waking up
Up until the middle of (that) summer, I still had no recollection of my true and real purpose. I had “forgotten” everything. I had no memories of what transpired while I was in AOCS.
All my memories were lost, occluded and hidden from me. I could not access them at all in any way. As far as I was aware, my time in the United States Navy was a brief experience. It was a mistake. In my mind, according to my memories and feelings, I had experienced a small taste of what it was like to fly and I did not like it. I had absolutely no desire to fly, go into space, be a fighter pilot, or any kind of pilot for that matter.The memories that I had were artificial…
There were real reasons for this. It was important for various reasons that I not have access to these memories. Most of the reasoning behind it was hidden from me. Though, over the years I have speculated on the various reasons, and thus I have come to the obvious conclusion that those whom made the reasons had access to information and knowledge that I was not privy to. I obviously needed to be oblivious to my purpose, and to the reasons why I needed to be trained. I needed to blend in to the world around me, and I needed to be average and typical. I was not to “stand out” in any way. No attention was to be directed towards me.
Memories reside outside the physical reality. Thus, the consciousness can access them when they take on wave properties and migrate outside the physical body.
Experts will tell you that memories reside within certain parts of the brain. They know this, they explain, because they have mapped how the brain reacts when certain memories are triggered. However, they make one critical ASSUMPTION. They assume that ALL of the activity associated with memories occur ONLY within the brain. As such, under this assumption, they can map the way the brain behaves when thoughts are triggered. However, the truth is that this assumption is wrong. Memories do not reside within the brain. They reside elsewhere, and the brain accesses them using certain techniques. It is the access of the non-resident memories that scientists have mapped. Not the repository of the memories themselves.
While I have just (now) stated that I had no recollection of my memories, it was not precisely true. In fact it was not entirely true at all. I did, indeed, remember every single one of my memories. It is just that I never thought about them.
This is very confusing for many people to understand. It has to do with how the mind accesses the memories. It has to do with the process involved in memory recall. It has to do with the way that memories reside in the quantum cloud surrounding the body. In short, I never forgot my memories, but access to them was denied.
So for me, I had no conscious remembrances of anything associated with the program. Conscious states or mental events lack the spatio-temporal properties of material objects. Therefore, it becomes difficult to physically identify what had transpired during key events.Yet I still retained the memories associated with those events.
My Assignment
To be authorized to be on a military base, and especially where I was to be trained, I needed to have a secret clearance. No one ever went to the regions where my training took place without one. Yet, secret clearances are not just given away to anyone who asks for it. It is extremely selective. The system is designed that way.
Specifically, it requires a purpose and functional role that has to be associated with a given activity. Each activity that the worker is assigned had to be placed under a specific project. Each project had a level of secrecy associated with it.
However, to everyone else, I was “just” an engineering contractor. (The reader must realize that there are many kinds of contractors. Some have extremely restrictive security clearances. There is no such thing as a “standard” engineering contractor.) I could not, for instance, say that I was a member of a secret program, and needed a clearance. I could not say that I was required to have a special clearance because I was part of a SAP. These programs are secret. No one knows about them; even the people on the bases that also held similar clearances.
There is no “James Bond style” secretary to the head boss “M” that knows all the agents, and all their assignment (Miss Moneypenny.). That is just Hollywood fiction. Again, to remind the reader, real and actual secret programs are secret.
Therefore, I needed to [1] be assigned a “visible” and tangible project that [2] required that I do work on the base facilities. [3] I had to have access to the inner (more secure) regions of the base. [4] I also had to be given the secret clearance necessary to do the work. Finally, [5] the process of obtaining my secret or confidential clearance must not betray my actual role.
Thus, I could not simply claim that I was a “top secret W(U)-SAP agent” that needed additional training because I had an association with MAJestic. (The reader must recall that I myself had no recollection of the memories of that role. So for me, I was, for the first time, applying for a secret security clearance. Not remembering that I already had the highest levels of military clearance through MAJestic.) I had to apply through local military and civilian government channels to get the basic military clearances.
That is how it is done.
When a person in MAJestic; with the highest clearances available needed to work on a military facility, or government base, they would reapply as a civilian for “lesser” clearances. No one would ever know their true status. So to get a person, who was part of the MAJestic team onto a base you find a reason to hire that civilian. Then apply for the necessary paperwork and clearances. Thus the solution was simple, and quite common, then as it is today.
In practice, you simply hire the individual to work on the base as a “military contractor”. This is also known as a “carve out”. It moves government control away from a government program. (You “carve it out” of the highly scrutinized and politicized, government budget.) That way it cannot be politicalized. It cannot be “used” as a “bargaining chip” to pass one sort of legislation or the other. It cannot be used as some type of “political football” to further the needs for the political elite. It is protected, insulated and isolated from all of that.
Most military contractors had a technical background of some sort. All of the members of MAJestic had a technical engineering background. In fact, this was one of the selection criteria. It is pretty smart when you think about. You cannot join MAJestic unless you possessed a technical background.
There is no way that you can get it without having to PROVE that you have a technical ability. It effectively screens out “community organizers”, “political appointees”, and “liberal activists”.
As, then as now, people who tend to be workers, who tend to apply themselves to a project, often also tend to be traditional or conservative regarding many issues. Then, once hired, the contractor obtained the security clearance specific to the work that needed to be conducted.
My initial work at the facility was as an electrical technician to help support the staff at the facility. This was the lowest level of involvement that I could obtain to access the base.
It had, associated with it, the smallest number of questions regarding what I was to be involved in and what my tasks were to be. Everyone who works on a military facility needed to obtain clearance to do so. The smaller the number of questions asked, the better (for us), as our background was such that no “red flags” would be permitted to be visible. Our training had to be conducted surreptitiously. For other positions, and other clearances, more questions and more detailed examinations would have to be conducted.
This might be confusing to the reader, but it is very simple. As a degreed engineer, I should have been hired at a much higher rate. That would be a GS-9, or even a GS-12 (to start). However, with every increase in pay grade comes an associative list of (more extensive) questions and inquiries. All of which require detailed subsequent background stories (and investigations).
Additionally, it is best that once I obtained my “training” that I remove my history from China Lake as quickly as possible. Over time, it just becomes a simple footnote in a CV. That would not be so easy if I held a more substantive position on a military base.
The reader must remember that this was in the 1980’s under President Ronald Reagan. Security was taken seriously, and only the most worthy obtained clearances. (Ah, and still, mistakes were made.)Fast forward to the President Obama (D) administration fiasco where it seemed like anyone could get a high paying job, and get a security clearance. They were being handed out like candy at a parade. All you need to do is fit the approved criteria.
This criteria was quite simple. It was never written down officially. For if it was, it would constitute treason.
However, in general it seemed like all you needed was to [1] be Muslim, [2] be a member of an approved minority, [3] commit no more than 200 crimes, and [4] show allegiance to a globalist agenda. (Sorry for the vitriol.) Yet, there is truth in these words. The security systems in place at the time of this writing are mere pale shadows of what was in place during the 1980’s. At that time, people had to prove that they deserved to know something. The term “need to know” was taken seriously and implemented seriously.It is almost like “need to know” was replaced with “must be diverse”.
(Ah, what the fuck do I know? He had an agenda and he followed through with it skillfully, and the sheep followed his sanguine song. I just see the mess that he left, and shake my head, because I actually know what it means in the BIG PICTURE. Sigh.) But, you know what? It’s No Longer My Business.
So, I was hired as a GS-5 pay grade military contractor.
To make up the difference in pay level, my company provided me a generous Per Diem allowance that (when) combined provided me with an adequate salary during my training period. So, in truth, I was being paid as the engineer I was, but for my technical clearance and all other issues regarding the government, I was just a lowly tech. I rated somewhere above janitor, but below engineer.
Like all base contractors, I had to perform my stated labors, and I did so without complaint. Thus, I helped [1] debug the equipment, and [2] repair it when necessary. I [3] helped to calibrate the units, and [4] run drills and [5] tests as needed. Indeed, I spent much of my time in the [6] control booth and in the [7] nearby electronics lab. I [8] learned how each and every one of the test units worked, and [9] I was able to debug it electronically.
Most of the controls used wire wrapped components. This was a wiring nightmare. It looked like thin spaghetti in a maze of colors and shapes. Often these wires would come loose, or would be accidently pulled out of place, and we would have to go and repair the damage. Sometimes the parts and components would fail, and we would have to repair and replace them. Sometimes we would have to make our own replacement boards and units. This was typical of the work myself were involved in while awaiting our training sequence.
The work was easy. (We were just way overqualified for the work. It was of a technical nature, and there was no question that we could do it.) It was just tedious.
In addition I helped to [10] test the units, and [11] perform manual labor associated with testing the equipment at the lab. It often involved the moving of equipment, recording the test results and conducting setup and tear-downs of various testing configurations. From time to time, I would also be called upon to do other related engineering tasks; such as [12] drafting checking, [13] basic drafting, and CAD design (on early CAD systems; notably CADKEY).
This is a typical building at the China Lake NWC. Most of the buildings were of pole and metal construction.
Total Memory Recall
Every day was spent helping the staff at the facility test ordinance in the ELF chamber. That continued for months up until one day when I was asked to help install a chair inside the chamber. It was just sitting off to the side behind one of the partitions, and rested on a wheeled plywood platform. It was just a chair or a seat. There was nothing special about it. I suppose a “folding chair” would have the same utility.
After we had installed the seat, I noticed that the rest of the staff at our little island cluster of buildings had left for off-site meetings, thus leaving us three alone. (That, in itself wasn’t really unusual. People came and went. But on that day, and the subsequent days, the local ELF facility parking lot was absolutely empty.) It was just myself, Sebastian and the Engineer who ran the facility remaining. We chatted a while, and after we finished our cokes, I was told to sit there patiently and not to get up for any reason. Sebastian helped close the door and I was left alone in the chamber waiting quietly.
The door to the chamber was then closed and sealed and the indicator light (This was a 40 watt red-colored incandescent light bulb that was in a light fixture outside the chamber, residing above the door to the ELF chamber.) was turned on. The indicator light was always used in the event of a test, but I had never been inside the chamber during a test. It was eerie and quiet. Inside the chamber is enormously quiet. (The interior structure of the ELF chamber was designed to absorb sound, radiation and light. It is the nature and purpose of the chamber.) Anyone who has ever worked with these kinds of chambers will be able to confirm that fact. It was dark with one lone 60 watt incandescent light bulb dangling from high up near the ceiling. It was cool however, the chamber was at the same temperature as the rest of the air-conditioned building. Even though there were no vents inside the chamber, I felt comfortable sitting there. Though, in hindsight, maybe I should have brought a book with me.
It began with silence, and peace. Then I began to feel an irritation. It began to feel like all kinds of little tiny insects were crawling in my body. Of course, it only felt that way. There were no actual tiny insects. It felt like every one of my nerves were alive and vibrating, and that gave me the impression that there were little things crawling inside of me.
And, before I knew what was going on, I heard a strong ringing in my head and there was a sequence of flashes and I lost control of my eyesight. Instead, the long-ago yet familiar pastel map from the NAS NASC Pensacola Florida ELF facility at NAMI flooded my vision. And at that very moment, at that exact instant of time, I had a total and complete resurgence of all my repressed memories associated with the W(U)-SAP (MAJestic) program.
I was lucky enough to locate a photo of the interior of the test chamber where I was trained. The only differences was that instead of a missile and frame, the area was empty, and a chair rested there for me to sit on.
The reader needs to understand that the consciousness is NOT the same thing as the soul. Likewise, memories are not the brain, nor do they reside inside the brain. They are something separate that is accessed by the brain. As such, the brain and the consciousness that controls it, the soul and memories are all separate entities with different purposes and behaviors.
The core kit #1 probes were engaged.
It lasted for one or two minutes and then the field was turned off and my eyesight returned. I sat in the chair and did not move. I now remembered everything. I had a complete and total memory recall of all the events leading up to the meeting with the Commander at the base, and everything subsequent to that. It was stunning. But even more stunning was fitting the fragmented pieces together and merging my “apparent” life that I have been living with the “true and actual” reality that had been hidden from me. To me, it was enormously stunning. I just sat there and did and said nothing. I was overwhelmed.
The reader must recognize just how much a shock this was for me. The reader needs to remember that I had absolutely NO recall of my meeting with the Base Commander, or meeting Sebastian. While I recognized Sebastian when I met him, I did not KNOW him. However, upon the reemergence of my memories, it all came back. I remembered everything. Remember, a number of years had elapsed since when I joined the program and “officially” left the US Navy. During that time, I lived a disillusioned life; a life where I (and my family) believed that I had failed AOCS and that I did not have what it took to be a Naval Aviator. That belief certainly colored and affected my subsequent decisions. The knowledge that I was selected for the MAJestic program out of the Aviation Officer talent pool was hidden from me, and now as the information and memories returned, it was truly an earth-rolling shock to my emotions and mental state.
Eyesight under the field effects
Sitting in the NAS China Lake ELF chamber was unique and different than anything that I had experienced at NAMI in NAS NASC Pensacola, Florida.
For me, under the influence of the field, everything appeared different. While I still retained the ability to see properly, my vision was changed. The most noticeable aspect was that I saw the harmonics and cavitation effects of the ELF waves in my visual cortex. All waves have harmonics and interference patterns. We see that in water when you make waves by splashing. But we, as humans, never see this effect in the air. But, if you have the implants, and are under the effect of the field, you actually do physically see the effects. You can actually see the extremely long waves bounce and hit the physical objects surrounding you. You can see it with your eyes. I do not how this happens, or what the mechanism is, but that is what happens.
Cavitation effects made visible. The horn would produce radiation, and the radiation would bounce about and go through the various walls in a way that was visible to those with the probes installed.
The cavitation effects appear as dark lines or crescent troughs and ridges that overlap in the room where you sit. They are obviously affected by the surrounding physical geometry of the room, as their appearance changes as you walk around the room into another area. Always sharp corners, right angle protuberances, and flat surfaces make the wave shape most distinct. Soft and rounded surfaces dilute the cavitation effects. It also is apparently affected by the mass of the physical objects. For instance a cement wall will have a greater influence than would a small wooden chair.
In the darkened anechoic chamber, it was still difficult to see. As there was only one light bulb in the entire chamber. But, I could see the interference patterns reflected in the chamber and affected by the thousands of triangular cones that dotted the walls and ceiling. The most pronounced and obvious patterns were associated with the corners in the room. If I failed to look at the corners, I would have failed to see the cavitation effects in the chamber. (Thirty years later, while I was in my cell, I could easily see the grey cavitation effects. The walls were all white, and it was very easy to see the effects.)
I could see the effects because I was implanted. No one else could see the effects.
Turning ON
It took me a few minutes to compose myself. After all, no matter how one looks at it, it is a shock to your system to know that you haven’t had the ability to access you memories. It most certainly shocked me, and caused me to sit upright in my chair and vocalize “What The Fuck?”. (Yeah, it was just like that.) The team in the control booth (might have) realized this and asked me if I needed a minute to compose myself. They even handed me a can of coke from the window next to the horn mounting clamps. I said thanks and went and got it. They let me drink it in quiet contemplation.
The team at that time (aside from me) consisted of [1] Sebastian, [2] the manager of the ELF “training” program at the facility, and [3] a military contractor who assisted in the setup and break down of the test equipment. This person was quite old (from my perspective at the time) being a retired military and who was working there part time. His experience and knowledge in the field was, to put it simply, vast.
I sat thinking about my life, and resolving the conflicting emotions I had. I was actually a bit miffed that I had to believe that I failed at being a naval aviator, when the truth was that I was asked to do something much more significant. Well, the Commander said that it would be much more significant. But, really, was it? I was an unemployed engineer working as a low grade technician in an isolated research facility in the middle of nowhere. That was, I must tell you, hardly significant in the least.I had endured self-doubt, and discouragement partly because everyone (and I do mean everyone) told me that I had failed, and partly because I too believed that I had indeed failed. We are always influenced by those around us, even when we refuse to acknowledge it. I believed what everyone else said to me. I believed their lies, and adjusted my life accordingly. I endured the criticism of my parents and siblings who reinforced to me the notion that I could not fly or to ever amount to anything significant. I began to believe that all I could be was “just” an engineer. I began to believe that the most I could ever accomplish would be to buy a house and a second hand car. I began to believe that I was a low-achiever. I began to live a life where I accepted the mediocre as the normal, when the true reality was far more important. I was, to put it mildly, quite miffed.
I sat and thought about this for perhaps as long as 40 minutes (Yes; it sucked. But, pragmatically, what are you able to do about it?) and then knocked on the control room window and told them that I was ready to proceed. I think I said something like, “OK, let’s get going.” Or something similar, and took two fingers pointed in the air making a circular movement.
Actually, the basic calibration of the core kit of probes was rather quick and straight forward. It only involved two different sized horns (Perhaps to test and calibrate for each kit of probes installed. I really do not specifically know why two horns were used for two kits of implanted probes. I surmise it is one for each kit, but it is possible that each kit communicated using signals on different frequencies.), and a recording of the readings from the instruments. I sat in the chair rather passively and let them run the calibration tests. I felt nothing at all. I had full access of both my eyes and my memories. Why this testing and calibration was needed, I do not know. The core basic kit of probes was a topic that I never got to explore or investigate.
After a while the ELF field was turned off, and the door was opened and I left the chamber. What is curious is that at the conclusion of the test, my memories were yet again compartmentalized. I left the facility at quitting time with the belief that I conducted just another everyday series of tests. From my point of view, I just sat in the chair and waited a few minutes and then left. I failed to notice that three hours had passed, not only three minutes. I had no memory of anything else. I then drove home and stopped for some KFC take out to bring home. There was nothing spectacular in any way about the day that I could recall.
Anyone who does not know what KFC is leads a sheltered life. At that time, I would go home and pass the KFC on the way to my house. Typically, I would get a bucket of chicken with mashed potatoes (and gravy), biscuits, and coleslaw. It was always a great bucket meal. Then, at home, we would rent a video (we watched videos on Betamax at that time.)On that day, for your curiosity, I bought a bucket of chicken with sides of mashed potatoes, coleslaw, gravy, and biscuits. We had beer in the refrigerator at the apartment. At that time a case of Budweiser had 30 cans, not the 24 cans that a regular case of beer would contain. (It was a promotional item at the time.) So we tended to drink Bud instead.KFC is popular in the USA, but it is super-popular in China. However, the menu is quite different. For one thing, chicken breast is considered “too fatty”, and thus is undesirable. So it is pretty cheap. They also serve other parts of the chicken not normally found in the states, like chicken feet. But, thank God, they still serve mashed potatoes. Yum!
Calibration
The next day began like any other day. I went to work by driving through the three gates of the base on my motorcycle. I parked my motorcyle in the corner of the parking lot and placed one of the steel metal squares under the kick stand and went inside.
The parking lot was paved with black asphalt. In the hot sun the asphalt would get hot and take on a semi-liquid state, after all this was the desert. If you failed to put a metal plate under the kickstand, the bike would fall on its side, and the localized pressure of the weight of the bike on to the hot asphalt would cause the kickstand to sink into the pavement. The solution was to evenly distribute the load of force, and to do this often time a flat steel plate was used. They were always around the base. And, I never had any trouble finding any to use when I parked my motorcycle.
I was the first to arrive, like always. It was just like any other day at work, except that now we were putting a new horn in place. This horn was different from the other two horns that we had used earlier. Since it was relatively new, we had to unpack it out of storage. It was stored differently than most horns, which were mounted on coasters and moved about when not used. This horn had some additional devices hooked up to it, and it required the addition of a new module that plugged into the equipment rack to the right of the control booth.
Here is a technical note.The horn used to wake me up was not the same horn that was used to calibrate and train me. These were two different horns. This implies that they produced two different signals. Two different signals suggests two different frequencies and / or wave patterns.
Again, I went inside the chamber, and the door was closed like before. Also like before, there was a brief period of discomfort as the field was turned on, but that quickly went away. When the field was turned on, I also regained my memories. But this time, the pastel map appeared (discussed elsewhere) and so did the reticle cursor (also discussed elsewhere). Since this projection flooded my visual cortex, I knew what to do. In which I automatically moved it to the appropriate spot on the map. When I did so, there was a moment where it got “locked in place”, and then the map disappeared.
Again, with a full set of memories, I sat in the chair for about five hours as the calibration process was conducted. I noticed that the calibration process for the specialized implanted probes was substantially different than for the core kit. Apparently, the probes worked differently from each other and thus had different calibration procedures.
At the conclusion of the calibration procedure, the field was turned off, and shortly after that I again lost all my memories of my ELF related past. This included the calibration test that I was just involved in. Instead, just like the day previous to this, I remembered it as just another typical day at work. We all said good bye to each other, and went home at the end of the day as if nothing strange was going on.
I don’t know if the manager, who operated the machinery realized what it must be like for me not to remember anything. Or if he understood the issues with the compartmentalization of the memory. He was certainly a talented person. He was a career government employee. The manger was an engineer like myself, with a prior military record. The person helping him; Sebastian, however knew exactly what it was like, as our training was identical. But none of us talked about anything.
This compartmentalization was maddening. As all of us were highly skilled and had the necessary secret clearances to conduct our tasks, but I wonder if we really needed to have our memories compartmentalized so drastically. It wasn’t my call, as I was not in the decision process. But, my guess is that those who sponsored the program did not.
We conducted two separate bouts of training. One for myself, and another one for my colleague Sebastian. Neither of us talked about our experiences afterwards. We simply pretended that none of it ever happened.
Configuring the interface
The next work day was different. This was now day three of my training. But, this time when the field was turned on, and I had a full recall of my memories, something different happened. Instead of the pastel calibration map appearing, an overlay appeared over my field of sight. This overlay was transparent. I could see the chamber that I was in and look at my hands, but overlaid over my sight was an image. That image was fixed and did not change at all, no matter where I turned my head or moved my eyes.
To my great surprise, the image that was overlaid on my field of vision was the album art of the album that I selected as my favorite album back at the ELF facility in NAS NASC Pensacola, Florida a few years ago. (In NAS, NASC Pensacola, Florida at NAMI, we were given a questionnaire to fill out. On it were many questions. One of the questions was what was my favorite song. The song that I selected came from a specific music album (as did all songs of that time). Unlike today were the reader would immediate know the MTV music video associated with a song, in those days we all knew the album art, and interior sleeve details of a given song instead.)
This album art was for Al Stewart’s “The Year of the Cat”. It was not the external outside album art, but the more detailed inside sleeve art (Inside vinyl record packaging was a thin paper envelope that held the vinyl record. Often times this paper envelope was decorated with designs and symbols reflective of the outside cover art work. In the case for the album, “The Year of the Cat”, the inside sleeve artwork consisted of a wallpaper like design motif that had rows upon rows of the items illustrated on the outside of the album. This was a two color design; Black line art on a light blue paper background.) that was portrayed inside my visual cortex. I must completely tell the reader that seeing it was pretty surprising to me. (I wonder if this was [1] a construction of my mind, or [2] if some engineer had to physically program that control dialog JUST FOR ME to experience. It’s an interesting thought.)
This is the album art (front cover) for the album “Year of the Cat”. I discussed (covered elsewhere) how I had established a list of my interests, likes and dislikes, when I had first entered MAJestic and after my core kit #2 probes were installed. This was the album art for the album that I specified on the handout.
This was years before Microsoft introduced the Windows operating system. Everyone was still using MS DOS. But, the characteristics of this HUD (Heads Up Display)[i] was nearly identical to that of the later day Windows OS interface.
The projected image was collimated which made it appear to be overlaid in front of me.
Collimation – The projected image is collimated which makes the light rays parallel. Because the light rays are parallel the lens of the human eye focusses on infinity to get a clear image. Collimated images on the HUD combiner are perceived as existing at or near optical infinity. This means that the person’s eyes do not need to refocus to view the outside world and the display...the image appears to be "out there", overlaying the outside world.
I found that, like the pastel map earlier, a reticle (of a different type and appearance) appeared and I could move it about with my mind. By thinking certain thoughts, spoken by coached direction from the booth, I was able to pull up various icons and figures that I had the ability to manipulate.
The Menu
The process and training was simple. Once the overlay entered my visual cortex, I could move a (semi-transparent) reticle over an icon that would reside on the display in front of me. I could then activate or “click” on it by will power. This would cause a kind of menu to appear. The menu was not in English, but was rather in additional symbols of basic shapes and forms. I was taught how to control various elements of the icons through a pre-graphic interface by thought alone. Then “set” them in place and move forward to the next icon. I believe that what I was doing was nothing sort of configuring my second kit of probe implants. Because, once I configured them, and then locked them in place, I never returned to that portion of the screen again.
To better explain how this worked, the reader must recognize that it was different from the GUI that we currently use on Windows software. Here, the reticle “floated” over and above the background menu. The menu, of course, was the shapes and forms superimposed over the album artwork. I could move the reticle over the shapes (by my thoughts) and when I selected one (also by my thoughts), the reticle would “land” and “harden”. It looked like it was making an impression in soft clay.
Once that was completed, I was taught how to perform some higher level “tweaks” and manipulations to the system. This was, I suppose, the operating system for the second core kit inside my brain. And, that was the core extent of my training during this period. By listening to their coached directions (That they (no doubt) were reading from a manual or handout.), I was able to learn how to use and configure the basic operating system. This was the source code germane to the Core kit #2 implants. This was a very powerful skill set and certainly very important.
Quantum processes attributed to the human soul work in partnership with the brain.
This is the observable neurological processes that seem to work to “produce the experience” of human consciousness. However, one is not completely dependent on the other to function. Essentially, the human brain is a quantum computer, and the informational state of qubits are influenced by the human soul.
Stuart Hameroff (Professor Emeritus at the Department of Anesthesiology and Psychology and the Director of the Center for Consciousness Studies at the University of Arizona) and Sir Roger Penrose (mathematical physicist at the Mathematical Institute and Wadham College and University of Oxford) believe overall brain function derives from quantum level microtubule vibrations.Consciousness does not originate from within the brain. It originates outside of it, and occupies the physical brain through particle alignment. This opens a potential Pandora’s Box, but our theory accommodates both these views, suggesting consciousness derives from (link to the body through) quantum vibrations in microtubules, protein polymers inside brain neurons, which both govern neuronal and synaptic function, and connect brain processes to self-organizing processes in the fine scale, ‘proto-conscious’ quantum structure of reality.”In other words, they believe they’ve found scientific evidence for the human soul. They believe that it is something that is formed and originates from the brain. However, they are quite wrong. Point #1; the soul is not the same thing as consciousness. Point #2, consciousness is birthed outside of the physical and enters the brain to actuate thought generation within an empty “reality”.
This is the second half of the outside album art for Al Stewart’s “Year of the Cat” album. The interior sleeve art is similar in style, but different in appearance.
The first objective of the training program was to be able to access my source code and manipulate it, to a limited extent. To this end, I spent a period of time, approximately three weeks, learning how to use this software. I did not learn every code, sequence or every function possible. I only learned the most basic commands and their purposes. During this time, I also learned how the unique kit that is implanted in myself interfaces with the Core kit (Kit #1).
Unlike conventional software, such as used today, the software routines that I used to debug and modify the probes were all graphic in nature. They consisted of little pictures. Similar to Chinese symbols, but quite different. It was truly a graphic interface.
Keep in mind that this was in the 1980’s at a time when the concept of a graphic interface and the use of a mouse was just entering mainstream use.
Information was stored on paper-thin “disks” that were known as floppy discs and only held one MB of information or so. The “mouse” was a “new” technical innovation, and most computers did NOT have one. You needed to navigate using the arrow keys on the keyboard. In a way, the graphical interface seemed to represent a collection of PLC sequences and ladder diagrams. The interface and commands were simple, but maybe it only appeared that way to me because I was somehow programmed to think that.
Symbols and their use
There were perhaps 150 or so basic symbols that I needed to memorize (Out of maybe thousands.). The impression that I have is that they are but just a small part of an overall “library” of symbols. Additionally, the orientation of each symbol had a particular meaning and role. This included [1] rotation of the symbols, [2] mirror images of the icons, and [3] a combination of both. This is unlike what we do in our romance languages today. We have fixed fonts. (That is the same in China, the shapes of the icons were fixed, but if you reverse them, they would hold a different meaning. Like the character “fu” which means “fortune”. People put it upside down on their doors during Chinese New Year to signify holding the fortune inside.)
One of the most widely seen Chinese characters in China is 褔 fú the character for good fortune or luck. You see it painted everywhere: on wind chimes, pots, posters as a decoration. A look at its origin gives a feel of the complexity and longevity of symbols in Chinese culture. It also represents the God of Fortune (Fu) who is part of the good luck trinity of Fu, Lu and Shou.Chinese CharacterThe character for good fortune consists of the radical for auspicious or heaven sent to the left. The separate right-hand symbol for wealth or abundance also pronounced fù 富 but with a falling fourth tone itself comprises of three elements. At the top is a roof, underneath is the abbreviated form of the character for high and at the bottom is the symbol for field 田 tián. Taken together the three elements have the meaning of storing produce piled high from a good harvest; the most ancient and potent indicator of wealth and good luck. It is usually written in black ink on lucky red paper.Upside-downFu is widely seen on Chinese New Year posters. In many cases the poster is deliberately hung upside down. This needs a bit of explanation as there are several stories explaining how this came about. Firstly if you look at the character fu there is a certain vague resemblance to the character for upside down dao. The character dao can mean both 倒 dǎo upside down or fall and 到 dào arrive only differing in tone. Combining the meaning of dao and fu gives the idea of good fortune raining down from the heavens. So placing fu upside down is increasing the possibility of good fortune. It may also have something to do with bats that hang upside down. This is somewhat similar to the European custom of lucky horseshoes ; it is a symbol for good luck one way up but if placed upside down is an ill omen as the luck falls out of the horseshoe.
Once I memorized the symbols and the orientation rules, everything became very simple. Indeed, the symbology was very simple and I could “read” the symbols that I would “see” before my virtual eyes.
Take Aways
The terrestrial probes for my role in MAJestic needed to be calibrated.
Calibration was at China Lake NWC.
Calibration required an ELF facility.
Memory access can be controlled by the probes.
Only people with a technical background could enter the test and calibration facility.
Only people with a military background could enter the base.
When the core kit #2 probes are activated, the harmonics and cavitation shadows of the ELF environment are made visible.
The extraterrestrial probes did not require calibration.
The interface between the extraterrestrial probes and the terrestrial MAJestic probes required calibration and a certain degree of programming.
FAQ
Q: What is the “pastel map” that you refer to?
A: It is a visual depiction of “terrain” that represents the interior of my brain when it was initially mapped at NAMI. I use it to help locate certain parts of my brain in order to conduct certain specific exercises.
Q: Why did you need to be trained at China Lake NWC?
A: I do not know. Maybe it is because I required the use of a specialized ELF horn, test chamber, and trained staff to assist in my calibration and programming. Maybe they felt that it would not be secure if I went to a college or university campus. (Provided they had these resources, of course.)
Q: Why was the calibration important?
A: Why is a car tune up important? If it isn’t tuned up properly, the car won’t run very well. The same is true with the ELF probes.
Q: Do you miss the desert?
A: No, not really. However, I would really like to take a trip out there for old-time’s sake and hike around the hills and those huge piles of boulders that seem to be scattered about on the desert floor.
Q: Why are you able to talk about this this?
A: I was retired and put in a monitoring program in 2011. My MAJestic ties have been severed, and memory lockouts have been put in place. I now only have an active link with the extraterrestrial probe(s). They have given me approval to release this. Actually, it is more like PESTERING ME to do so.
Frankly, it is a royal pain in the neck, and I welcome approval to shut the fuck up about it.
I have resolved my past and all the missions and efforts that I have been part of. There is no need to transcribe anything to anyone. However, I think (personally believe) that THEY believe that SOMETHING needs to be released. And, thus my role herein.
From what I gather, all programs that I have been part of are now over. MAJestic has been transformed into something else all together. The remaining active programs are now just isolated “mission specific” carve outs. I am a walking fossil, and thus I am free to talk about obsolete technology and histories of another time and place.
These are posts and articles that revolve around how I was recruited for MAJestic and my training. Also discussed is the nature of secret programs. I really do not know why the organization was kept so secret. It really wasn’t because of any kind of military concern, and the technologies were way too involved for any kind of information transfer. The only conclusion that I can come to is that we were obligated to maintain secrecy at the behalf of our extraterrestrial benefactors.
MAJestic Related Posts – Our Universe
These particular posts are concerned about the universe that we are all part of. Being entangled as I was, and involved in the crazy things that I was, I was given some insight. This insight wasn’t anything super special. Rather it offered me perception along with advantage. Here, I try to impart some of that knowledge through discussion.
Enjoy.
MAJestic Related Posts – World-Line Travel
These posts are related to “reality slides”. Other more common terms are “world-line travel”, or the MWI. What people fail to grasp is that when a person has the ability to slide into a different reality (pass into a different world-line), they are able to “touch” Heaven to some extent. Here are posts that cover this topic.
John Titor Related Posts
Another person, collectively known by the identity of “John Titor” claimed to utilize world-line (MWI egress) travel to collect artifacts from the past. He is an interesting subject to discuss. Here we have multiple posts in this regard.
Our solar system is but one small place within a much larger (physical) community. This community is our galaxy, also known as the “Milky Way” galaxy. Here in this post, I place what I know of our galaxy and mix in what has been presented to me through MAJestic. It is a hodge-podge of conventional science and the outrageous. All together it paints a rather comprehensive general picture of the history of our galaxy…
“Our sun is one of 100 billion stars in our galaxy. Our galaxy is one of billions of galaxies populating the universe. It would be the height of presumption to think that we are the only living things in that enormous immensity.”
-Wernher von Braun, Text of the Address by von Braun Before the Publishers' Group Meeting, The New York Times Text of the Address by von Braun Before the Publishers' Group Meeting Here 29 April 1960 L. 20, column 2 Wells (April 29, 1960), l. 20, column 2. (This is a dated comment, as the galaxy is now known to be more than 7 times as large.)
Many readers, no doubt, have no idea what a galaxy is, and thus need to know why it is so important to me.
Duh! What is a “galaxy”?
Before we begin, I must repeat a core principle to the reader; There is an “invisible world” that is part of our lives. This “invisible world” goes by many names; heaven, dark matter, MWI, to name just a few. What I describe here is the barest edge of what we know to be the reality in our physical world. I discuss the physical reality of this universe centered around our tiny planet.
For many people the word “galaxy” conjures up the same kind of meaning as does a “star”; they are both objects from outer space. When I first started to write about my experiences, I came to confront a harsh reality. It surprised me. Indeed, it still surprises me. People, for the most part, are ignorant of science. It is true.
Most people are totally ignorant of science.
Sadly, not everyone understands the terms and phrases that I use so routinely.
While I have tried to “dumb down” my writings to the most basic level, I am sure that there will be individuals who will still fail to grasp what I am trying to convey. No; this is not an elementary text on astronomy. But, in my own way, I wish to make the complex simple and easier to understand in the context of the world that I experienced.
Where we live
We live on a planet called earth that is in orbit about a star that we call the sun.
A star is a hot collection of gas and light that (seems to) sits apart in the vast universe that we live in. A star can get pretty darn big. Our sun is a star. Contemporaneously, it is considered to be an “average” star. It’s not too big, and not too small. It’s just about right (for us).
However, other species do NOT consider it to be “average”. They consider it to be a little on the “hot” side. In their minds, the most common stars are much cooler and smaller than our sun. They like to think that it is the cooler “K” and “M” class stars that are “average” and “common”.
Our sun and earth is part of a neighborhood that consists of other planets also orbiting the sun. We call this a solar system.
For our purposes, EVERY star has a solar system.
Yay, now maybe some of those solar systems might only consist of some dust and an asteroid or two, while others might consist of a complex and dense collection of all sorts of planets. The point is that we can make the broad assumption that each star has its own solar system of orbiting planets.
A Galaxy
A galaxy is a collection of stars that are bound together by gravity.
Galaxies come in different sizes and shapes. Depending on the history of the galaxy, it can look like a huge fuzzy mass, or a spinning top and anything in between. Our galaxy is also average. It is a little on the “big” side comparatively, and spins around forming a shape and features known as “arms”.
The above picture represents the most accurate representation of our galaxy so far. Each little “pin-sized” dot of white is a very hot and large star. The cooler stars are not shown. What we see outside of our solar system is limited due to the location of where our sun is relative to the huge mass of stars which surround us. Further, there are areas of obscuring dust and gas that confound our ability to accurately map the galaxy in its entirety. On the Internet one can find various depictions of what our galaxy is believed to look like. This is by far the most accurate portrayal as of 2015.
Our sun resides within “our” galaxy. We call it the “Milky Way” galaxy because (I suspect) it looks like a splash of milk in the night-time sky.
We live in the Milky Way Galaxy.
We are not in the center of it, nor are we off on the outer edges. Our sun (and solar system) lie in a pretty average and typical section. Our surrounding neighborhood contains both young and old stellar neighbors. As is true with most of the universe, most of the stars that surround us lie hidden. We cannot see them. Those stars that we do see are actually just the big and bright stars only. The vast bulk of stars around us are small and quite dim.
The vast bulk of stars around us are small and quite dim.
The Size of our Galaxy
“How did it communicate? I have no idea. It did move its arms a lot. Almost like giving instructions! I heard no voice communications. The helmet was not as large as our two NASA astronauts, and had a viewport to look forward. It had a small, perhaps a communication device, attached only to the right side of the helmet!
I saw no oxygen tank(s). It had a wide belt like wrapping around it..
It did not appear to be tethered as the two Astronauts were to the sides of the shuttle structure. I observed nothing that appeared to be a weapon. The time of this amazing scene was one minute and seven seconds, I timed it on my Astronaut chronograph watch.”
-Clark C. McClelland, a former ScO of the Space Shuttle Fleet commenting on a scene he witnessed. He claims he personally observed an 8 to 9 foot tall extraterrestrial (ET) on his monitor while on duty in the Kennedy Space Center’s Launch Control Center (LCC).
He claims that the ET was standing upright in the Space Shuttle Payload Bay having a discussion with two tethered US NASA Astronauts. He also claims to have observed (on his monitors) the spacecraft of the ET as it was stabilized safely in orbit to the rear of the Space Shuttle main engine pods.
Let’s talk about the “Milky Way” galaxy.
Stars do not lie alone in the great vastness of space. They are not scattered about like grains of sand on a beach. They clump together. They gather in groups. They collect together.
These collections are called galaxies.
Our galaxy, the Milky Way, contains maybe 600 to 750 billion stars (plus or minus 250 billion) that lie mostly in a semi-flattened (with wavy planar ripples) spiral disk of some 70-100,000 light-years (ly) across, with a central bulge of about 10,000 ly in diameter.
I said, “Our galaxy, the Milky Way, contains maybe 600 to 750 billion stars”. This is debatable.
There are those whom still hold to the 1960-era belief that there are only 100 billion stars in the galaxy.
Others, through ignorance (perhaps), subscribe to the 1985-era belief that there are 400 billion stars in the galaxy.
While still others maintain the more conventional belief (1995-era) that there are no more than 600 billion stars in the galaxy.
If you consider the T and Y class dwarves to be stellar bodies then the number could well exceed 1000 billion stars. This is a 2015 era belief.
Also…
I said, “spiral disk of some 70-100,000 light-years (ly) across”. Apparently, our galaxy is pretty much on the larger side of my estimate.
The size was upgraded in the March 10, 2015 edition of the Astrophysical Journal.
This brings the Milky Way's size up to that of Andromeda. The Milky Way's small radius in comparison to Andromeda's larger radius has always puzzled astronomers because the two galaxies have roughly the same mass.
I can see the nerds in the reader audience nodding. However, the galaxies as portrayed in fictional software games are not a true representation of the actual size of a galaxy. For instance, the game stellaris (at most) might have a galaxy of a mere two thousand solar systems. 2000 is not 750,000,000,000.
(I would guess that the game limitations are due to the computer technology, as well as the general interest of the player. Afterall, a boy starting the game would end up as an old man before he would even begin to consider finishing it.)
Anyways…
Our Location in The Galaxy
“The number of habitable worlds in our galaxy is certainly in the tens of billions, minimum, and we haven’t even talked about the moons. And the number of galaxies we can see, other than our own, is about 100 billion.”
– Seth Shostak, Senior Astronomer at California’s SETI Institute
Our sun; Sol, lies less than halfway out (26,000 ly) from the galactic center in Sagittarius. It resides on the core-ward side of one of the galaxy’s spiral arms named Orion. This “arm” is some 2,000 to 3,000 ly thick.
There are numerous arms in our galaxy. (This figure seems to change, as scientists can’t seem to make up their minds between the major and minor arms.) As of 2017, it is considered that there are four “major” arms in our galaxy.
Here is a nice picture of what our Milky Way galaxy looks like if you were to view it from an angle far away. Selected “arms” are identified and labeled. The Sun is shown as a reference.
Roughly 6,000 light-years separate “our” Orion arm from the Sagittarius-Carina arm on the inside (towards the center of the galaxy) and the Perseus arm on the outside (outer rim of the galaxy). From our perspective, the galactic rim is in the direction of Auriga and Taurus.
Do not be deceived. The space between these arms is NOT empty of stars. They are full of stars. It is only that the vast bulk of the stars are the dimmer dwarfs that give off scant light that it appears that the voids are empty. The “arms” are composed of more hot and bright stars than what is found in the spaces between them.
The closest spiral arms to our solar system within the Milky Way galaxy. The sun’s location is provided for reference.
Our sun, Sol, is located 67 light-years north of the galactic plane. We are not in the middle; in the thick of the galaxy disk. We lie above it. We lie within a roughly 200-light-year wide oval band that is rich in gas, dust, and newborn stars.
In this region are associations of extremely bright, bluish, and massive O and B stars, with emission nebulae (H II). These are the (bright) stars that we see at night.
All those stars that we see at night are not typical. They just happen to be the stars that are easiest for us to see. Some are big. Some are bight. Some are visible because they are nearby to us. Often, these are the very young stars that people claim to be the home for extraterrestrial species. Heads up; they are not. They simply glow and light up the night sky for us. They are what we see. They are what give our galaxy the shape that we perceive. They are what help us define the “spiral arms”.
Voids between the Spiral Arms
The apparent voids between spiral arms are not empty space. They are not empty at all. It certainly looks like it, but that is because we are unable to see the dimmer stars. In truth, the “voids” of nothingness between the spiral arms are actually “chock” full of dimmer, redder, and less massive stars like Sol. (G, K, and M class.) Not to mention the huge numbers of “brown dwarf” stars and their respective solar systems.
The truth is that these voids are where the BULK of intelligent extraterrestrial species come from. This is where the more advanced civilizations in our galaxy exist. They do not lie inside the (visible) arms; where the young and hot stars lie, and where the gaseous and dusty spaces proliferate. No. They tend to lie in the safe, unexciting, and relatively quiescent spaces between the arms.
Here is Bode’s Galaxy. It is listed as Messier 81. It is very similar to our galaxy in overall shape and form.
The Milky Way has two four (x4) major and two (x2) minor arms that spiral out from the long bar of stars, as well as near and far arms that lie along both sides of the central bar more. There are also some “trivial” galactic features that could be classified as “offshoots” of the arms. These are distributed throughout the galaxy.
To some, the naming of these various features is important. Yet the truth is that the stars group together in clusters of various sizes, shapes, and intensity of brightness. How we view these clusters defines our naming conventions.
Some Notes;
A 12-year study published in the Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society has confirmed that our Milky Way Galaxy has four spiral arms, following years of debate that it has only two arms.
First there were four arms, then there were two major arms with two minor arms, now we are back to four major arms again! Jeeze! Here’s a good write up on all the arguments.
"Using NASA's infrared Spitzer Space Telescope to sample light from some 30 million stars in the Milky Way, astronomers observed a long bar of relatively old stars spanning the center of the galaxy. Stellar bars are known to exist in some other spirals, and researchers have long pondered the possibility that one might reside in ours. They were unsure, however, of whether the heart of the galaxy would contain a bar structure, an ellipse or both.
The new observations paint the clearest picture yet of the Milky Way's interior and reveal the apparent bar in unprecedented detail. The feature is some 27,000 light-years long (7,000 light-years longer than expected) and sits at a 45-degree angle to the galaxy's main plane."
The Center of the Galaxy
Looking in from a point outside the Milky Way, we would see the luminous parts of the galaxy; a dense concentration of mostly old stars that fill the central bulge. Whose brightest stars are generally [1] red giants of relatively low mass or [2] big bluish stars recently born from gas. In the center of our galaxy is a very interesting and complex structure known as Sagittarius A* that is probably a black hole massing about 2.5 million suns.
Evidence has been uncovered for the presence of a jet of high-energy particles blasting out of the Milky Way’s super-massive black hole known as Sagittarius A* (Sgr A*). This image of Sgr A* and the region around it contains some of the data used in the study, with X-rays from Chandra (purple) and radio emission from the Very Large Array (blue). Jets of high-energy particles are found throughout the Universe on large and small scales. The likely discovery of a jet from Sgr A* helps astronomers learn more about the giant black hole, including how it is spinning.
The central bulge is not a central point. It is not spherical in shape. Indeed, it is shaped like a long rectangular or oval bar. Its shape actually extends in the form of a 12-18,000 ly long “bar” (2-3 times longer than it is wide). From that, it “extends” to four bluish spiral arms on opposite sides. (Quite an unusual object, indeed.)
These “arms” wrap around the bulge and each other outwards through the dimmer and redder galactic disk. They possibly include broken arm segments; (these) yellowish arms where most short-lived OB stars have already perished and spurs off the arms (for example, the Orion Arm containing Sol, may actually be a spur that might have once been a part of the Perseus arm).
It is a dynamic and energetic place. With large streams of energy, vortexes of gravity, plasma, and other gasses interspersed the enormous stars and stellar debris of the region.
Galactic halo
Surrounding the Milky Way’s spiral disk and bulge is the slightly flattened feature known as the “galactic halo”. It extends far out and away from the galaxy. It acts like a large envelope that contains the entire galaxy and encompasses other stellar objects.
This halo consists of stars. It generally consists of very old stars, averaging somewhat lower in mass than our sun. (G, K, M and brown dwarfs for the most part.)
The halo of the Milky Way Galaxy. It is comprised of two elements; there is an inner and an outer halo.
Within the galactic halo is a relatively small number of individual stars and about 200 or so globular clusters. A globular cluster is a spherical collection of stars. They tend to clump together and orbit the galactic core as a satellite “mass”. Globular clusters are very tightly bound by gravity, which gives them their spherical shapes and relatively high stellar densities toward their centers. These clusters are spread evenly about the halo; roughly half above and half below the disk. The reader can think of them as dense warts on an imperfect face.
These densely packed groups of stars may make excellent cradles for complex space-traveling life to evolve. However, we do not know this to be the case. We can only hypostatize.
My belief is that life springs up throughout the universe quite easily.
Di Stefano presented his research at the 227th meeting of the American Astronomical Society. His key point was that globular clusters are massive groupings of millions of stars in a region only 100 light-years across. The clusters date back to the early life of the Milky Way (nearly 10 billion years ago). (For comparison, the universe is approximately 13.5 to 15 billion years old.) Although these clusters' age raises some questions, it also provides ample time for civilizations that emerged to evolve and become complex.
In this case, the older age of the stars is an advantage. Di Stefano and Ray noted that bright stars like the sun would have been born, lived and died, leaving behind only faint, long-lived dwarf stars. These dimmer stars would require planets to orbit closer to their sun in order to maintain liquid water on their surface — a key requirement for the evolution of life as we know it. Their close orbits could help shield them from interactions with passing stars, according to a statement from the Harvard-Smithsonian Center for Astrophysics (CfA).
The reader should recognize that there are studies that claim that these environments may be too harsh for life. In all cases, there are studies that say one thing and studies that say the opposite. The truth, like everything else, lies somewhere in between both extremes.
“If I were to suggest that between the Earth and Mars there is a china teapot revolving about the sun in an elliptical orbit, nobody would be able to disprove my assertion provided I were careful to add that the teapot is too small to be revealed even by our most powerful telescopes. But if I were to go on to say that, since my assertion cannot be disproved, it is an intolerable presumption on the part of human reason to doubt it, I should rightly be thought to be talking nonsense. If, however, the existence of such a teapot were affirmed in ancient books, taught as the sacred truth every Sunday, and instilled into the minds of children at school, hesitation to believe in its existence would become a mark of eccentricity and entitle the doubter to the attentions of the psychiatrist in an enlightened age or of the Inquisitor in an earlier time.” ― Bertrand Russell
The Ripples or Grooves in our Galaxy
There are ring-like structures of stars wrapping around the Milky Way’s outer disk. These structures appear to belong to the disk itself. As a result, instead of the galactic disc being a thin “structure”, it is much larger than that. We now know that the disk is about 60 percent larger than what we had previously thought.
Not only do the results extend the size of the Milky Way, they also reveal a rippling pattern. This is a very unique feature. As such, it raises some really intriguing questions about what actually sent wavelike fluctuations rippling through the disk.
The Milky Way Galaxy has an apparent pattern of “waves” in the basic disc. This is a curious observation and suggests a complexity of galactic formation that was not initially obvious.
The researchers who discovered this feature suggest that the likely culprit was a dwarf galaxy. They have suggested a theory that the dwarf galaxy might have plunged through the Milky Way’s center long ago, sparking the rippling patterns astronomers have now detected. It would be similar to the waves on a lake or pond when you toss a pebble into it.
Other Structures
There are other structures that are associated with our galaxy. They too are quite interesting. One of which is the Monoceros Ring.
Our galaxy has numerous curious features or collections of stars. They greatly extend the size of our galaxy and indicate a complex dynamic in the formation of our galaxy and the interactions of the stars inside of it.
We know about these features due to the work of Yan Xu. Xu is an astronomer at the National Astronomical Observatories of China. Xu, colleague Newberg, and other colleagues studied the problem of a group of stars beyond the disk’s outermost edge. (The so-called Monoceros Ring.) They used data from the Sloan Digital Sky Survey to determine the actual shape and behavior of this structure.
They found four (4x) total structures in and just outside what is currently considered the Milky Way’s outer disk. The third structure was the Monoceros ring, and the fourth structure was the Triangulum Andromeda Stream, located 70,000 light-years from the galactic center.
All four structures alternated with respect to the disk. They went from above it, to below it, to above it, to below it. Newberg, who was in the tidal stream camp, was surprised that the ring and three other structures were actually a part of an oscillating disk.
I really love stuff like this. It’s really great to read about and consider the wonders of our universe.
The hidden reality of our galaxy
Our luminous galaxy, because of the Galactic Halo, appears to be embedded in a larger and much more massive, but unseen, spheroidal halo of mostly non-luminous (or low luminosity) material (Brown dwarves, planets, gas giants, planetoids, asteroids and other mysterious bodies that we have not yet been exposed to.).
As described previously, this halo extends the physical dimensions of our physical galaxy substantially. The Milky Way may actually contain as much as the mass of a trillion suns like Sol, although the 600 billion, estimated luminous stars mass only about 175 billion suns. Thus, most of the galaxy’s mass must be composed of “dark” matter, of which brown dwarfs, neutron stars, black holes, gas, and dust are estimated to make up only a minor share. The nature of the galaxy’s non-luminous matter is still unknown.
Stars of our Galaxy
This illustration compares the different masses of stars. The lightest-weight stars are red dwarfs. They can be as small as one-twelfth the mass of our Sun. The heaviest-weight stars are blue-white supergiants. They may get as large as 150 solar masses. Our Sun is between the lightweight and heavyweight stars. The red giant star at the bottom of the graphic is much larger than the other stars in the illustration. Its mass, however, can range from a fraction of the Sun’s mass to a few solar masses. A red giant is a bloated star near the end of its life. In this brief phase, a star’s diameter expands to several times its normal girth. (Image Source.)
Although as many as 5,800 to 8,000 of the Milky Way’s stars are visible from Earth with the naked eye, it is seldom possible to see more than 2,500 stars at any given time from any given spot. Most of the stars that we do see are not typical stars. Not at all. We cannot see “typical” stars.
Our eyesight, even with most telescopes are simply not good enough. Instead, what we see are the very rare, bright and young hot stars. All of which possess more mass, a higher luminosity, and a greater diameter than our own sun. While we might well (possibly) see them, they only represent a very tiny percentage of all the stars present to our eyesight.
We cannot see the bulk of the stars, the vast majority of stars in our local neighborhood are dimmer than our sun; too dim to be observed with the naked eye. Although dim and reddish M-dwarf stars constitute more than half of the population of our galaxy’s stars, none are visible to the naked eye. We just cannot see them.
In fact, it wasn’t up until the last decade or two that we “proved” that “brown dwarfs” actually existed. Up to that time, it was all just a theory. The statists strongly argued that “it doesn’t exist unless I can see it!“.
Physical Conclusions
Every day we are learning more and more about our galaxy and the space that lies around us. There will be many more discoveries and the science books are constantly being revised with the latest discoveries and theories.
When we meet and communicate with other species and other intelligences, and others that are extraterrestrial in nature, we discuss things from our point of understanding. That is very limiting because for the most part, not only do they see things differently than we do, but they have created sciences and technologies that are based on those understandings. They are alien to us.
For instance, a species that sees clearly in the infrared spectrum (apparently a common thing) see a different kind of sky at night. Their understanding of our galaxy is somewhat different than ours. For they see it in a far different way than we can.
The reader must understand, for a successful transfer of information and technology from one species to another, there has to be a uniformity of understandings and perceptions. Oh, forget that Hollywood bullshit about mathematics being the language of species communication. It isn’t. At least, that has been my experience.
We can only understand things within a common framework.
This limitation has been one of the problems that MAJestic has had with our extraterrestrial benefactors over the years. It is also why myself and a handful of others were tasked with our roles. So when information is presented herein, it is based upon an understanding of our “established” understandings with the presentation of new ideas and concepts that are alien to us.
With that being stated…
The History of our galaxy
Here is the “unwritten” actual history of our galaxy.
In many arguments concerning the Fermi Paradox, it is often discussed in terms of the physical universe. It always boils down to transport of one extraterrestrial species from one “home planet” to another “colonization planet”, and the relative probability of it occurring and being sustainable.
There are a myriad of arguments and discussions on this, and all of them are quite interesting.
I do not have the entire and whole story, and I am not even able to provide a sweeping overview. However, I can make a handful of statements that might give the reader some pause to consider. All of this involves only our galaxy alone. I know absolutely nothing about other galaxies. This information is tenuous. It does not involve the sheer totality of our universe.
So this is the complete catalog of what I know regarding our galaxy. I am sorry that it is so abbreviated, and perhaps a bit obtuse, but it is all I know about the galaxy that we live in. Please accept my apologies in this matter.
The Very Beginning
In general, the physical universe is around 13.7 billion years old.
Shortly afterward, gas, dust and other odd objects formed.
Their gravity would bring them in contact with other gas, dust, and odd objects. Eventually, they started to form primitive stars and collections of stars.
The earliest proto-galaxies formed rather early on, and they were huge in size. In fact, very large and very old galaxy clusters existed roughly 2.5 billion years after the “big bang”.
Some Notes;
The age of the universe at 13.7 billion years is debatable. But why quibble about fractions of a billion years that occurred around 14 billion years ago, that is silly. For our purposes, lets just simply say that the universe is a nice round 14 billion years old. (Anyways, time isn’t what we think it is anyways.)
“In physical cosmology, the age of the universe is the time elapsed since the Big Bang. The current measurement of the age of the universe is 13.799±0.021 billion years within the Lambda-CDM concordance model.”
Astronomers have found distant red galaxies—very massive and very old—in the universe when it was only 2.5 billion years post-Big Bang.
“Previous observations suggested that the universe at this age was home to young, small clumps of galaxies long before they merged into massive structures we see today. We are really amazed — these are the earliest, oldest galaxies found to date. Their existence was not predicted by theory and it pushes back the formation epoch of some of the most massive galaxies we see today."
-Carnegie Observatories Ivo Labbé
These red galaxies are very interesting. Astronomers have been particularly surprised to find very old, red galaxies that had stopped forming new stars altogether. They had rapidly formed massive amounts of stars out of gas much earlier in the universe’s history, but then suddenly starved to death. This behavior has raised the question of what caused them to die so early. (Such “red and dead” galaxies may be the forefathers of some of the old and giant elliptical galaxies seen in the local universe today.)
In addition to the old “dead” galaxies long past star formation, there were other red, dusty galaxies still vigorously producing stars.
"We're detecting galaxies we never expected to find, having a wide range of properties we never expected to see." Apparently, the early universe was already a wildly complex place. It's becoming more and more clear that the young universe was a big zoo with animals of all sorts. There's as much variety in the early universe as we see around us today."
-Carnegie Observatories Ivo Labbé Go HERE.
The Formation of Our Galaxy
No one really knows how OUR particular galaxy was formed.
Contemporaneously, there are debates on the age of our galaxy. In fact, there are those who claim that our galaxy is almost the same age as the “Big Bang”.
As of 21MAY18, the overall consensus is that the totality of our universe is about 13.7 billion years old. Contemporaneously, based on measurements of the element beryllium in two stars within a globular cluster of stars called NGC 6397, our Milky Way galaxy is considered to be one of the oldest galaxies in the universe. Using this dating method, those involved puts the age at 13.6 billion years.
Or, in other words almost the same age as the universe itself.
Now, this conclusion is based on the assumption that the globular cluster NGC 6397 formed at the same time that the entire Milky Way galaxy formed. It’s a pretty big assumption. It really is, as there is no indication that this is true.
This kind of assumption is like looking at an old man with a young girl and assuming that they are the same age because they sit in the same car together. I would kindly and respectfully suggest that further work needs to be done on this matter.
Now, there are other things and other evidence that also suggest that this is true. For instance, they have found very ancient stars at the very center of our galaxy.
So, is our galaxy really as old as the universe?
How our Proto-Milky Way Galaxy was Formed
I posit that the universe was created and afterward, various stars, globular clusters, and proto-galaxies formed. These proto-galaxies and stars moved about and interacted with each other. I contend that there was a period of around 3 to 4 billion years where the proto-galaxy of our Milky Way galaxy formed.
After the “Big Bang”, during a period of 3 to 4 billion years, numerous “objects” and items formed. They all became gravitationally attracted to each other. This collection of objects created the proto-galaxy that eventually became the Milky Way.
During this period, the first 4 billion years after the “Big Bang”, older stars interacted with the dust and material that eventually became our galaxy. Therefore, our galaxy is comprised of a number of proto-galaxies, older globular clusters, and some very old stars. Yet, the bulk of our galaxy started to form around 3 to 4 billion years after the “Big Bang”.
Our galaxy is typical; it is an aggregate of early formed stars, and clusters, gas and debris that formed in huge proto-galaxies, and collections of gas and debris that eventually formed the bulk of our galaxy as we know it today.
Our Galaxy – The early days
Our complete galaxy; the Milky Way galaxy, formed solidly about 5 billion years after the “Big Bang”. (With its proto-galaxy coming into existence around 3.5 billion years from the Big Bang. Say 1 to 1.5 billion years of formation.) In the early years it didn’t look anything like it does now, and even today, as then, it is constantly changing and evolving. Actually and truly; it is but a physical manifestation of the quantum world that surrounds us all.
What we are discussing is the earliest beginnings of our galaxy. There was no specific point in time where the galaxy came into being. Rather it formed through a coalescence of material into a collection of dust, debris, and stars. At some point, it became large enough to be called a galaxy. So for our purposes, let’s just say that the galaxy that we know it formed about 3.5 billion years after the “Big Bang”. Prior to that, it was something else; a proto-galaxy.
Let’s not quibble as to what constitutes a proto-galaxy and a mature; evolving one.
There have been approximately four generations of stars in the universe, (that is) if you discount the super-hot and short-lived stars, that are but transient events of insignificant duration. For our purposes, we can consider that our galaxy has had two complete generations of stars. (On average.) The very oldest stars in our galaxy are all that remains of the first generation.
A stellar generation is similar to that of a human generation. A star is born, grows and dies. That is the first generation. A second star is born out of the debris from the earlier star. It grows and dies. This is the second generation. A third star is born out of the dusty debris of the second star. It grows and dies. This is the third generation. Finally, a fourth star is born out of the debris from the third star. It grows and then eventually dies. This is the fourth generation.
Generations of stars were born, lived their stellar lives, and then faded into dim obscurity or died. The galaxy has been quite dynamic. (They move in orbits inside of a twirling and spinning galaxy. They flash into and out of existence. They form from collections of dust, and flash as radiation is released.) Stars form and die all the time.
When we look through our telescopes we see this dynamic interplay. Stars have a much longer lifespan than humans, so it appears that they never change. However, that is an illusion.
Galaxies Smash into Each Other Too
During the formation of our galaxy, and during the first of time, up to now, there was a rather serious change to our galaxy. Another much smaller galaxy; a dwarf galaxy, plunged headlong into our galaxy. It disrupted the tidy orbiting paths of the stars and altered the shape of our galaxy. Some stars from the dwarf galaxy were added to our galaxy, some of our stars were tossed out of our galaxy.
Given the huge distances involved, there probably were not too many stellar collisions. (We assume.) The galaxy just passed through ours, and the gravitational waves influenced the orbital structures of the galaxy.
First Intelligence’s
After the big bang, the physical world began to appear. This came in the form of proto-galaxies which included all sorts of planetary bodies.
The plain and straight fact is that the first quantum intelligence’s (non-physical) began to occupy the quantum sphere of the galaxy relatively early on; approximately in the first billion years of substantial galaxy formation (about 9 billion years ago). To be clear, intelligence formed long before physical bodies (containers) evolved.
Consciousness and intelligence formed long before physical bodies formed.
These life forms were with intelligence and understanding.
They created thoughts and formed quantum-level artifices, but they did not have physical forms. Our galaxy at that time was mostly somewhat an organized proto-galaxy with the very beginnings of physical organization. There were rocky planets, but most were too unstable to host any kind of physical life. The galaxy; and the universe at that time was emerging. It was nothing like we see it to be today.
What the physical manifestation of our galaxy was, at this time, a large collection of gas and dust. With a rather lumpy composition containing regions of dense and not-so-dense gas in the vast spaces.
The life forms were all quantum-based intelligence’s and thoughts. Most manifested in simple forms of lattices and strange mixtures of garbons and unusual alignments of swales. There were no specific archetypes and no really strong and stable avenues of intelligent growth.
As a result, many intelligence’s came into being and then quickly morphed into other things. These were both good and bad. Neutral alignments were rare. It was a world of the strong and organized quanta taking over that of disorganization. But ultimately the chaotic environment began to stabilize and the first intelligence’s of organized thought began to manifest.
First Physical lifeforms
For our purposes and understandings; the vast bulk of physical life (as we understand it), however, did not begin to manifest until much later; around three billion years later (about 6 billion years ago) after the very first tentative formations of the galaxy.
This, of course, relates to the “organizational threshold” that must be reached in order to blossom uniformly through the galaxy.
Certainly, there were minor pockets of microbial life that were established in the earliest years of galaxy formation (Within the first billion years of planetary formation.) Nevertheless, for various reasons, these were anomalous and really did not contribute to the “organizational quantum threshold”. The truth be told, it manifested in pockets (Roughly associated quantum signatures with physical locations at various points.), scattered about relatively uniformly in the “halo” of the galaxy. This early life was microbial and had simple physical forms.
I urge the reader not to get too confused. When I refer to the “Halo” I mean a uniform distribution though out the galaxy which includes above and below the plane of the elliptic. There are stars out there in the nether regions; far removed from the well-known and dense “arms” of the galaxy. The life began to form in an even distribution pattern. It formed everywhere; not just in the plane and not just in the arms where the most active and energetic stars lay.
Over a period of one billion years, the life tended to grow in spurts throughout the galaxy. Some life would become extinguished as the planetary environment changed, while other life would grow through periodic planetary extinctions and yet still survive and adapt in the physical forms. Meanwhile, other life began to crop up and live starting at the smallest microbial stages.
The simple physical life represented the simplest of physical manifestations. Upon once a life took root on a given planet, it began to propagate and evolved, over time into other forms.
The evolution of life, on a given planet, was never clean and pristine. The various life forms needed to evolve. To do that, they required periodic planetary changes that ultimately caused the life forms to grow and adapt to change. It should be interesting to the reader to note that planetary global extinctions are common throughout the universe. The effect on life as observed on Earth should be considered to be atypical to general evolutionary trends. Please note that the extent of global planetary extinctions present in a given solar system is directly related to the size of the solar system.
If the star is large and hot, such as O, B, A and maybe F class stars, any rocky planets (and shepherding gas giants) will be plummeted by large asteroids and periodic bombardment. In fact, given the short lifetimes of these types of stars, the planetary bombardment will be rather (more or less) continuous during the solar system life.
If the star is a little cooler, there will still be planetary bombardment, but it will become less and less frequent over time. This would pertain to F and G stars. That is because the gravitational influence of the star is not as great, and the size of the solar system is not as large.
If the star is even cooler than that and thus smaller, there will also still be planetary bombardment, but it will be small in influence (relatively speaking) and like the F and G stars will become less and less frequent over time. This will pertain to K, and M class stars as well as Brown Dwarfs.
Complex solar systems involving binary, trinary and larger systems are much more complex. As such, the relationships between global periodic extinctions will vary and fall under complex formulas. It is beyond what I know at this time. I am sure that some intelligent scientist will one day come up with a set of rules and guidelines that would effectively delineate these complex relationships.
Bipedal Intelligent lifeforms
Within a billion years, about 5 billion years ago, bipedal intelligent life began to occupy a number of worlds. This was about one billion years before the very beginnings of our solar system.
There are numerous civilizations in our galaxy. They all follow development patterns. This chart summarizes the growth of populations of galactic civilizations as a function of time.
However, there were no specific quantum archetypes and when these species began to develop the sciences and technologies necessitated by survival, they often caused quantum disruption and great chaos when they crossed the vast gulfs of space between the stars. This disruption became very serious; almost catastrophic, and needed to be curbed and culled. This was because entire civilizations were slowly being innocently entangled with different levels of quanta. They became confused and unstable.
It is not that simple. The term “levels” is a catchall phrase. It represents different types of disorganized quanta clumps. These non-stable garbons and associations are dimensionally unstable. When they confront other quantum arrangements the ones with the greatest quantum entropy gains mastery. This caused a great deal of consternation.
This was a chaotic period.
Various species advanced technologically and spread across the galaxy. They met other space-faring races and periods of confusing confrontation occurred. There really wasn’t much in terms of overt physical warfare (while some did actually occur), most of the problems had to do with incompatibility of various levels of quantum integration and thought manifestations. (Civilizations met and interacted, but the different quantum influences adversely affected the “weaker” or more “exposed” species. This eventually altered the physical world of both species. Typically it resulted in various catastrophic effects.)
It was a difficult time.
Inferior species without robust quantum configurations were easily overtaken by species with superior quantum organizations. The conflict happens outside of the physical and takes place over a generally short period of time. Over a few generations, the weaker lifeform tends to die off or be displaced.
I do not know the details. However, this period lasted around one billion years and ended about 4 billion years ago. This was about ½ billion years before the formation of our solar system. At that time, a number of (the strongest and most stable) organized species and races began to establish themselves in our galaxy. These races and species were all space-faring and very powerful. I believe that the progenitor race was one of these races.
The age of our solar system is under revision. Researchers studying bits of a meteorite discovered that the space rock was 4.5682 billion years old, predating previous estimates of the solar system's age by up to 1.9 million years.
Stabilization and Organization
At about three billion years ago, the galaxy was stabilized and set groups or organizations began to run it and control it. Over time they began to become more organized and better prepared to interact with each other. These organizations continue to this day. (Some mature, while others retire and evolve into other things…)
The area (of the galaxy) that we are in, has the form of a structured government, administered by a kind of federation (of sorts).
Each organization of races or species has established nurseries where they permit the cultivation and growth of “approved” and desirable quantum soul archetypes. We are in one of these nurseries.
The reader might be amused to know that there are five such nurseries in our general physical location. Thus, there are four other nurseries for sentience cultivation nearby. One of which is extremely close to us physically.
I believe that the established list of “approved” archetypes occurred around 1.5 billion years ago. The primary characteristic of this listing is to prevent one species from entirely disrupting another species because their (emerging) quantum soul is too prone towards disruption.
Key to the stability of a quantum configuration is a well-established sentience.
Since all quanta (in the species “Heaven”) are all interconnected, mixtures of different kinds of sentiences detract (take away from) the stability of the group quantum makeup. Uniformity of quantum configurations is desirable for stability of the sentience of the whole.
Now, every creature has a different soul. A dog has a soul. A cat has a soul. A tiger has a soul, and a three-eyed critter from Tralfamadore has a soul. Each soul is attuned to a unique “Heaven”, which is the “universe” in which it resides.
In “Heaven” is a uniformity of form. All human souls occupy a “human Heaven”. All cat souls reside within a “cat Heaven”, and so forth. However, each individual soul has an “awareness”. Thus, in a specific Heaven are different beings.
Each soul can create different consciousnesses within different realities to obtain experiences with. As long as the experiences build upon the overall “growth plan” of the soul, all is fine. However, when the experiences are disjointed, or irregular, discordant sentiences result. Discordant sentiences can terribly pollute and damage a given “Heaven” or quantum makeup of a species.
The key to prevent this from occurring is to create a “safe space” for a given species to grow within. This is a nursery from which a group of souls can acquire experiences and lessons.
Our Nursery
Our nursery is a relatively recent event and was established around 540 million years ago (more or less). The moon was relocated and put in orbit around the earth (As strange as it might seem, the purpose was to simulate the tidal effects that planets have that orbit smaller K and M class stars.) Additionally, specific native lifeforms were eliminated, while others were cultivated. Monitoring of the solar system began during this time. The exact periods of their involvement are unknown to me, but if I were to query our benefactors, I am sure that they would tell me.
My overall “feeling” is that there was a less than organized implementation of this nursery and that the primary “observers” had a greater latitude in their behavior (early on) than what we experience with them today.
The nursery was established by a group that I prefer to refer to as the “Progenitors”. It is monitored and observed by a different species. That species works directly with MAJestic in the policing of this nursery.
Ken D. Olum has some thoughts…
Ken D. Olum, using some inflation-based ideas and the anthropic premise that we should be typical among all intelligent observers in the Universe, arrives at the puzzling conclusion that “we should find ourselves in a large civilization (of galactic size) where most observers should be, while in fact we do not“.
In this note, he discusses the intriguing possibility whether we could be in fact immersed in a large civilization without being aware of it.
This is pretty much in line with what is being provided herein. The basic conclusion is that this possibility cannot be ruled out provided two conditions are met. These conditions are [1] that we call the Subanthropic Principle and [2] the Undetectability Conjecture.
The Subanthropic Principle states that we are not typical among the intelligent observers from the Universe. Typical civilizations of typical galaxies would be hundreds of thousands, or millions, of years more evolved than ours and, consequently, typical intelligent observers would be orders of magnitude more intelligent than us.
The Undetectability Conjecture states that, generically, all advanced civilizations camouflage their planets for security reasons, so that no signal of civilization can be detected by external observers, who would only obtain distorted data for dissuasion purposes.
Dispatch from our nursery will not be permitted until our sentience is established. Otherwise, our discordant-sentience could escape our quarantine and disrupt the rest of the galaxy much like a plague.
The Progenitor species will not permit humans to leave the nursey until our sentience is homogenious amoungist the bulk of humanity. Then, our souls will be reconfigured into a galatically approved archetype that would best fit our sentience.
Graduation
The reader must realize that we will never be permitted to leave this nursery until we, as a species, have mastered our ability to control and mitigate our quantum selves and souls. Therefore, we are an intermediary stage in evolution. Progression off-world means that we must either [1] cultivate a “service-to-others” sentience, or [2] devolve into a “farmed” sentience such as dictated as “service-to-self” entities.
That is the “battleground” that humans are fighting today. (The reader should not confuse the periodic “turnings” of social human behavior with quantum sentience.) The sentience that wins will determine the future direction of the human species.
Signposts for Service-For-Self Sentience
When this happens, there will be some telltale signs that will appear that will indicate a kind of foreboding as to what will transpire. [1] Firstly, humans will start to alter or “improve” their DNA and genetic structure. [2] First, in secret, and then publicly, there will become genetic stratification of human types.
There will be Indian-style caste systems put in place and defined by genetic manipulation. The lower castes would be genetically bred for certain functions, while the upper castes would have other genetic attributes incorporated to make them more “superior”.
[3] Laws will be put in place to control the behaviors of different castes of people. [4] Finally, once the service-to-self caste system is well entrenched, the entire human population will be absorbed by a more advanced service-to-self sentience, and all humans will find their genetic makeup altered over time to become a “farmed” sentience.
Age of our galaxy
The Milky Way appears to be poised to enter middle age.
While many younger galaxies can be grouped into “blue galaxies”, older galaxies can be grouped into “red galaxies”. Recent observations using infrared wavelengths indicate that the Milky Way appears to be of an intermediate color, which means that it can be grouped into relatively rare “green valley” galaxies.
Blue Galaxies – This name applies because their vigorous star formation at this stage of evolution produces many young stars that are massive, bright, and bluish. Thus, the galaxy appears to be very blush in color.
Red Galaxies – Here, the galaxy is dominated by the longer-lived red stars. The short-lived, bluish stars have expired to leave the redder, dimmer, less massive stars behind.
These types of galaxies are thought to be changing from blue to red as star-formation waning over 1.5 billion years (based on model simulations). If observations and model simulations are correct, star formation in the Milky Way will end within five billion years.
This will occur despite the gas compression and star formation impact of a predicted merger with the neighboring Andromeda Galaxy (M31). That event is anticipated to initiate beginning in 2.2 billion years and taking five billion years to fully assimilate. The Andromeda galaxy also appears to be transitioning into a green valley galaxy that is relatively poor in the cold gas needed for star formation.
A plot of stellar mass and galaxy color. Our galaxy, the Milky Way Galaxy is currently in the “green valley”.
My Conclusions
“There are objects in our atmosphere which are technically miles in advance of anything we can deploy, that we have no means of stopping them coming here . . [and] there is a serious possibility that we are being visiting and have been visited for many years by people from outer space, from other civilizations. . . . This should be the subject of rigorous scientific investigation and not the subject of ‘rubbishing’ by tabloid newspapers.” – Lord Admiral Hill-Norton, Former Chief of Defense Staff, 5 Star Admiral of the Royal Navy, Chairman of the NATO Military Committee
The reader might be surprised at my conclusions. But, given what I do know, our galaxy is simply teeming with all kinds of intelligent life in all kinds of shapes and sizes. It is full of life; life at every stage of development. This goes from the earliest and simple microbes to highly advanced civilizations that are millions of years old. And, at that those are only the physical creatures, I didn’t even begin to mention the great diversity of (invisible) quantum creatures that are about and surround us.
We should not at all be surprised to know that there are well way over a million intelligent extraterrestrial species in our galaxy.
Truthfully, if the reader could “get inside my head” and know what I know, experience what I have experienced, and been exposed to what I have seen, they would be surprised. Not at all the wonderment of nature and the capabilities of technology, but rather at how silly the arguments are that we humans are “alone” in this universe.
They are just so silly and trivial.
In fact, the galaxy that surrounds us is not a wild, empty and untamed wasteland just ripe for exploration and colonization. But, rather, it is a well patrolled and policed manicured world of great color and complexity. Not to mention dangers and pitfalls. Humans are fortunate to live in this protected nursery that we call the earth.We humans do not understand so much, what is necessary in regards to our universe. Were we to leave it, in our infantile state, we risk serious conflagration of our soul makeup. We are so ignorant, that we don’t even have an inkling of our ignorance.We need this protection. We need to understand the reality of ourselves and how we fit in the universe.
Take Aways
Our galaxy is typical in the universe.
Our galaxy is roughly around 9 billion years old in a universe that is approximately 14 billion years old.
Consciousness and sentience in our universe occurred prior to the formation of the physical reality that we observe.
The physical manifestation of intelligence in our galaxy began around 9 billion years ago. This was at the start of the formation of the Milky Way galaxy.
First biological creatures began to inhabit our galaxy around 6 billion years ago.
During a time period lasting approximately 2 to 4 billion years ago, there was a restructuring of sentience during a competition period for sentience domination.
Our solar system was formed around 4.5 billion years ago.
The galaxy stabilized with sentience standardization protocols and established archetypes starting around 1.5 billion years ago.
About 1 billion years ago, a system of approved sentience archetypes was established, and a policing / enforcement group was established in support of it.
Native life began to evolve and populate the world around 600 million years ago.
The solar system that we live in was established as a sentience nursery around 540 million years ago.
Numerous sentience’s have been cultivated within this nursery. Humans are the latest biological creatures to be so cultivated.
RFH
I am open to updates on the latest theories and information regarding our galaxy. As with everything else, what I understand is based on what I know. I welcome comments and suggestions to better help flush out the past in our galaxy.
FAQ
Q: What type of galaxy is the Milky Way Galaxy?
A: The Milky Way galaxy considered to be a “barred spiral galaxy“, as such it resembles the Hubble classification type “Sbc“. This is how the galaxy looks at this point in time. In the past, the Milky Way galaxy looked quite different. Galaxies change their shape over time.
Q: How big is the Milky Way galaxy?
A: Yah. It’s pretty darn big. It’s huge. In fact, scientists are just falling over themselves in amazement as to how big it is. The galactic disc is at least 150,000 light-years across. As time moves forward, we find ourselves constantly revising the size of our galaxy ever larger.
Q: How old is the Milky Way galaxy?
A: As of 21MAY18, the over consensus is that the overall universe is about 13.7 billion years old. Contemporaneously, based on measurements of the element beryllium in two stars within a globular cluster of stars called NGC 6397, our Milky Way galaxy is considered to be one of the oldest galaxies in the universe. Using this dating method, those involved put the age at 13.6 billion years. Or, in other words almost the same age as the universe itself.
I contend that elements within our galaxy is as old as the universe, but most of the galaxy did not come into being until around three to four billion years later.
Q: What do you know about Roswell?
A: It is a town in New Mexico. There is all kind of lore regarding that area. Some people claim that an extraterrestrial vehicle crashed there and that it has been “covered up” by the United States government. Hogwash! Nothing is ever covered up by the United States government, why we have the open and most transparent president in the history of the world; Barrack Obama telling us that there are no extraterrestrials. You can believe him, right?
Q: Why is sentience important?
A: Our universe is controlled by thought. Sentience funnels and directs thoughts. Unless the sentience is policed, great disruptions to the fabric of our universe can occur. Thus it is critically important that humans have a unified sentience, and eventual genetic reprogramming to a approved archetype.
MAJestic Related Posts – Training
These are posts and articles that revolve around how I was recruited for MAJestic and my training. Also discussed is the nature of secret programs. I really do not know why the organization was kept so secret. It really wasn’t because of any kind of military concern, and the technologies were way too involved for any kind of information transfer. The only conclusion that I can come to is that we were obligated to maintain secrecy at the behalf of our extraterrestrial benefactors.
MAJestic Related Posts – Our Universe
These particular posts are concerned about the universe that we are all part of. Being entangled as I was, and involved in the crazy things that I was, I was given some insight. This insight wasn’t anything super special. Rather it offered me perception along with advantage. Here, I try to impart some of that knowledge through discussion.
Enjoy.
MAJestic Related Posts – World-Line Travel
These posts are related to “reality slides”. Other more common terms are “world-line travel”, or the MWI. What people fail to grasp is that when a person has the ability to slide into a different reality (pass into a different world-line), they are able to “touch” Heaven to some extent. Here are posts that cover this topic.
John Titor Related Posts
Another person, collectively known by the identity of “John Titor” claimed to utilize world-line (MWI egress) travel to collect artifacts from the past. He is an interesting subject to discuss. Here we have multiple posts in this regard.
There is evidence of an extraterrestrial presence all around us. All we need to do is look at what we see with new eyes. Indeed, the earth has been visited many, many times over huge spans of time; hundreds of millions of years. We have evidence of buildings, constructions, debris, interaction(s), and ruins.
Today, I would like to concentrate on the discovery of the remains of a fuselage embedded deep within the sandstone rock of Victoria Falls.
Of course, the statists don’t consider this anything other than naturally formed rocks. After all, the argument goes, humans are the most advanced species in the entire universe. It has always been that way, and it will always be that way. Anyone who thinks differently is just a simpleton.
Don’t ya know…
More reasonable people suspend judgement. They recognize that a mystery is exactly that; it is a mystery. They understand that nothing ever fits “nicely” in a set easy-to-label box. They understand that there are things older than us, that there are mysteries that are suggestive of technologies beyond our comprehension. To them, rather than labeling something “solved” with a nice “pat” answer, they label it as an OOPART and hope that someday, someone will be able to illuminate the truth behind the objects in question.
Enter Metallicman…
Here we get to shine some clarity on this mystery, based on other things that are understood within MAJestic.
Crash Debris
This relic is what I like to refer to as “crash debris” or if not precisely vehicular in nature, then “ruins in isolation” that I am sure had an interesting history.
It is considered an OOPART; an “out of place artifact” simply because it is “inconceivable” that anything was able to design, fabricate, assemble, train, fly, and crash a vehicle hundreds of millions of years before proto-proto-humans ever set foot on the earth. Humans have only been in possession of a written language for 6,000 years. While there have been various evolutionary stages of humans, it’s contemporaneously understood that the most significant contributions of humans has only been within the last 2,000 years.
Humans are, the statist belief goes, the smartest and most capable beings in the entirety of the universe. Anything that suggest otherwise is inconceivable.
It is simply, and in every other way, inconceivable.
Truly, what is written herein is just inconceivable. It just doesn’t match anything that is customarily associated with reason or understanding. It is far too outrageous for the typical reader. It is all fantasy. For, if humans don’t have the technology to do something, no one does.
Some History
Victoria Falls in Scotland. It is a nice waterfall formation that is lush and is a great place to visit with friends and family.
On June 13, 1880, a reporter for the Inverness Courier named Walter Carruthers was vacationing near Loch Maree and Victoria Falls, in Scotland. We can well imagine that he went on various walks and climbs. The area is very scenic and is a great place to walk, smell the air and explore. Being an amateur rock hunter (like my brother) he decided to explore the geology of the area.
During the day he went into the surrounding countryside and collected stones of personal interest to him. After a while he went towards waterfall in the area; Victoria Falls. Between 300 and 400 yards above Victoria Falls (the part were the water tumbled down the cliff), and immediately beside the last of the three lesser falls on the west side of the stream, Carruthers noticed peculiar impressions in the rock there. These impressions were obviously not natural. Indeed, and most perplexing; the rock was a 16 x 16-foot exposed surface of Torridon Red Sandstone, dated to the Cambrian age.
In geology, the term Torridonian is the informal name for the Torridonian Supergroup, a series of Mesoproterozoic to Neoproterozoic arenaceous and argillaceous sedimentary rocks, which occur extensively in the Northwest Highlands of Scotland.
Overhead view of the Victoria Falls region in Scotland. It’s a beautiful area and well worth a visit.
The Discovery
The impressions consisted of two continuous flat bands side by side. They were about 1.375 inches wide and about 0.25 inch deep. They ran in a unnaturally straight line through the flat layers of sandstone in situ. This was perfectly distinct for 16 feet, disappearing on the west side under the superimposed rock, and broken only where portions of the sandstone had been weathered out.
A few weeks later the curious “bands” were also observed by a colleague of Carruthers; Mr. William Jolly. He wanted an expert opinion from an authority in the region. Mr. William Jolly was exactly that. He was Her Majesty’s Inspector of Schools for the region. He was specifically invited to observe the curious feature and offer his opinions.
Carruthers had thought the impressions to have been the creation of some highly unusual living creature, but Jolly recorded that;
"the continuous even breadth and square section of the bands would seem to render this impossible."
Jolly further noted,
"The double band resembles nothing more nearly than the hollow impression that would be left by double bars of iron placed closely together."
Iron Bars Placed Close Together
Clearly, the expert at the time, Mr. Jolly felt that this was exactly what it appeared to be. He believed that the evidence was strongly suggestive of double bars of iron placed closely together in parallel.
Jolly’s observation was corroborated years later when micro-specks of iron oxide were taken from the impression cavities.
So, low and behold, the forms were actually made by some form of iron. Now, the reader should note that iron is not naturally pure. it comes from iron ore. Thus, the irons bars were [1] smelted from iron ore, and [2] formed into bars, and [3] obviously alloyed with something to make them useful, that were [4] placed evenly and exactly. Further, somehow, they [5] managed to find themselves embedded within rock and stone that is (around) 640 million years old.
Since it is inconceivable that this could have been smelted, fabricated, assembled, arranged, placed long before proto-proto-humans ever walked the earth, other solutions must be presented. Always a cautious man, Mr. Jolly offered some ideas on what they could actually be.
Alternative Speculations
The superintendent thought, however, that perhaps the iron bands had at one time been inserted into the rock, “to clasp some structure to it”. It seems like a reasonable explanation. Metal, particuliarly steels, are often embedded within stone and rock to mount other structures to them. We see this all over the world.
Unfortunately, other findings discount this.
First, the bands occur high above the Falls in an almost totally inaccessible place, where a “structure” would serve little purpose.
Second, the bands are only one-quarter of an inch deep, so that anything “clasped” to them would not hold for long.
Third, parallel on either side of each band are tin-like ripple marks in the sandstone, indicating the presence of the original iron bands had caused turbulence patterns in the sand during the time the sand had been laid down by water, and before it had turned to stone.
Fourth, the sandstone in the impressions show tiny striations which are really the preserved grain marks of the iron – again, indicating the metal had been impressed in the primordial sand, before solidification took place.
And finally, fifth, one portion of one of the bands bends back into the subsurface, and careful excavation revealed the presence of iron oxide totally encased by the surrounding sandstone. Thus the (partially complete) actual original iron band was actually found inside the rock where the band bent inward.
Other Evidence
The expert, Mr. Jolly, also found other band impressions in the same locality:
There is a third band that runs alongside the other two, but is much less distinct and is not continuous.
Two more lines, about 2 feet lower down on the rock surface, are only 7 feet long, and two more are higher up, running 3 feet long.
Jolly also saw still more bands on an outcropping of the same sandstone on the other side of the stream, again parallel to one another – one 3 feet, another 6 feet.
He also found smaller portions of several others nearby.
The Victoria Falls OOPART as discovered. All elements from the debris site are not shown. Only the aspects relative to this article are shown.
Suggested Layout
All of this suggests a number of broken sections of panel with supporting iron alloy bands evenly spaced. The panel had apparently broken up in numerous places and the parts all lay near each other in disarray. Upon the corrosive activity of time, the panel disappeared, leaving the supporting rib members to tell the story of what once must have been the side of a vehicle or wall panel of some sort.
What other purposes these iron bands served, we can only guess.
What we do know, however, is that all the bands were very uniform in width and thickness, with squared edges, and the grain marks they left indicate they were rolled and cut – all of which points to precision manufacturing by machine production.
There are numerous constructions that employ square cross sectional tubing. These include such things as fences, specialized mechanical and processing equipment, and vehicle walls (marine and aviation). From an engineering point of view, there are many structural reasons for incorporating long transverse bars to strengthen walls in vehicles. That is why they are used in both marine ships and aircraft (and spacecraft) contemporaneously.
This photo is of a 747 showing the cross section during demolition at a scrap yard. The transverse bars used to strengthen the walls are clearly indicated. It is possible that the Victoria Falls debris came from some vehicle similar in wall cross section as this.
By reading this report, I have come to imagine what the area must have looked like when the iron fabrications were still intact. I have come to the conclusion that numerous structures were lying on the sandy ground at that time. They all possessed long frames constructed of steel (and iron alloy containing small amounts of carbon by percentage).
These constructions, whether they were part of a construction site, or portion of wreckage, is unknown. But clearly, the impressions were made by the heaviest items deposited in the sand at that time. Given the possible location of the geology, it seems to me that the anomalous items found are but a sandy impression of washed up flotsam on an ancient Cambrian beach.
As such, since Iron or steel is heavy, the impression is supportive of a large panel or bulkhead with metal reinforced ribbing. For that is the only way the metal bars could have been washed up on to the beach. It would need a large surface area to keep the heavy metal rods buoyant. The panel itself has long since disappeared, but the heavy ribbing has survived in the impressions in the sand.
Formation of Sandstone
"Sandstone forms over the course of centuries, as deposits of sand accumulate in rivers, lakes or on the ocean floor, and the sand blends with calcite or quarts and then undergoes compression. After enough time goes by, the pressure pushes all of these elements together to create sandstone. Because not all sand is identical but instead comes in a variety of colors and grain textures, each formation has a unique appearance."
-How is Sandstone Formed
The forms in question, the rocks of Victoria Falls, were formed by the buildup of beach sand over many millions of years. As things were washed up by the ocean currents of that time, they became encased within the sand, and eventually buried within it.
Over time the metals rusted away leaving only the impressions made by the thickest and heaviest parts. The cavities made by thin wall sections would have collapsed many millions of years ago and there would be no trace of them today.
We do know that when the debris settled in place, that water splashed upon the surfaces of it. The impressions of the erosion and paths of water were at once clearly evident all around the impressions. This tells us that the debris was influenced by the water borne movement of sand on a shore.
Here is a section of fuselage found around the midway islands. It is approximately 75 years old. I contend that the remains might have looked something like this prior to compete corrosion.
What the Sandstone can tell us
Like any good forensic detective, we can identify the environment of the rocks to tell us a little about the history of the objects in question. The following insights are from ThoughtCo…
The sand grains in sandstone give information about the past:
The presence of feldspar and lithic grains means that the sediment is close to the mountains where it arose.
Detailed studies of sandstone give insight into its provenance—the kind of countryside that produced the sand.
The degree to which the grains are rounded is a sign of how far they were transported.
A frosted surface is generally a sign that sand was transported by wind—that, in turn, means a sandy desert setting.
Various features in sandstone are signs of the past environment:
Ripples can indicate the local water currents or wind directions.
Load structures, sole marks, rip-up clasts and similar features are fossil footprints of ancient currents.
Liesegang bands are signs of chemical action after burial of the sand.
The layers, or bedding, in sandstone are also signs of the past environment:
Turbidite sequences point to a marine setting.
Crossbedding (truncated, tilted sandstone layering) is a rich source of information on currents.
Interbeds of shale or conglomerate may indicate episodes of different climate.
Using this information, we can infer that the impressions were made by some object that was washed up on a sandy shore, that later became hard sandstone. We can tell that the object displaced the movement of the water in such a way that the wave and water washed in and around the heavier sections of the object. This gives us the impression that the heavier bars were attached to a lighter section that is no longer obvious to us.
To understand how the sand at a beach would eventually turn into a rocky outcrop and a water fall, we need to take a look at the time when that rock was formed.
The Cambrian Age
"The Ediacaran and Cambrian periods witnessed a phase of morphological innovation in animal evolution unrivaled in metazoan history, yet the proximate causes of this body plan revolution remain decidedly murky.
The grand puzzle of the Cambrian explosion surely must rank as one of the most important outstanding mysteries in evolutionary biology.
Evidence of early representatives of all the major animal phyla first appear abruptly in the Cambrian (starting 542 million years ago).
This spectacular morphological diversity contrasts strongly with Precambrian deposits, which have yielded a sparse fossil record with small, morphologically ambiguous trace fossils or the enigmatic but elegant creatures of the Ediacaran fauna. Following the Cambrian, despite a rich fossil record that documents impressive morphological diversification among animals, no new body plans have been revealed, leaving the Cambrian as the apparent crucible of metazoan body plan innovation."
-Creation / Evolution Headlines
The rocks and strata are highly suggestive that the remains date from the Cambrian period. That is a very long time ago. In fact, it is around 541–485.4 million years ago. (Let’s simply refer to the date as 540 million years ago.) At that time, the earth was mostly ocean. The continents were, as we can best tell, centered around the south pole. Leaving a comfortable bulk of the world covered by ocean.
The earth was, at that time, a ocean world with some notable mini-continents.
The earth at the time of the cambrian was of a mostly ocean covered world. The major land mass was centered at the South pole.
It was a mild time. The overall world weather was rather mild. There wasn’t any glaciation. The various landmasses present at that time were scattered about. (This all was a result of the fragmentation of the super-continent Rodinia that had existed in the late Proterozoic.)
There were a number of (more or less) significant landmasses. Though, most of the of the continents were joined together to form the super-continent Gondwana
A map of the Cambrian at around 500 Ma. The world was mostly an ocean covered world with mild climates, calm seas, no glaciers or ice covered poles. The land masses were mostly devoid of life. The oceans, however, were teeming with life. (Image Source.)
Prior to the Cambrian, the earth was not at all like we would assume it to be. It consisted of a very lively aquatic biosphere, and a terribly barren terrestrial land biosphere. The land masses were all barren and devoid of most life.
There were no animals. There were no insects. There were no flowers. There were no trees, nor grasses. There might have been a moss or two about, but that was about it. The differences between the two biospheres were too extreme. Nothing in the aquatic biosphere could breach the shore and make it’s way onto land.
Then suddenly something happened…
The Cambrian Explosion
This period of time; the Cambrian Period, was a very important point in the history of life on Earth. It was notable in that it was the time when animals first began to appear. This event is sometimes called the “Cambrian Explosion,” because of the relatively short time that the animals began to appear.
It was around a half a billion years ago. (I would say that 540 million years is pretty close to half a billion years.) Now, this is a very, very long time ago.
Prior to this time, most life came from the seas and oceans. There, the life grew and flourished. However it took some time for the life to leave the shores. At that time the oceans were teeming with life. There were jellyfish, marine creatures of all shapes and sizes and fishes. Yet the land was barren except for some life near the coasts.
Then SUDDENLY, out of the blue, life began to appear. It wasn’t that it started to appear from zero to full and dense populations. No. Instead, when we refer to life appearing; we actually are referring to “life appearing on land”.
You see, up until the Cambrian period, the earth consisted of two completely separate biospheres. There was the [1] aquatic biosphere, and there was [2] the land biosphere. They were independent and distinct. Fish did not walk on the land, no shellfish climbed up on the hot rocks near the water. No life was on the land.
The [1] aquatic biosphere was relatively easy to start early life within. It was a crucible. We know, now today, that when you have water and heat, you can generally generate microorganisms. Over time they can increase in number and diversify.
The [2] land biosphere was something different. There just wasn’t any kind of crucible or nursery for the growth or evolution of land life. The only way that this could occur was through transport from the [1] aquatic biosphere. That could not happen.
There was no mechanism to ignite life on the barren soil of the [2] land biosphere.
A Need for Tides
The time immediately before the Cambrian period is suggestive of a period when there just wasn’t any moon present. The earth sat alone without any large orbiting bodies. As a result, there were no tides and no waves. The ocean was a large still body. The only movement on the water was through the sea and ocean currents and the climate at the time.
Tides are created when a large planetary body is near another planetary body. This can be like the moon orbiting the earth, or more commonly, like a planet in close orbit around a red dwarf or class K star. The gravitation of the nearby body causes the liquid on the neighboring planet to move. This in turn, causes tides that ebb and flow. It causes periods of wet and dry surfaces where creatures from the [1] aquatic biosphere can evolve to move to a [2] land biosphere. Indeed, large planetary masses are necessary for biological evolution.
Large planetary masses are necessary for biological evolution.
The moon works with the sun to create tides. The tides create movement of the world’s oceans. This causes a rise and fall of water. This exposes aquatic creatures to brief periods outside the water. The creatures evolve, and eventually leave the aquatic environment.
I contend, for many reasons not listed here, that the moon was “placed” in orbit around the earth during the Cambrian. This placement created an environment that was friendly for the evolution and porting of life from the [1] aquatic biosphere to the [2] land biosphere.
I would suggest any one interested in following this “theory” further, please read my blog post about The Hollow Moon.
Indeed, there is strong evidence that numerous softshelled Ediacaran organisms ventured onto land during the Cambrian. In so doing they produced the trace fossils Protichnites and Climactichnites . These trace fossils are not of any specific creature, but rather the tracks made by them when they ventured forth in the sand. These tracks indicated that they had legs, tails, and perhaps some kind of articulated arms or claws.
Sketch of an euthycarcinoid. The top left (the left front) is removed to show the inner construction. This was a soft shell creature that was able to leave the seas and venture on land.
Protichnites is an ichnogenus of trace fossil consisting of the imprints made by the walking activity of certain arthropods. It consists of two rows of tracks and a medial furrow between the two rows. This furrow, which may be broken, set at an angle, and of varying width and depth, is thought to be the result of the tail region contacting the substrate.
Fossil evidence suggests that euthycarcinoids, an extinct group of arthropods, produced at least some of the Protichnites.
Climactichnites are the tracks of euthycarcinoids (we think). Because these creatures were soft-shelled, we have no idea what they actually looked like.
Fossils of the maker of Climactichnites have not been found; however, fossil track-ways (see above) and resting traces suggest a large, slug-like mollusk. Probably with a soft caprice or shape that is not readily mineralized. One should imagine a large (football sized) slug that looked a little like a “potato bug” but without a shell; crawling along the sand with gecko like speed.
Climactichnites is an enigmatic, trace fossil of a slug-like organism, thought to have moved by crawling to on-shore surfaces, or near-shore, or burrowing into the sediment.
I personally like to consider these creatures proto-trilobite creatures.
Life in The Cambrian
At that time, we can well imagine that the world was just beginning to experience the gravitational effects of a nearby moon. The contents began to migrate over time, and the effects of the tides began to result in the movement of sea life onto land. At that time, life began to form near the oceans and the rivers.
The oceans, of course were well populated with life. Reefs, coral, and sea life were in abundance. The first early life on the land masses were just starting. This would include such things as early ferns, mosses and basic plants. Simple land creatures became dominant, of which my personal favorites, the trilobites became abundant.
Some Cambrian trilobites on the shallow seas. Their legs enabled them to scurry about under the sea. Then when the moon started the movement of tides, the trilobites began to move about on the coast. They were one of the first species to move on land from the aquatic biosphere. (Image Source.) BTW, I would strongly advise the reader to visit the amazing artwork of this artist in Deviantart; go HERE.
"Trilobitesare one of the few major groups of organisms thatspanthemajority of thePaleozoic Era. The greatest numbers of trilobite speciesoccurred during the CambrianandOrdovicianperiods, after which trilobiteextinction trends exceeded radiation events."
-Trilobite Geological Time Scale
I have always had a special place in my heart for these little guys. I like to think of them as what the first hardly life looked like when ambulatory creatures started to leave the [1] aquatic biosphere and enter the (off limits) [2] land biosphere. They were tiny things. In a lot of ways, sort of like a non-insect version of the cockroach.
They ranged in size from small insect-size “Potato bug” appearing creatures to larger ones that look like large tail-less horseshoe crabs. Some species became rather large. As shown here…
The trilobites could get very large. Here is a very nice graphic of some of the larger of this species. (Image Source.) The website is one of the BEST sources for trilobite information. I would strongly suggest the reader visit it.
The Presence of the Moon Changed Everything
In contrast to later periods, the Cambrian fauna was somewhat more restricted; indeed free-floating organisms such as jellyfish were actually rare during this time. This was quite unlike the earlier era where there were large swarms of jellyfish, in many sizes (including super-jumbo).
Those earlier life forms that did survive ended up living on or close to the sea floor. Due to catastrophic events that affected the native life forms, mineralizing animals became rarer than in future periods. This was due, in part, to the unfavorable ocean chemistry prevalent at the time.
One of the mysteries of the Cambrian is why there was a jump in the concentration of sulphate in the world's oceans. However, in the Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, Canfield and Farquhar attribute the rise in sulphate to the onset of bioturbidity.
Or in other words, the burrowing, sluicing, pumping and mixing caused by masses of worms, clams, crustaceans and other animals that began to appear around this time in Earth's history.
Personally, I sit amusedly on the sidelines on this argument. I think all the theories are quite interesting, though a bit over my head. I graciously leave the arguments to those scientists that are far better versed to make these determinations than I am.
The Big Picture
With all this being said, let me color in the situation as I understand it to be. Please stick with me as it will sound absolutely outrageous.
The way things actually are has no bearing on what everyone thinks. In most cases, what everyone things is absolutely and positively in error. Many times it is based on assumptions that are flat out WRONG. Thus, when someone is exposed to the possibilities of truth, they recoil back in horror and dismay.
If this is too much for your sensibilities, I would suggest you put on some Robin Trower, King Crimson, Yes, Traffic, Gentle Giant, Stone Temple Pilots, or Led Zeppelin. Chill out. Listen to the music for a spell. Break the hold of contemporaneous knowledge and assumptions. Just break it. Realize that we grow and change. Change is good. We need to see where we can from to understand what we are doing were we are today.
Ediacaran Earth
Around 600 million years ago, the earth was a planet that held great promise. This was the Ediacaran period (630 million years ago). The reader must understand that at this time the Earth was a bare and desolate place. Our solar system was mostly free of the huge dust disks and debris field of the earlier 2 to 3 billion years. (Although most of the dust and debris dissipated within the first billion years or so, there were elements of concern for at least a billion years later.)
Our star had matured during that time and became much more stable. But stability is a relative thing; the earth was cooling down. The core and mantle were settling down. Indeed, the surface of the earth was cooling and a thick gaseous envelope of various dusty gasses surrounded it.
Outside the Earth, the other rocky planets were also beginning to cool down and life was just beginning to form in the most unlikely of places. This included the smoggy Mars, and Venus, as well as some of the larger moons of Jupiter (because Jupiter was somewhat closer to the Sun then as it is today).
It showed promise.
Ediacaran Life
Now, the reader should well understand, the earth was a pretty barren world, but the oceans were teaming with all sorts of life. It was a jellyfish world. There was a great diversity of, and sizable numbers of, all sort of soft skinned creatures who roamed the oceans.
The oceans provided the environment that was a common crucible for naturally evolved life.
It was during this time that the (so called) Ediacaran biota flourished. Then the world consisted of very large and shallow seas. These shallow seas permitted the growth of various simple organisms. Simple trace fossils of possible worm-like creatures; known as the Trichophycus became common, as well as the very first sponges and trilobitomorphs (the early ancestors of trilobites).
The creatures of the earth at this time were simple in design and structure. They were the earliest naturally evolving creatures of the earth and consisted of very simple proto-fungi and very simple proto-creatures.
At this time there were no insects, birds, or even flowers. The earth was a land of proto-fungi and small simple creatures. The reader should consider the land at this time to be rather bare and rocky, with the earliest fungi and simple creatures clustering around the shorelines.
Now, just because the earth had native and naturally evolved life in the oceans, does not necessarily mean that it would be a viable candidate for long term habitation and perhaps colonization. Many planets go through stages of evolution that eventually die out. (This is due to many causes.)
Contrary to what you might see on a Hollywood movie or read in a science fiction story, there are many planetary and solar system influences that affect who we are. Migration to other planets in other places is not as easy as the Star Wars movie franchise might give the impression of.
Enter the Progenitors
Other species, much older and technically advanced, saw promise in our solar system. I said “promise”, I did not say “perfect environment”. Yah, the star was warmer and more energetic than most of the (at that time) known inhabited solar systems, but it possessed a singular world that could be brought into the fold with some planetary modifications.
The creatures, we can call them “The Progenitors” for now, decided to do what they had done on other similar solar systems. They decided to re-engineer the solar system to increase the potential for naturally evolved intelligence’s.
They, using their advanced technologies, moved the moon and placed it in orbit around the earth.
It is absolutely, positively, undeniably, and in every other way, inconceivable.
The Earth gets a Moon
At a time, around 540 Million years ago, plus of minus 20 million years or so, the presence of the moon created the Cambrian explosion where life began to exist upon the barren landmasses of earth. The moon did not suddenly come into being. It entered orbit with long elliptical swings coming close to the surface of the earth and then swinging away from it. This period of orbital instability lasted millions of years.
There is evidence, of course considered to be outrageous and inconceivable, that the moon was purposely relocated into a perfectly circular orbit to support (and improve) the habitability of the earth. At that time, there were all sorts of support vehicles and craft that assisted in this effort.
During the movement of the moon, there was a great deal of vehicular traffic in and around the earth.
One of these vehicles had an accident and the debris washed up on a sandy beach shore. It eventually was buried by the sand and turned into sandstone. When discovered it became a much overlooked OOPART.
It became our Victoria Falls OOPART.
The Extraterrestrial Narrative
“Americans Can’t Handle The Truth.”
-George Bush Senior On UFOs. In October 2015, a man asked former President Bush if he had any information on UFO’s and extraterrestrial life. The man that asked the question has been identified as Adam Guelch, an active member of the Mutual UFO Network (MUFON), which credits itself as being the world’s oldest and largest UFO phenomenon investigative body.
Now, the reader should well recognize that everything stated here is my own opinion. Officially, there are no extraterrestrials. The United States has no relationship with any of them simply because they don’t exist. Therefore there really isn’t a need for any kind of secret organization in support of that relationship. Don’t you know…
However, were they to exist…
They would have achieved spaceflight capability billions of years before our solar system solidified into rocky planets. (Our solar system is only 4.5 billion years old, while our universe is around 15 billion years old.)
They would have had enough time to fully explore this galaxy. (At least 6 billion years, if you assume that it took them four billion years to evolve during the first generation of stars. We are now at the fourth generation of stars, in case you were not aware.)
As such, they would have settled and cultivated this galaxy to suit their needs.
They would have developed their technologies on a grand scale.
The movement of planets to improve the habitability of specific regions would be within their grasp and ability.
As with any and all species, accidents and mistakes can and do happen.
We can see, detect, and observe some of these mistakes around us. All we need do is listen close enough to what the stones at our feet are trying to say.
However, this is all speculation. Don’t you know.
“Not every discovery has been announced.”
— Dr. Farouk El Baz, NASA scientist.
Summary
There are ruins and debris suggestive of intelligent manufacture all around us. By looking at it with new eyes, we can add it to a collection of other things that we know. Thus, based on some pretty broad assumptions, we can compile some theories that describe answers to our reality.
The Victoria Falls artifact is one such object.
A vehicle crashed or broke up in the oceans of the Cambrian.
Fuselage debris washed up on the sandy beaches of what is now Scotland.
Over millions of years, the debris became encased in sandstone.
As such, let it be understood that…
The time associated with the accident is associated with the Cambrian explosion.
The time of the accident is associated with the general time period where the moon entered earth’s orbit.
An Adventure Trip
One reader decided to take a trip out to the falls to see the oopart up close first hand. This is her story...
Hi MM
Thought I would share our expedition to discover the oopart at Victoria Falls as mentioned in your article.
One article I had overlooked, thinking that Victoria Falls related to Africa not Scotland, so a recent read about the fuselage fuelled our interest and now that lockdown is easing in Scotland, time to travel north (merely over an hour or so away from home!)
Wow, it turned into an epic adventure!
Off we go in the camper, heading through the ancient landscape of Torridon and along Loch Maree to the car park at Victoria Falls. Members of the party included me and my partner and our elderly collie who made a phenomenal effort through the tangled and thick vegetation which grows around the bed of the river above the falls – horsetails, heather, birch and rowan, long grasses, woodrush and the company of dragonflies.
First afternoon we clambered over deadwood, fallen trees and all with our beloved dog who has a partially paralysed back leg disappearing in the undergrowth. We searched the riverbed up from the falls until we reached a hydro station which seemed abandoned, with powerlines trailing in the river.
It is here that we abandoned project, and my partner took a walk further upstream to look, while I waited with our tired collie.
Nothing was particularly visible to us apart from the noticeable changes at the side of the bank where the hydro station stood – this was approx. 300 to 400 yards up from the falls. So we returned to the camper and had a refreshment and then I went back for another look further upstream past a deer fence and explored the river up there (photos incl.) This was high above the falls now and it was spectacular with the rocks and small falls plunging down, a female red deer disturbed by my presence ran uphill.
So we abandoned the project, went down to Loch Maree where we camped at Slattadale, and vowed to take another look in the morning. Midges were ferocious but the setting overlooking Slioch is spectacular so we hung out by the lochside as long as we could.
In the morning, we returned to the falls and our dog refused to go! So my partner went back by himself armed with the camera, and walked from the top of the falls up the river bed 300 to 400 yards and more. At this point is the disused hydro and approximately 70 yards of the west bank have been built out with large boulders covering the bedrock.
So our assumption is sadly that the oopart may be buried under the boulders on the west bank where the hydro site is. We researched a little about the hydro and found it was built late 80’s and abandoned for a new project with a greater MW further downstream below the falls. We can’t help but wonder if the building of this old hydro on possibly the very site of the oopart might have been intentional to conceal it. But this obviously is unprovable. It seemed to us more than a coincidence that the hydro now abandoned was deliberately placed.
Thank you for your article as it encouraged us to have a wilderness adventure and a great time had, although disappointed not to be sharing the oopart pictures with you – and certainly sad for Scotland loosing a significant piece of prehistory yet again.
I enclose some pics for you all the best
Anonymous Jane
RFQ
I would really appreciate a field trip to Victoria Falls to take pictures of the various objects and features. I would really like to see samples of the iron oxide, and to have a chemical analysis conducted of it. I would welcome a study of that entire area to see if there were any other elements of debris that could tell us much more than what has been handled down to us.
To me, a forensic study of this area might tell us some very interesting things.
But, then again, you can follow the statist explanation. It’s nothing. It’s just a natural formation, and the grooves are just geological fracture lines, or paths made by some kind of long extinct animal… that shit out iron oxide.
What ever makes your boat float. You define your reality. If you want to live a nice settled comfortable lie, go for it.
FAQ
Q: What is the Victoria Falls OOPART? A: This is an impression in the sandstone rock. The rock was formed during the Cambrian, so the object that made the impression had to rest in and on the sand at that time. The pattern that was made in the sand is suggestive of only on thing; a torn up section of aircraft fuselage. Since this object (which made the impression) predates mankind, it is considered an Out of Place Artifact (OOPART).
Q: Why are the grooves at Victoria Falls considered an OOPART? A: There simply isn’t a natural explanation for the manufacture of the kinds of impressions and features discovered in this object. Since it cannot be explained, more reasonable people don’t try to explain it. They name it as an OOPART and leave it at that.
Q: Are there other explanations for the Victoria Falls grooves? A: Some explanations include [1] a fossil trail by an unknown extinct animal, [2] a hoax, [3] an unknown but natural geologic process, [4] carved structures made by man for purposes unknown, [5] natural weathering.
Q: Why was the moon relocated in orbit of the earth during the Cambrian? A: Our solar system was chosen by the Progenitors as a crucible for intelligent evolution. Once the various life forms evolved, some became intelligent, and the Progenitors worked with other entities (not mentioned at this time) to help direct and guide the evolution of the emergent life. Today, the earth remains part of a cluster of “nursery” solar systems used to assist in the evolution of man. The biggest issue before man today is sentience. Our species can have only one sentience.
Today we have three sentience’s, and that mixture has resulted in all kinds of problems and turmoil over the years. In a way, you can simplify the sentience’s as this;
Service-For-Others – Be good and kind. Help others. Be generous. Be saintly. This is “Heavenly” behavior and it results in a well adjusted soul within a stable “Heaven”.
Service-for-Self – Do everything for your own personal benefit. You can do anything. There are no limits. If people and others suffer, there are no consequences. This can be considered evil or “Hellish” behavior. This behavior is associated with a different “kind” of “Heaven”. The way the quanta group themselves together for this kind of sentience is different, and evolutionary migration has a different vector to travel upon.
Disrupted – You think that you are a Service-for-Others sentience, but your actions and motivations are Service-for-Self. This is a disrupted sentience, and it is the most dangerous as it adversely affects the soul composition and structure.
Q: What was the Cambrian Explosion? A: The term the Cambrian Explosion refers to a short period of time when the moon tides permitted life (adapted to an aquatic biosphere) to migrate up onto land. As it did it began to evolve quickly.
Q: What are the Projenitors? A: They are a non-human species that preceded mankind. They are very old, very wise and are tasked with the growth of mankind. Physically they are quite different from humans. They are invertebrates. They are biologically similar to insects, but you wouldn’t know that from meeting them. They are often considered to be angels. Yes, in the Biblical sense; “angels”.
“Angels therefore are not vertebrates or derived from vertebrate stock. The implications of this are profound. The only winged invertebrates are in the Class Insecta insects [Insecta].”
- A theologian discusses the etymological implications of biblical angels.
Do you want more?
I have more articles in my MAJestic and OOPART Indexes here…
You’ll not find any big banners or popups here talking about cookies and privacy notices. There are no ads on this site (aside from the hosting ads – a necessary evil). Functionally and fundamentally, I just don’t make money off of this blog. It is NOT monetized. Finally, I don’t track you because I just don’t care to.
Please kindly help me out in this effort. There is a lot of effort that goes into this disclosure. I could use all the financial support that anyone could provide. Thank you very much.
Consciousness can migrate about in and out of the physical world. A truly advanced civilization and culture recognizes this fact. For us to grow as humans we must also recognize this fact.
For me to perform my operations relative to MAJestic, I needed to migrate my consciousness. As such, I was exposed to numerous technologies involved in this action. Fundamental to that is an understanding of what soul is. Here, I would like to introduce the reader to the reality of soul. Yes, boys and girls, souls do exist. There is a reason to life.
Of course, this post, like all my other posts, is going to ruffle some tail feathers. Hey, no problem. You can leave if you don’t like what I have to say.
Contrary what you (the reader) might be expecting, I am not going to repackage any of the teachings of the major religions. Nor am I going to point out an approved “scientific” narrative, either. What I am presenting here is what I have learned through entanglement experiences. As such, it can be wrong, because what was taught to me was in error, or it could be wrong because my understanding is faulted. It can also just be a bunch of nonsense. You the reader can decide.
You can read it or not…
Elementary Summary of History
Here is my very simplified explanation as to how Heaven came about. It was pretty simple.
There was a point of beginning. The reader can think of it as “The Big Bang”, but for reasons that I cannot get into at this moment, I think it was something else. Let’s, for now, just consider it “The Start”. It was very similar to the “Big bang” in that there was nothing, and then there was something.
Heaven was created after the start of all there is. It did not come before.
When the “The Start” erupted, the universe was flooded with quantum strings. Over time, the quantum strings began to interact with each other. They developed into different forms and shapes. They also developed into different energy states. Within this place were all sorts of these weird quantum strings. Over time, as they interacted with each other, they created a stratified place. (In the picture above, this stratified place is shown as a color gradient.) The different energy states and different behaviors of the quantum strings occurred within a strange reality. It is one that our minds cannot grasp. It is a reality where there just isn’t anything known as time, and anything known as space. It was, for lack of a better word, a “place”. It is NOT the universe.
That place can be considered to be “Heaven”.
At this time, nothing existed except the presence of the quantum strings.
Since it was stratified by energy potential, certain combinations or configurations of strings started to “drop out” or “fall into” a state of comfort or stability. They did so suddenly, as if on cue. The lowest or less energetic of the quantum strings found a point of stability and created a “bubble”. All of the lower order strings migrated towards that “bubble”. We call this event ‘The Big Bang”.
Now, many scientists wrap the “Big Bang” together with “The Start”. It is as if, they were one and the same. Maybe they were. I don’t know. What I do know is that the “Big Bang” came after the formation of “Heaven”.
The “Big Bang” occurred after Heaven was created. We do not know the amount of “time” that passed. All that we know is that the universe that we recognize occurred after the creation of Heaven.
We exist within this “bubble”. To us, it is all that there is. It is the universe as we observe it. The highest energy potentials are beyond range of our human ability to perceive.
What is not clear to us, but should be obvious, is that other collections of quantum strings formed other bubbles. In many ways, these bubbles were similar to the one that we now consider to be our universe. However, that is where the similarity ends. These other bubbles or “other universes” are all different from ours in strange and unusual ways.
More than one “universe” was spawned from our “Heaven”. There were many other universes. Each one was different, with different attributes, and rules.
Just as the slower and denser arrangements of quantum, strings precipitated out and became our universe. Other collections of quantum strings arranged themselves into new orders and migrated into other “bubbles”.
Many collections of quantum strings formed “arrangements”. They fell into ordered shapes. They became ordered quanta. As such, over time they began to develop sentience. As such, they migrated into bubble “universes” that was attractive to them. For humans, when the quantum strings began to form a human-like sentience, they all migrated to a new “bubble universe”. For lack of a better term, I call this universe the “Human Universe”. And, for lack of a better term, I call the parent Heaven as the “Zone of Unordered Quanta”.
To prevent confusion, it is important to distingush between primordial Heaven, and contemporaneous Heaven(s). Primordial Heaven is a realm of unordered quanta.
This is the way the universe works. Our physical bodies reside within a physical universe. Our souls reside within a “Human Heaven”. We know that there are other “Heavens” for different types of sentience. There is a “Dog Heaven”. There is a “Cat Heaven”. There is even a “Turtle Heaven”.
The Human Soul
Most Americans know what a “soul” is, though they would be hard pressed to explain it. The problem with this is that it is difficult to describe and measure in three-dimensional Newtonian terms. That is because the mathematics of how the brain functions describe a multi-dimensional existence (more about this later.).
I think that everyone, including the reader, must understand the reality of soul. They must understand that it has form. That it also has a function and features that can be defined and measured if one has the proper tools and equipment. It’s not some kind of imaginary spiritual feel-nice flowery “stuff”. It is a major component of who and what we are. Just because we, today, are having trouble pinning it down today does not mean that it will always be impossible to do so. We, as humans, just simply don’t have the proper equipment yet to do so.
The soul is quite real.
We are having trouble trying to detect it because it does not reside within our physical reality. It exists outside of our reality. The only thing that we can detect is our consciousness. Luckily, for us, our consciousness is a part of our soul. They are intimately connected.
The Soul Resides within Heaven
The (human) soul exists in a higher dimensional state, which we commonly refer to as “Heaven”. (From now on, I will use shorthand notation. “Heaven” will always refer to “Human Heaven” unless specified otherwise.) It does not exist in the physical world. Instead, it creates a “connection” or “link” to the physical world. The link or connection is our consciousness.
Souls exist within a Heaven. Human souls exist within a Human Heaven. Cat souls exist within a Cat Heaven.
Souls exist in “Heaven”. In the illustration above, it is clear that while all souls exist within a “Heaven”, they are NOT equal. They occupy different energy states or states of being (ability). In the picture above, soul B has a coarser or denser energy level compared to that of soul A. That does not mean that soul A is “better” or “more spiritual” than soul B. It simply means that they are different.
Those differences between the two souls are meaningless. It holds no understanding for us as physical beings existing as we do, within our physical reality.
In truth, there are numerous characteristics of a given soul. These characteristics are defined how the “stuff” that souls are made out of (ordered quantum strings), interact with the “stuff” that Heaven is made out of (unordered quantum strings). Thus, we have different energy potentials, different entropic states, different sizes, different arrangements of quanta, and different resultant post-formulation self-constructions.
Heaven
No one (human) really knows exactly what “Heaven” is. For our purposes, we shall keep it simple. “Heaven” is state of existence that lies outside of our physical reality. Its dimensions, shape, composition, and limitations are unknown to us.
Thus we know of two states of existence. There is the one state that we reside in. It is our reality. It is all that we know. Then, there is a second state of existence. It lies outside of our reality. We know nothing of this state, except that it exists.
How do we know that it exists? Because we, as consciousness, know and understand that there is something “out there”; something bigger and grander than the reality that we exist within. We don’t know anything more than that. We just know that there is something “else” once our physical body dies within this reality.
While we do know that Heaven is composed of unordered quanta, we do know that it is self- segregated. We do know that within “Heaven” are states, or “levels” of existence. Some might refer to this as “energy levels”, “power”, “entropy”, “purity”, or some other means that would help express the concept of Heaven to us humans. Some religions break these regions into “planes”, or “levels” of Heaven. We, as physical mortals do not know what they are. We only know that they exist.
Our minds put these various regions in a two dimensional existence. When in reality, instead of a two dimensional (up and down, with better or “more” spiritual states up top, and lesser states below) there are multiple components regarding this state situation. (The picture above shows the two dimensional concept.) When in reality it might look like something much more complex. (Please see the picture below.)
Heaven is a very detailed and complex place. It is a realm where quanta takes on forms that are beyond our understandings at this time.
Souls exist in a “Heaven” of unique complexity.
Composition of Souls
Within Heaven are Souls.
Souls are also not well understood. In fact, it is still under debate by many well-learned scientists. For our purposes, we will define both Heaven and Souls to be made up of the same “stuff”. We will define the “stuff”, makeup or composition of both Souls and Heaven to be the smallest and basic elements of the known universe. That is “strings”. Both Heaven and Souls are composed of quantum strings.
To continue, and to greatly simplify, the “stuff” of Heaven can be considered to be “unorganized” quantum strings. While Souls can be considered to be “ordered” or “organized” quantum strings that have obtained sentience. Within this environment, souls with the proper experience and training, can take unordered quantum strings and create order.
Thus, in this most simple explanation of our universe, we have a universe that is composed of ordered and unordered quantum strings, and within this are souls. With Souls consisting of ordered quantum strings that have obtained sentience.
A soul is a collection of quantum strings that have obtained sentience.
Sentience is the first step in growth of a soul. There are many other steps. In order to grow and achieve these other steps or levels, we need to expand soul. This is accomplished by adding and arranging ordered quantum strings.
As stated previously, ordered quantum strings are a consequence of experience.
Realities are Constructs to obtain Experiences
Within the world of Heaven, it is very difficult to configure, compile and grow Souls. Souls grow by attachments and relationships between quantum strings.
In short, it is rather very simple to explain. Souls grow by the attainment of experiences. With each experience, the soul can configure, grow, adapt, and learn.
Souls create realities so that they have a “place” where they can acquire experiences.
Soul A creates a “Reality” so that it can obtain experiences in.
Experiences, and most especially how we handle them, determine the quantum attachments we make. Therefore, it is very important to watch our behaviors and control our actions. This not only concerns actions, but our thoughts as well. I will cover this in more detail later. For now, the reader just needs to note that thoughts and actions together define the shape our reality takes on. That reality, in turn, translates into the type of quantum entanglements that our consciousness collects.
When our soul collects entanglements via the consciousness, it can use them build upon, create and expand with. In general, the soul wants the best “quality” entanglements. Poor quality entanglements retards growth.
The best way to obtain high quality entanglements is to [1] be active and be outgoing, [2] think good thoughts, [3] be a moral person, and [4] be kind to others (including animals). Intention is everything.
To obtain the largest amount of entanglements, you need to out and be around a lot of people. We, as humans in the physical world, are like huge vacuum cleaners, entangling with everyone and everything we meet. To obtain the highest quality of entanglements, we need to be around good people, in a good environment. Now, we can be around bad people, but we must be good and positive around them. We must not let them affect us in a negative way.
The reader can think of it this way;
You walk down a road at night. A robber mugs you and you hand over your wallet. He leaves. You are one wallet poorer. That entire event was an experience. Like it or not, that experience is now part of who you are.
However, how you react to that experience will determine the shape of the quantum attachments that you collect. If you are angry and hold on to it, the attachment gets courser, and more primitive. You attract other events and people of a similar nature. The longer you hold on to it, the worse it gets. If, however, you let it go. You forget about that event and move on with your life, you will chalk up that experience and benefit from it. It didn’t change who you are, and you have learned from it. It became a positive growth experience and you have benefited from it.
Control of thoughts and actions is there most important thing that we can do on this planet within our reality.
One Reality per Person
There is only one reality per person. It is set up by the soul specifically to obtain experiences from. We do not share our reality with anyone. It only looks that way. We might think that we are sharing it with our loved one. We are not. It is an illusion. We are sharing it with the version of them within our reality.
To facilitate educational growth, Souls create “Realities”. Realities are a classroom that Souls can grow through a surrogate “human” (If you are a human. Different realities exist for different animals.). In each reality (or world-line), there is but one physical reality with but one person existing within it. (This is not what everyone thinks. We all believe that we share our realities. We do not. We share the universal “template”.) The Soul connects to this reality through a mechanism known as “Consciousness”.
This “connection” or “link” is known as consciousness.
Consciousness
Sentience is meaningless in of itself.
Souls can partition their sentience into small groups known as “consciousness”. These smaller elements are set forth to inhabit a physical reality. This is done in order to acquire experiences. Each body that the consciousness acquires needs to have a physical component of sentience. There is no word for this in the English language. Therefore, we are stuck with the confusion resulting from two types of sentience. One is a GOD-level sentience, and one is a physical-level-sentience.
Soul places an “interface” within the constructed reality. This interface is known as “consciousness”.
Soul places an “interface” within the constructed “reality”. This is known as “consciousness”.
The consciousness, when it resides within the physical reality can move about freely. It takes on wave behavior. As such, it can move in and out the constructed reality. The reality (of course) has both a physical and non-physical components. The consciousness can move about both quite adeptly.
However, that really isn’t very useful. The consciousness is not able to interact with anything. In order to gain experiences, and attract quanta (it’s like a big vacuum cleaner, don’t you know…) the consciousness must interact with other physical things within the reality construct. The best way to do this is for the consciousness to occupy a physical body.
To occupy the physical body, the consciousness needs to leave the wave state and enter a particle state. Once in the particle state, it can interact with the physical body. It can move the physical body, learn and grow.
Souls create realities from which to create events by which experiences can be obtained. To acquire those experiences and learn from them, the soul creates a consciousness within that reality.
Souls create “Realities” to obtain experiences.
Thus the soul, in this “Heavenly” environment, it creates various “realities” or “bubbles” of realities from which to learn and obtain experiences. Experiences are how souls grow. They collect quantum particles and form them into shapes that create advancement of soul states. When the soul wishes to obtain an experience, it creates a consciousness that it assigns to a physical body within one of the realities.
A soul is NOT a consciousness. A given consciousness is but a small part of a soul that is dispatched into a “reality” to learn and acquire experiences. Consciousness is a part of a soul that is allocated for physical education.
Each reality can be segregated into the physical and the non-physical reality. The physical reality is well known and understood. It is the Newtonian reality that we have all been taught in school. The non-physical reality is (currently) the realm of the “spiritual”. It is the world of the unseen. It is also the home of the spiritual worlds such as evidenced by “astral projection” and the various other planes of existence.
The consciousness is not imprisoned within a body. The consciousness can move within the physical reality so created, or with proper training, enter into the non-physical realities surrounding the reality bubble. It is a matter of changing the quantum state of the quantum particles that form the consciousness component of the soul. (Particle dynamics change to wave dynamics; more about that later.)
However, it is always limited to one specific reality at a time.
The soul creates an environment to learn from.
Consciousness is a “Passageway”
Consciousness can be thought of as a “passageway”.
We like to think of it as “who we are”. However, that is not what it is. It is something else entirely. So instead of thinking of it as a set being or entity, consider it as a long road. Think of it as a window or path that connects your physical brain to your non-physical soul. As such, your consciousness connects your physical reality to heaven.
It is a passageway.
It is a passageway from your soul to your present reality. This reality is NOT a shared reality that you share with others. No. It is to a specific “reality” that resides within the universe. This reality is but one of the many, many possible combinations of what can, did and will happen in our universe.
Consciousness is the passageway or “tunnel” that connects the physical reality to the soul.
Consciousness should be considered a “Passageway” or “Tunnel” to our soul.
The Universal Template
The universe is, fundamentally, a template from which a reality can be constructed from.
This is NOT what we think it is. We consider the universe to be fixed, and never changing. We all think that we all share the same universe at the same time. We do not. That is just what it appears to be while we exist within it. We share the same universal template. From that are spawned various realities as needed.
Individual realities tend to cluster. They are not that dissimilar.
This is both for different souls, and for given particular lessons. For must humans, the realities are constructed from a universal template that centers around the earth. Experiences are drawn from different variations of experiences in different time periods. Yes, so the idea that we all share the same experience in the same place at the same time is wrong. It only appears that way.
The universal template consists of every single human, and every possible action that they were involved in, from the earliest dates to the end of humanity. The soul selects individual realities out of this universal template. It then positioned a consciousness within a physical body, which lies within a reality drawn from this physical template.
Reality is spawned from the universal template.
Your reality is spawned from the Universal Template.
As such, a reality can be mixed up and taken at random as needed. It does not need to follow a sequential “arrow” of time. If a given soul needs the experiences of a baker working in Paris in the year 1850, it will construct that reality from the template. Then it will send a consciousness into that reality so to obtain experiences.
Once the experiences, and the lessons, are finished the consciousness leaves the physical reality. It returns home to soul.
If the soul then wants to have other additional experiences (as is often the case), it reinserts the consciousness in another reality that it constructs. Perhaps, it might want to have the experiences of an American aviator fighting in the South Pacific ocean during World War II. It then would spawn a new reality from the universal template. It would then insert the consciousness into that reality. As such, it would then obtain those experiences.
Once the experiences (and the lessons) were finished, the consciousness would leave the body. It returns home to soul yet again.
Now, let’s suppose that the soul wants to have the experiences as a slave involved in the building of one of the pyramids in ancient Egypt. It can most certainly do so. As such, it would pull a reality from the universal template and reinsert the consciousness into that reality. It can do this because “time” doesn’t really exist. It only appears that way to us who are within an extracted reality.
Thus, through continuous manipulation of realities, and the movement of consciousness, the soul grows and rearranges quanta. Each time it improves itself. It keeps progressing and doing so until it can reach the next stage of existence for the soul. (Whatever that might be.)
Putting it all Together
So far, I have introduced the reader to the reality of all there is. The reader should now know what a “Human Heaven” is like, and how it came about. The reader should now also know what the universe is, and how it came about as well. The reader should also understand how souls use the Physical Universe” to select “Realities” from which the soul can obtain experiences.
So, putting everything together, it looks something like this…
The timeless universe is the universal template. The soul uses this template from which to create realities from.
And, ladies and gentleman, that is exactly how the universe works. As you can see it is quite different from what is taught in churches, and in schools. Never the less that is the way it is.
A brief set of summaries are in order;
Heaven is a place that best suits a set of organized quanta that has obtained sentience.
As such, there is a Heaven for each creature that has obtained sentience.
Heaven was created by the “Big Bang” after an event which I refer to as “The Start”.
Our souls exist in Heaven.
They create “realities” so they can obtain experiences.
Experiences allow souls to organize unorganized quanta and thus grow and advance.
We do not share realities.
Each reality is unique to the consciousness that inhabits it.
Because each reality is unique, we as consciousness can change it…
From which I would like to segway to some aspects of my role within MAJestic; World-Line travel.
World-Lines
The idea of world-lines is a very simple concept in regards to this.
There are a (near) infinite number of world-lines that a consciousness (person) can experience. However, it is only beneficial for the person to experience a different world-line as long as it guarantees the same level of learning (of the Soul) will be obtained.
A “world-line” is a variation of a reality that a consciousness inhabits.
There is NO physical movement from one world-line to another. It is after all, the same reality bubble. (The reader is advised NOT to get confused in this regard. Some of the illustrations might give that impression. It is not the case. In the absolute reality of the soul, world-line travel is not really travel at all. Instead, it is a change in the composition of reality.) What changes are the entropy presets that are associated with the reality bubble. More about this later on.
Consciousness can migrate from one reality to another reality. This is often referred to as world-line travel.
Consciousness can migrate from one reality to another reality. This is commonly known as world-line travel. The consciousness would migrate from one world-line reality to another world-line reality.
The only benefit in the migration is relative to the experiences that soul can obtain. For now, in this section, let’s keep our focus on the human soul as viewed by a human within a bubble reality.
In the above picture we can see that a person is living within a reality. The soul then decides to move or migrate the consciousness to another reality. It can happen ONLY as long as the experiences are similar or “better”. So the reader can imagine that he / she is living within a reality where they are a taxicab driver in New York City. If the soul wanted to, or if the conditions and technologies were acceptable, the consciousness of the taxicab driver could migrate to a world-line where he is the CEO of an Ice Cream company in Hartford, CT.
Consciousness migration can change EVERYTHING within that reality.
Typically, in the “real world” (the reality that I happen to inhabit at this point in time), most contemporaneous world-line travel is limited by the technologies utilized. These technologies limit the travellers to world-lines were they share the same (approximate) physical body. If you are a white male named “Fred” in the first reality, you will move to a new reality where you are still a white male named “Fred”.
By changing certain defaults and energy settings an entire world of change can manifest during world-line travel. This is typically known as a “Level Three” migration. It’s not for the faint of heart, however. When the vector coordinates change radically, so can find yourself in a new environment with little in the way of commonality. You might leave the first reality as a “Fred” and enter the new world-line reality as a “Susan”. While your memories won’t change (they are stored in the non-physical reality) yourself within the new reality might take some getting used to.
Types of World-Line Migrations
There are numerous ways that world-line migration can manifest for us humans. I know of only five ways. Most of them are beyond the capabilities and experiences of most humans as they require specialized equipment, and training to conduct.
Typically, the most common changes are rather simple.
Level Zero Migration
The most common, and simple migrations are achievable by everyone. That means YOU, the reader. You can manifest these changes yourself. These are “Level Zero” migrations. Here the alterations are very simple and hardly noticeable. They take time to manifest. Typically six months to three years. Nevertheless, if you are careful and persistent, they will always manifest. These are changes in the reality of less than a fraction of a percentage. For instance;
Slight alterations of friends and nearby people’s behaviors
Changes in the reality that surrounds you physically.
General alterations in people, places and things.
Specific alterations in furniture, money, luck or skill
Minor changes in weather
As such, these changes help to bring about desired experiences and lessons. They are but “tweaks” that are useful in obtaining the necessary experiences that a given consciousness needs. Most consciousness’s experience these kinds of tweaks due to subconscious direction, or verbal affirmations that directs the individual power of intention. Level zero migrations are achievable by everyone and do not require any technology to accomplish.
The power of prayer is a “level zero” migration.
Most people do not know how to pray. They ask for things. That is not how to pray. You must visualize what you desire to alter. Then impress it with emotion. Perform this ritual for a set period of time, maybe ten minutes every day for two weeks or something similar, and then release it. Let it go. It will manifest… eventually. Don’t wait for it.
As such, it is very powerful. Just because it is classified as a “Level zero” migration, does not diminish it’s significance. This, of course, only pertains to self-prayer. Or, prayer that is directed to the person making the prayer. Prayer directed outwards is another issue altogether and another thing entirely. It does not work. The only types of prayer that will manifest for you is ones directed at you, by you.
Level One Migration
However, given mastery of certain (assistive) technologies, a consciousness with a given reality can migrate automatically and autonomously. This can be considered a “Level One” migration ability. This can accomplish greater experiences and learning exercises.
It does requires technology to accomplish. That means an actual machine.
There is a lot of this going on. Those that possess this ability typically waste it on “time travel” activities. Which is pretty silly when you really think about it. As such, the person so empowered can change the following attributes during reality migration;
Geographic location
Date and time
Weather
Culture
These are the most common changes during world-line travel. But that is only because the changes and influences were small. Here a person can go back in time (apparently) and return (apparently). These changes will have corresponding alterations in culture and society the greater the delta deviation from the baseline to the origination point is. Any changes will alter their reality. It will not alter your reality as you are occupying a different reality.
Now, when a person gets involved in level one migration they can (possibly under certain conditions) enter realities where other “versions” of themselves might share the reality. This can include examples of older or younger versions of yourselves. This can included examples of different versions of yourself. This type of migration can certainly get very confusing.
Level Two Migration
“Often people claim to remember past lives; I claim to remember a different, very different, present life. …I rather suspect that my experience is not unique; what perhaps is unique is the fact that I am willing to talk about it.”
-Philip K. Dick
To obtain large-scale experiences and radical changes, much greater deviations can occur. Here, a person (Consciousness) can migrate to far different realities. This would be a “Level Two” migration ability.
Like a Level One migration, technology is required. However the technology level is similar. What differs is the manipulation of the target coordinates. It is much more comprehensive and complex.
This is the most important type of world-line travel, as the benefits to consciousness is the most advantageous. However it is also the most dangerous, as the risks are quite large. Here, we can add the changes of;
Revised historical pasts (What if Hitler won World War II…)
Altered cultural and scientific advancements (What if McDonalds was a car wash…)
Changed behaviors and cultural norms (What if people rubbed their butts instead of shaking hands when they met…)
This is the kind of travel that one would experience when one would move from drinking a Starbucks coffee in a San Francisco under the presidency of Donald Trump to drinking out of a water fountain filled with Bondo (it has electrolytes!) in a “charge by the hour” ear massage room (near a McStarbucks) located in New Stalingrad under Vice-Queen Lady Gagagaga the third.
I have had a brief taste of this during my training at China Lake. It can be really really startling.
Again, since level two migration is more involved than a level one migration, that all the complexities of a level one migration is maintained and expanded upon. It can become very disorienting and very disturbing.
Level Three Migration
A level three migration changes the physical person who is involved in world-line migration. You exit a world-line as one person and you enter a new world-line as a different person. You will ALWAYS migrate as the same species. This can include, gender and appearance. This can include occupation, and age. This can include everything EXCEPT the apparent associated memories of the new world-line. You will arrive in your new location with your previous memories.
For instance, you might be a thirty year old female software programmer. As such you might be married, have a pet dog, and have some friends that you like to go out with and have a coffee. You would speak English and watch football on television. Once you migrate, you might end up as an overweight 55 year old Russian male who lives alone in the basement of his parents’ house. You might be unemployed and on welfare and taking Zoloft for depression.
Because of this, this level four migration is a very difficult thing to do and very uncomfortable. I have never been involved in this. I do not know of any person who has ever done this.
Level Four Migration
Level four migration combines a level two and a level three migration together. Why anyone in their right mind would want to do this is beyond me. The risks are significant. Remember, the ability to migrate is a function of technology, and the selection of destination coordinates is not that easy. While you might want to end up in some place in some type of new reality, the result could easily turn sour and go very, very badly.
For instance, you might be a twenty five year old male who is busy working as an engineer at Google. After work, you like to go and have pizza and beer with your friends at the local bar. You ride a nice Harley Davidson motorcycle and you are very stylish with the latest iPhone and APPs. The president is Donald Trump and the news is talking about “Russian collusion”. It is a nice sunny day.
After a level four migration, your life might look something like this;
You are now a 67 year old transgender feminist who is a vocal supporter for the new King; Justin Clinton. You are supported though your owner (as you are actually a short-term slave), who allows you one night off a month to go to the elephant races at the other end of South Berlin. There you eat your favorite food; oysters and jellied duck feet hamburgers. Then you come home to your master who usually have “some tasks” for you to do before you turn in for the night. The news is all excited about the new taxes that are coming out of Beijing this year. As normal, it is a dreary, foggy day.
Like I said, you never know what kind of life that you will end up with. Life might be a box of chocolates, but what happens when you change the box?
Memories do not Migrate
The reader might question why the memories do not migrate. The answer is simple. The purpose of our physical reality is to obtain experiences. Each experience that we have obtained helps shape our quanta and helps build and construct our soul. The realities that we inhabit are but training grounds by which we can acquire these experiences. It would defeat the purpose of obtaining an experience in the first place if this were to occur.
Also, and I will cover this in another post, memories are not retained within the brain. They are processed in the brain, but they are not retained there. Memories are retained and stored outside the physical reality. The memories are used to help us adjust and learn from the experiences that we have had during the time within our reality.
But… but…
Scientists have identified places where the memories are retained. Isn’t that correct? No it is not. They have identified places within the physical brain where memories (that lie outside of our physical reality) are accessed. They have just located the access points and the methods of accessing them. They have not identified the actual memories.
What can you do?
I hope that this was helpful. Understanding the reality of our life helps us to better control it and shape our destiny. So, to keep it simple;
There is a “Hell”, no matter what the Pope says. It is a different “universe” or “Heaven” if you want to use that nomenclature.
Our physical reality is constructed through our actions and thoughts.
Action and thoughts create and modify our physical world. To best be the master of it, we must master ourselves.
Be good. Be kind. Be helpful. Be just and be fair.
Everything you do is recorded by memory. These memories lie outside of our constructed reality.
All actions will be tallied at the end of our life. If we behaved poorly, then that will adversely affect our soul’s construction.
As such, many of us need the help of others to go about our day to day activities. We need to be helpful, supportive and positive in every way. Life can be hard, but if just one person can do one small thing, it can make all the difference in the world. Surprise others with small acts of kindness, and be the ray of light in this often dark and gloomy world. What do you do?
Conclusions
I know that most people will not care about souls and Heaven outside of their religion. So all of this can just be considered to be nonsense.
I know that officially MWI is only considered to be a theory. That’s fine. It’s treated very seriously by those in control of this world that we occupy. It is also FUNDED. There are many, many things that are well understood by those who are permitted to understand them. Like I said, you can believe me or not. I really don’t care.
I also know that world-line travel is not contemporaneously accepted as a reality. Fine. Believe what you want. The reality template what we all base our realities off of is a very interesting place. To understand it, you will need to undo all of what you think you know. This is how the universe works.
You can believe it or not. It’s no skin off my back.
Take Aways
Every person lives within his or her own reality.
Realities are constructs of the soul.
Realities are drawn from a Universal Template.
Consciousness is a bridge between the soul and experiences in the reality.
Souls consist of organized quantum strings that have obtained sentience.
With the skill of intention, a person can tweak their reality.
With the utilization of technology, one can alter their reality substantially.
RFH
How about a Request For Help? I tire of busybodies and statists who poke fun at the ideas and theories of others. They offer no constructive dialog. Rather they just make fun, ridicule, and then scurry under a rock.
I use this forum as a way to disseminate some of the things that I learned though my thirty years of involvement in MAJestic. However, I am forbidden to posit my knowledge directly. I cannot tell the interested, the “secrets of the universe”. The best that I can do is share my opinions about things that interest me, and flavor it indirectly with my forbidden understandings.
To help put this in perspective, put yourself in my shoes…
Imagine that you are working at a company with a brutal NDR. You cannot divulge anything about what you are involved in for any reason.Now, let’s suppose that for thirty years you were involved in training unicorns to dance with bigfoot. To help with your training, the Lock Ness Monster would gather “magical beans” that you would award the unicorns when they did a particularly impressive dance move; like the cha cha or a nice rendition of the samba.Now, there is no way that you can talk about unicorns, bigfoot, or the Lock Ness Monster. But, the NDR doesn’t cover “magic beans”. So in the best interests of society, you might want to posit your thoughts about growing “magic beans” and how they might be of interest to imaginary creatures.That is the situation that I find myself in.
So, if you, the reader, were so interested, I would welcome your thoughts on soul composition. I would welcome your understanding of MWI in relation to multi-dimensional soul structure. I would welcome your thoughts about the soul structures of other creatures. I would welcome links to other websites of interest, or videos of interest.
This is my call out, to you the reader, to assist all of us in solving these mysteries. After all, this is a far better use of the internet than for looking at Justin Bieber videos.
FAQ
Q: What is the difference between souls vs. consciousness?
A: Soul is the entire being of a given entity. It includes everything. It includes all physical histories, memories, and energy states of that entity. It resides within Heaven. Consciousness is a part of the soul. It is partitioned from it and resides within a physical construct within a reality. It is a mechanism from which experiences are obtained.
Q: What is the highest level of spirituality?
A: In this narrative, the highest level of spirituality is one in which the soul transcends Human Heaven. Each Heaven is constructed for a specific animal or physical construct type. Therefore, to achieve the highest level of spirituality means that the soul exits a “lower state of Heaven” and enters a “higher state of Heaven”. In other words, it exits one Heaven and enters into a different and “better” Heavenly realm. This would mean, of course, that it now occupies a Heaven associated with a different physical animal or being.
Q: What is the relationship between quantum theory and consciousness?
A: Soul is comprised of ordered quantum strings. It creates a consciousness to occupy a set physical reality in order to obtain experiences. Consciousness is the pathway for the soul within the physical reality it has created. The quantum consciousness takes on a particle reality when it occupies a body, and takes on a wave reality when it lies outside of the body.
Q: What are the levels of the soul?
A: The soul is very complex and holds many attributes that our physical science and spiritualists do not understand. In order to help us understand things, they have often divided things into levels or gradients. The truth is that there are many aspects of soul that just cannot be simplified into simple layers or levels.
Think of a soul like that of a race car. Is the speed of the race car the most important thing, or is it a combination of handling ability, maintenance, acceleration, energy efficiency or the driver’s ability?
Q: How does quantum physics reconcile itself with the soul?
A: The soul is comprised of quantum strings. They can be ordered and unordered. The ordered strings become entangled with other particles and form arrangements. Eventually these arrangements attain sentience.
Q: What are the levels of consciousness?
A: Consciousness has one level of understanding when it inhabits a physical body. At that point of time it behaves as a particle. When it leaves the body it behaves as a wave and can take on different levels of behavior. The behavior of consciousness depends on the lessons and experiences that the soul wishes to impart.
Experiences are very important. Each time a quantum particle meets up with another one, they become entangled and related in various ways. If a group of particles meets up and interacts with other particles the situation can be greatly enhanced. These relationships are the experiences that build up (or tear down) a given soul. Therefore it is critical that consciousness learn and interacts with the surrounding reality properly.
Q: What are the differences between consciousness, spirit, and soul?
A: Soul is the center of all that we are. That is the sum total of everything at every moment relative to the (apparent) vector of time. Conscious is a portion of the soul that is assigned to a reality so as to acquire experiences. Spirit is sometimes considered to be the consciousness as it enters a wave form instead of a particle form within a given physical body.
Q: Where does the Bible say that soul is a collection of ordered quantum particles?
A: It doesn’t. Where does the Bible say that the soul is not a collection of ordered quantum particles?
Q: Is world-line travel possible?
A: Yes.
MAJestic Related Posts – Training
These are posts and articles that revolve around how I was recruited for MAJestic and my training. Also discussed is the nature of secret programs. I really do not know why the organization was kept so secret. It really wasn’t because of any kind of military concern, and the technologies were way too involved for any kind of information transfer. The only conclusion that I can come to is that we were obligated to maintain secrecy at the behalf of our extraterrestrial benefactors.
MAJestic Related Posts – Our Universe
These particular posts are concerned about the universe that we are all part of. Being entangled as I was, and involved in the crazy things that I was, I was given some insight. This insight wasn’t anything super special. Rather it offered me perception along with advantage. Here, I try to impart some of that knowledge through discussion.
Enjoy.
MAJestic Related Posts – World-Line Travel
These posts are related to “reality slides”. Other more common terms are “world-line travel”, or the MWI. What people fail to grasp is that when a person has the ability to slide into a different reality (pass into a different world-line), they are able to “touch” Heaven to some extent. Here are posts that cover this topic.
John Titor Related Posts
Another person, collectively known by the identity of “John Titor” claimed to utilize world-line (MWI egress) travel to collect artifacts from the past. He is an interesting subject to discuss. Here we have multiple posts in this regard.
There are all kinds of extraterrestrial facilities in our solar system. All one needs to do is look for them with an open mind.
No, I am not referring to things that have a similarity to contemporaneous human articles. Like a lizard on the Martian surface, a statue, or a bone of an ox. Those are just fun optical illusions that some folk take quite seriously. It’s all just fun and silly nonsense. No, instead, I am referring to actual “brick and mortar” structures constructed by extraterrestrials that are viewed, photographed, and exploited by MAJestic.
This post is in regards to one of the facilities; the Oxia Palus facility on the planet Mars.
This facility is very interesting in that it is an active factory. It is a complete “stand alone” full-purpose facility with mining, habitation, water source, tunneling, and fabrication constructions. It is also occupied and the relationship between MAJestic and the occupants is a very interesting one. As such let’s just take a general look at this facility.
Now, of course, it’s not supposed to exist.
Humans are alone in this universe, don’t ya know. It is just like the narrative that extraterrestrials do not exist, and that Americans aren’t taxed enough compared to the rest of the world, and of course that great knee slapper; Hillary Clinton never had anyone murdered. (You can read about it here, here, here, here, here, and here.) Those are realities that are dismissed off-hand by the ignorant, and those paid to do so. At this point, I must comment that if you (the reader) believe any of that “official” nonsense then you really just don’t belong here. This place is all about what I know, from my point of view. As such it does not fit into the narrative designed for general public consumption.
Ok, am I clear on this? So let’s go ahead and talk about this facility…
Location
As stated previously, the facility is located on the planet Mars. It is not on the Earth. The specific physical location for the facilities(s) can be found at 3°7’17.34” North, 19°27’46.01’ West. It is in the Oxia Palus region of the northern Mars hemisphere, slightly above the Martian equator. (Thus the name.)
It consists of a number of satellite facilities, also large, but significantly smaller than the main base facility. Most of the complex is under the ground. The only visible portions are the two external domes, gas discharge ports and ejection tubes, and the North-East Sally port to the main underground habitation area.
You can see it on Google Earth (Mars option) at coordinates M11-00099. The last time that I checked using Google Earth, this area was censored.
3°7’17.34” North, 19°27’46.01’ West
The following is a screen capture of Google Earth showing the censored area. Luckily, there are other photographic references that can be used. The United States is not the only nation which has mapped Mars don’t ya know. Even India has sent spacecraft to Mars and orbited it. (Phew!)
Google censorship of the Oxia Palus facility on the surface of Mars. Google Earth censorship. (Author screen capture.)
The censorship is so bad (or obvious) that they have needed to make public statements regarding it. According to Google, things on Google Earth are censored by local governments, and that most censorship by the American government ended around 2005. Conveniently, that was right before Obama was elected president (in 2007). After all, he’s the most “transparent president”. (Bah Ha Haw!)
Today they claim that any and all censorship is driven by the needs of local governments to protect people’s privacy. Ah. There is no need to dispute that. Google is well known to censor the search items, and all of their products for all sorts of reasons, by all sorts of organizations, including the American (and other) governments. (All you need to do to accomplish this is to pay them enough money or offer them personal incentives. They are rather mercenary, don’t you know. I can’t blame them. They have gotten quite wealthy by observing the dictates of the “powers that be”. Same for Snopes, especially for Snopes, but that is another story for another time.)
That’s why Mars was censored; to protect privacy.
They now claim that in most cases the censorship is due to the quality of the images that they receive. In the case of the various Martian orbiters; Mars Odyssey, the Mars Reconnaissance Orbiter (MRO), and the Mars Global Surveyor all simultaneously presented garbled images on every one of their multiple overpasses over this particular geographic location. You know, there are many articles praising the high quality images taken of Mars, and the high-resolution photos. Yet, for some reason, they never seemed to make it to the Google headquarters. Me thinks that someone had best wake someone up at that massive Google complex and tell them to clean up their act.
Now the truth be told, you and I both know that they were instructed to censor this location. We also know that the United States government are particularly anal about how private companies are able to disclose instructions from the United States government. I am sure that the employees at Google would love not to censor, but their hands are tied on this matter. So, no hard feelings you Googlers, you.
Well, Google is of absolutely no use. That should be expected So good luck finding anything of significance from any large American software company or any United States agency. They only provide censored and sanitized images for common folk that fits a common, conventional narrative. They’ve got to keep the illusion alive don’t ya know.
Luckily, there are other photos available. Don’t use Google. It is a slick “user friendly” interface that provides absolute false and misleading information. They do not do anything without permission by the American government. All those visits between the upper management and President Obama were for a reason. Young man, you need to go elsewhere.
Other Map Resources
There are other sources that the interested reader can turn to. Here are just a few that are available;
Bing Image Search. Note that the site scans for images, and only posts images that it can find. Looking for a specific photo here is often like looking for a “needle in a haystack”.
JPL. This is the site where the photos to follow were obtained from. However, finding the proper image is rather difficult.
The reader can find the location and zoom into it. The photo below shows the general location for the Oxia Palus facility as viewed from high orbit.
General location of the Oxia Palus facility on Mars. The general location of the facility. (Image Source)
Mapped Region
The following is a map generated from a different photograph of the same region on Mars. This map was taken on the 16 March 2000 and released by JPL. It was taken by the Mars Global Surveyor.
This is the raw image feed of the Oxia Palus facility. It is uncensored, and without modification; thus “raw”. It’s pretty difficult to find unedited Martian images on the internet today. So the reader needs to be careful. Raw Photograph of the Oxia Palus base. (Image Source)
The above is a (formerly) publically available photograph of the base taken and released to the public prior to the discovery of the facility. The reader should note that at this time the facility was not dormant. It was still generating heat, operating the furnaces, ejecting hot gasses, and discharging slag.
I ask the reader if they remember when Bill Clinton was President of the United States. Do you remember? Well, the photo above was taken during his presidency.
General Layout
The Oxia Palus Facility is located in the Oxia Palus quadrangle. Its approximate location is considered to be at 20° west and 3° north in the northern hemisphere of the planet Mars. This area is along the Martian equator.
There are numerous advantages for launching from a site near the equator, and it is suspected that these advantages were considered when the initial base was constructed. There is evidence that one (of many, obviously) of the first considerations in the construction in this facility was the conservation of delta-V during operation. This is an observation that suggests that their overall space flight technology was not nearly as sophisticated as their planet side construction ability. This concern might be illusionary, however.
The exact location of the center of the triangle formed by the three major complexes is at 3°7’17.34″ N, 19°27’46.01″W. This facility is amazingly ancient. It is ancient from the point of view of human experience, as well as from the point of view of geologic time.
The Oxia Palus base is divided into three primary sections. These sections consist of a [1] Main habitation area that lies underneath a large hill, and two externally exposed domes [2] and [3]. The underground habitat is (by far) the largest part of the facility. It is well protected from any kinds of harmful radiation that might bombard the planet by the layer of protective dirt. It also extends deep downward into the soil and rocks below.
The main habitation area houses the bulk of the living quarters for the residents of the base. It also contains the life support, food, recreation (what is determined to be “recreation” resources), and living quarters. Access to interplanetary vehicular transport is through the sally port closest to the domes. The upper exposed domes house the industrial facility as well as the power support structure.
Of the exposed domes, the one that houses the power plant and supply facilities is the oldest dome. It also houses the remains of a now obsolete or nonfunctional manufacturing facility and ejection chamber with the associate systems. The former now lies in disused ruin outside the dome. It cannot be repaired or reused, as there is a section that is completely damaged.
Next to this dome is a newer “secondary” dome. Inside of it is an expanded manufacturing facility that was constructed during a later phase of occupation. The two domes are connected underground seamlessly such that it appears that this is one large self-contained facility structure, and not the two domes as the outside view would suggest.
Narrated view of the Oxia Palus facility showing ejection ports, domes, sally port and associated middens. View of the main complex and the two external domes.
This is an overhead view of the Oxia Palus base. This photo was taken by the Mars Global Surveyor on 16 March 2000. You can get the full sized image at Malin Space Imaging Systems. (You’d best hurry before they take it down. People like YOU shouldn’t have access to this kinds of information, don’t you know.) This image is courtesy of JPL.
The primary dome resides under the small hill to the left of the picture. The two industrial and power domes are to the right side of the picture. The ejection nozzles from the facility can be clearly seen. The photo is from NASA and I am sure that the rank and file employees did not know that was going on at the time. The photo was taken at one of the moments when there was material ejecting from the dome. Thus the bright white plume of gasses during ejection.
During ejection, the gases also carry away some debris and small particles. This is borne aloft by the local weather and tends to travel away from the ejection port. Typically, there is a Northwest trajectory for the gas plume during discharge.
The ejection nozzle(s) consist of a large tube that leads from the dome, crosses through the hill(s) in an excavated trough and then is on stilts like a railroad bridge above the Martian surface. Each time the hot gasses are discharged, there is a degree of wear and tear on the pipe. This eventually will damage the tube so that repairs are periodically required. It is not a safe activity, and repairs in the Martian atmosphere, high above the ground is not something that is taken lightly.
Geology
The Oxia Palus base is located near an ancient Martian lakebed. Surrounding the area is a fluvio-lacustrine environment indicative of standing water in the remote past. There was no indication that the flow of water occurred after the facility was created. There was no apparent external evidence of water-type erosion on any of the facility structures at all. However, evidence of airborne particulate erosion and damage was prevalent throughout the facility.
There was extensive evidence for the remains of ancient lakes, springs, and valleys that formed deltas where water once flowed a long, long time ago. The local area was composed of both various compositions of clays and rocks.
Most of the rocks, we believe were carried off from distant areas during a wet period in the distant Martian past. The rocks vary from slightly rounded pebbles (formed from abrasive water action) to imbricated rock clusters. In this region, the rocks are mostly exposed with patches of hard crusty and compacted soils rich in minerals.
Generally, most rocks had sharp edges and were split in patterns indicative of the types of rocks found. Apparently, the flow of water in the remote past was not of a long enough duration to create extensive water erosion on the rocks. There weren’t beds of rounded pebbles like one would see around Earth Side Rivers. Instead are found splintered and jagged rocks with slightly rounded edges.
Generally, the rocks are eroded by either water or air, and have an overall grey appearance. But that is not obvious to the casual observer. They are typically covered with a fine reddish dust that permeates everything in the region. The rocks are typically layered with water erosion creating an exposed surface. Most of the rocks near the facility were andesite’s however, ore bearing stone was found in ample quantities near the primary ore processing facility.
Water Under the Surface
The layering of rocks showed the encapsulation of ice within alternating layers of rock that are typically three meters thick (from nine to ten feet thick). In some areas, especially where there was evidence of clays and prior water flows, the layer thickness approaches 20 meters thick (that is around 90 feet). Within the clays and gravels are encapsulated pockets of ancient water / ice containing a high concentration of salts and minerals.
There is also evidence of previous hot springs in the area as is indicated by the presence of Opaline silica bearing ores and gravels. It is strong evidence for this that one of the apparent sites of liquid water to the site originated from an underground aquifer or possible hot springs site at one time. It remains to this day a curious avenue of investigation, as are some of the mine tunnels most certainly mine(d) the ice found there.
Occupants
The current occupants are NOT the ones who have first constructed the facility. The species that made the facility abandoned it a long time ago. When they abandoned it, and who they were has never been ascertained.
It is currently occupied by humanoids with a “similarity” to contemporaneous earth-humans. These individuals are there for the duration. They can never return back to their point of origination as they are now. They have been changed.
The occupants do not really understand the technologies at the facility and are learning as best they can. The facility is old and the equipment does tend to fail and malfunction. There are very few spare parts available to the staff there.
It is an ordered, semi-military / scientific / industrial environment there, but the staff does not wear military uniforms. Instead, the occupants wear uniforms of a bluish color. The occupants have two sexes, with males being the dominant gender. Leadership is hierarchical through merit, and is all male. The few females that are present are involved in scientific and medical roles. Everyone there has multiple roles and multiple duties. The work hours are long. There are few days (off) for rest or relaxation. It is something that is not allowed or permitted for the current occupants.
While this facility is uniform of one species type, they do interact with other extraterrestrial species from time to time.
In general, the occupants are not a happy lot. This is not the biological environment that their physical bodies require. There is little in the way of entertainment. They spend much of their time during the occupation of this post engaged in work that was promoted to them as for the “betterment of their species”. There are no efforts to breed or grow families. This posting is a functional one and not a colony.
Access
Access to the facility is via a portal. There are numerous portals. The primary personnel portal is located underground in the main habitat. There is also a utility portal located in the older dome, off to the side near the power generation area. It is a larger portal and is used as needed. The portals are not doors in the conventional sense, they are points of access where things can enter and leave from one geographical place to another.
Whenever there is interplanetary transport involved, the transports land next to the sally port and are accessed externally from that point. There are no other points for external access.
The vast bulk of visitors and supplies transit through the ports. Vehicular landings are rare. As are efforts related to egress from the facility, and external maintenance tasks.
Dome Wall
The two domes are constructed of an interesting material. It is the same for material for both dome walls. The material is not transparent, but is actually opaque. The thickness of the material apparently varies over the total surface of the wall, with the thicker sections being closest to the (lower) local Martian topography. They are thicker at the base than at the apex. The thickness is also neither uniform nor regular in any way. This is a confusing attribute and suggests an organic construction methodology. The thickness varies from just over three cm (an inch thick) at the apex to over 0.6 meters (two feet) thick at the base.
Typical cross section of the dome wall(s) at the Oxia Palus facility.
The most outwardly visible aspect of this base, as well the reason how it was discovered in the first place, are the two external domes. These domes are large structures, which from the outside appear to be smooth, featureless surfaces.
However, the appearance is deceptive. It is not actually true. The outer skin of the domes shows signs of wind borne weathering. This was especially noticeable when one stands outside the domes and can physically observed the surface close up. A person can feel the roughness even through their gloved hand.
The shapes of the domes are not spherical. Instead they are elliptical. This is not only in regard to the overall top projection, but also in terms of the cross sectional views. This too, lends one to conclude that the manufacturing and construction methods used were more of an applied organic technique of some significance and utility.
The domes did not interface with the surrounding Martian bedrock as one would assume. On the earth we use a poured concrete foundation solidly located upon a prepared flat bed, but apparently this was not the case at all. Here, they actually used some kind of technique that would cause a merging or transmutation of the dome material with that of the surrounding bedrock. It is unknown how this was accomplished.
Dome Material
The dome material is apparently a closed-cell ceramic-appearing composite material. Yet its composition was neither entirely a metal, nor a ceramic. It was something altogether different. The material is currently opaque, but possibly was translucent at one time. Apparently the weathering of the outside domes affected this property. Both domes have weathered differently over time.
Structurally it is a polyaromatic amide. That is, it contains aromatic and amide groups. One could say that for the most part, the individual polymer strands of the wall material were held together by hydrogen bonds that form between the polar amide groups on adjacent chains. The aromatic components of the polymers in the material had a radial (spoke-like) orientation, which gave a high degree of symmetry and regularity to the internal structure of the fibers.
What was the most unique characteristic of the material was that silica tetrahedron. This tetrahedron is composed of a single silicon atom surrounded by four equidistant oxygen atoms, all seemed to be embedded within “pockets” that were structurally oriented around the polyaromatic amides. That was confusing. Generally, the silica structure is the basic structure for many ceramics, as well as glass. It has an internal arrangement consisting of pyramid (tetrahedral or four-sided) units. Four large oxygen (0) atoms surround each smaller silicon (Si) atom.
When silica tetrahedrons share three corner atoms, they produce layered silicates (talc, kaolinite clay, mica). When silica tetrahedrons share four comer atoms, they produce framework silicates (quartz, tridymite). But, by being embedded within malleable “pockets’ the material was able to link the individual polymer strands of the wall material on adjacent chains. Thus a situation of enormous strength was achieved, while at the same time the ease of manufacture of clay-like products was facilitated.
At least that is the theory. No one has ever tried to duplicate this engineering feat. At least, I am not aware of it. But, then, what do I know? No body ever tells me anything.
If samples were to be taken at various points in the dome wall structure, one would notice Frenkel-defect’s in the lattice arrangements of the crystals near the upper most portion of the dome. This is a characteristic of both domes, with the primary dome (the oldest) having the most defects.
Obviously the material consisted of degraded aramid fibers, fragile ionic bonding, and strange material forms that made no sense altogether. We should not bother with this kind of dedregration, and simply label it fossilized junk and leave it at that.
Ah, but all this is speculative. Don’t ya know…
Purpose
The initial intended purpose of this facility was to process ores into raw material. It is primarily a smelting facility. It has since been repurposed for scientific study, and some other specialized activities.
There are actually two factories at the location. There is [1] an original factory, and [2] a newer replacement factory.
Each facility lies under a dome that is constructed at the side of the hills at that location. Each facility has a gas ejection port that is elevated above the ground and leads away from the facility proper. When gas is ejected, it is discharged away from the facility and shielded by the low hills.
Slag and other residue are carted out of the facility through a port that lies under the old (initial) dome. The newer facility utilizes the port in the older facility. It is a “shared” port for slag egress. The ore is carted down a pathway and discharged into numerous piles or middens.
All contemporaneous operations are conducted out of the newer facility. The older facility was scrapped and the parts that could be reused were incorporated into the replacement facility. All what remains now are the foundations under the dome, and the long gas discharge tube.
Both facilities were created by the original builders of the facility. The entire facility was abandoned at some time in the past, and is now repurposed under new “management” with a different species.
Mines
Currently, the open space under the original dome holds storage and processing equipment. It is also, where the mines open up and access the processing facility. Under the facility is a warren of mines that plunge down deep into the Marian rock. These mines have numerous levels, and they branch outward from the facility. All of the tunnels connect to the original dome and use the main elevator system located there.
The elevator system is dissimilar from what one would find on Earth under human construction. It utilizes a completely different system of transport. However, stars and ramps are often quite similar to their human counterparts. The only difference is the step height, width, and breadth is quite uncomfortable for human use.
When ore is mined, it is carted to the original facility dome, stored until needed, and then delivered to the new replacement facility dome next door. Once processed, the slag is discarded through the port under the original dome into piles of middens. The processed material is stacked and organized under the original dome.
Process
The smelting operation is functionally not that much different from what is conducted traditionally on earth. Ore is mined and collected. The ore is then undergoes redox to free the desired minerals from the ores. In the Oxia Palus facility, the process involves heat and pressure. It generates gas, and that hot gas needs to be discharged carefully away from the facility.
During the process, there is a tremendous amount of heat that is generated. Not only inside the equipment involved in the smelting process, but also inside the protective dome, that surrounds the facility. During the operation, this heat builds up, and causes a kind of condensation on both the inside and the outside walls of the dome, and wispy vapors in the thin Martian atmosphere. Inside the workers need to be very careful. While the dome itself is amazingly robust, periodic checks must occur to guarantee that the stability of the facility is maintained. The temperature and pressure cycling of the dome is typically very uncomfortable for the workers there.
Temperature swings of 40 to 50 degrees Celsius is not unheard of. So if the ambient temperature of the interior (new) dome is say 20 degrees Celsius (around 68F), the temperature can become a very uncomfortable 70 degrees Celsius (around 150F) when the facility is in operation.
The equipment primarily consists of a huge chamber that combines the ore, heat and pressure together. There is equipment to add various other materials to the molten mix after the smelting operation. This equipment can add materials in solid, liquid and gaseous states. Materials to add are provided in ingots if solid, and within elliptical containers if in a gaseous or liquid state.
The equipment has problems and often breaks down.
Part of the reason for this is age. Part of the reason is due to the inexperience of the present staff.
Age
This facility is ancient. It was constructed a very, very long time ago.
No one has been successful in dating the facility. As the aging process on earth is different than on Mars simply because the atmosphere is quite different. No serious investigator has considered a recent date for this facility. It is old, but not just “human old” it is “geologic old”. The age of this facility defies the human experience.
Further, the illusion of the passage of time as perceived by humans varies from planet to planet. The gravitational effect of the planet and the orbit contributes to the perception of time. When you change the geographical location, you will also change your perceptions. Time is not what we think it is. Nor is reality.
With that in mind, it is impossible to place a comparative age on the facilities present at the Oxia Palus facility. It is truly like comparing apples with bananas.
What we can do, however, is speculate on the age of the earth at the time of when the Oxia Palus facility was constructed. This is easier, though the illusion is temporary. Time passes differently on Mars for biological creatures, especially transplanted ones. Please understand that everything is relative from the point of view of the observer.
There are those who suggest that the age is relatively recent, while others posit a much older date. From what little we know, and what we can conjecture, it is all just a “crap shoot”. There is nothing at the facility that would be able to give us any idea of when it was constructed relative to what was going on around the earth at that slice of time.
For my own reasons, I have my own opinions that place the first construction of this facility many millions of years in the past. However, those are just my thoughts based on things that I cannot disclose at this time. As far as the reader is concerned, it is simply a very ancient facility.
So what?
I think that it should be enough to know that there are other intelligence’s “out there”. One of the problems with secrecy is that no one knows where to put limits on it. Sure we do not need to “let the cat out of the bag” regards to specific technologies and things that can provide us strategic advantage, but some basic rudimentary truths should not be harmful to anyone.
We don’t need to waste time trying to figure out “are we alone in the universe?” We aren’t. In fact, the galaxy is a very ordered place. This is especially true in our local area (A spherical bubble with a radius of around 25 LY.). It is like a well-tended and well-manicured garden. It’s not some kind of wild expanse where we can grab habitable planets as soon as we are able to travel to them. We just cannot do that. We need to ask for and obtain permissions.
Listen up, people.
Our galaxy is really much like a baseball game in a jam-packed stadium. The game has been going on all afternoon. The crowd is all involved in the game. There are people selling hotdogs, soda and beer. Nearby are some fans chatting about the game. Some people are comparing player stats. While other people are just chatting with each other talking about the game, the weather, and other trivial matters.
Meanwhile, we humans are like a baby sitting in a child-carrier on one of the stadium seats, totally fixed on the pacifier that is in our chubby little hand.
Conclusions
This facility was not intended to be anything other than a smelting operation. It was discovered, and occupied by interested local parties once proper permissions were obtained. (Permission needed to be obtained, and assistance was needed to transport staffing to the facility.) The staffing involves trained individuals who were recruited after their secondary education. The site was repurposed for scientific study.
Americans are not to be told of the existence of this facility.
Take Aways
There is an extraterrestrial facility located at Oxia Palus on the planet Mars.
This facility is a smelting operation.
The facility is ancient.
It is currently repurposed as a center for study of the technologies of those whom built the facility.
The American government believes that it is important to keep the knowledge of this facility secret.
RFH
How about a Request For Help? I tire of busybodies and statists who poke fun at the ideas and theories of others. They offer no constructive dialog. Rather they just make fun, ridicule, and then scurry under a rock.
I use this forum as a way to disseminate some of the things that I learned though my thirty years of involvement in MAJestic. However, I am forbidden to posit my knowledge directly. I cannot tell the interested, the “secrets of the universe”. The best that I can do is share my opinions about things that interest me, and flavor it indirectly with my forbidden understandings.
To help put this in perspective, put yourself in my shoes…
Imagine that you are working at a company with a brutal NDR. You cannot divulge anything about what you are involved in for any reason.Now, let’s suppose that for thirty years you were involved in training unicorns to dance with bigfoot. To help with your training, the Lock Ness Monster would gather “magical beans” that you would award the unicorns when they did a particularly impressive dance move; like the cha cha or a nice rendition of the samba.Now, there is no way that you can talk about unicorns, bigfoot, or the Lock Ness Monster. But, the NDR doesn’t cover “magic beans”. So in the best interests of society, you might want to posit your thoughts about growing “magic beans” and how they might be of interest to imaginary creatures.That is the situation that I find myself in.
So, if you, the reader, were so interested, I would welcome your thoughts on this matter. I would welcome your theories as to why Google censors Mars. I would welcome your ideas on what an ore processing facility is doing in Oxia Palus. I would welcome your ideas as to the location of the deposits of ice under the surface. I would welcome your thoughts on the possible repurposing of this facility.
This is my callout, to you the reader, to assist all of us in solving these mysteries. After all, this is a far better use of the internet than for looking at Justin Bieber videos.
FAQ
Q: Do extraterrestrials exist?
A: Yuppur, but don’t tell an American that. They are not to know anything. How do I know? All American government agencies make a point to censor all information. They do not do this on their own. They do it under direction.
Q: Will man ever walk on Mars?
A: The question is framed poorly. Perhaps it should be “Has man ever walked on Mars?”.
Q: What is a smelting operation?
A: To smelt is to take a rock, and apply temperature and pressure until a metal drips out. The metal is then collected and the waste is thrown away as “slag”. The process says pretty much the same from whence early man started to smelt tin and copper. There has been advances in technology, most certainly, but the process is still pretty much unchanged.
Q: What is done with the material that is collected at the facility?
A: It is formed into set predefined shapes and shipped elsewhere where it is used for various construction projects.
MAJestic Related Posts – Training
These are posts and articles that revolve around how I was recruited for MAJestic and my training. Also discussed is the nature of secret programs. I really do not know why the organization was kept so secret. It really wasn’t because of any kind of military concern, and the technologies were way too involved for any kind of information transfer. The only conclusion that I can come to is that we were obligated to maintain secrecy at the behalf of our extraterrestrial benefactors.
MAJestic Related Posts – Our Universe
These particular posts are concerned about the universe that we are all part of. Being entangled as I was, and involved in the crazy things that I was, I was given some insight. This insight wasn’t anything super special. Rather it offered me perception along with advantage. Here, I try to impart some of that knowledge through discussion.
Enjoy.
MAJestic Related Posts – World-Line Travel
These posts are related to “reality slides”. Other more common terms are “world-line travel”, or the MWI. What people fail to grasp is that when a person has the ability to slide into a different reality (pass into a different world-line), they are able to “touch” Heaven to some extent. Here are posts that cover this topic.
John Titor Related Posts
Another person, collectively known by the identity of “John Titor” claimed to utilize world-line (MWI egress) travel to collect artifacts from the past. He is an interesting subject to discuss. Here we have multiple posts in this regard.
The mystery of the Lapulapu Ridge is a very interesting subject. Indeed, our world is filled with all kinds of interesting things going on. Some can even possibly be considered an extraterrestrial riddle. Even if it is wholly terrestrial in nature. All we need to do is take a good look at what surrounds us. Because, if we look at things with open eyes, and with an open mind, we will see new things, and come to new understandings on our world, and what is just going on within it.
With the advent of new technology, we are able to peer into regions and places that used to be denied us. Today, using such technologies as Google Earth, we are able to peer into the shroud and explore all kinds of things that we didn’t even know existed. Some of it is amazing. Some of it is frightening. Some of what we see can be curious, while others can tell us just a little bit more about ourselves. All we need do is listen to what we find.
Today I would like to discuss a very odd thing that is going on at the Lapulapu Ridge.
For those of you who don’t know, the Lapulapu Ridge is an undersea formation that lies outside of Saipan. Saipan is a small group of islands in the Pacific Ocean. It is terribly isolated and remote. It’s also part of the United States. (I’ll bet that you all didn’t know that.) The point of interest here is not the abundance of coconuts on the Saipan island, or the history of the island during World War II. What is so interesting about this place is that someone, or something, has been busily mining that area for some time. Most certainly for years, probably for decades, and maybe even for a century or longer! What is so odd about this is that it is impossible to do so. At least, using known conventional technologies, that we humans possess.
Let’s have a look at this curious situation…
Introduction
"We still haven't explored the deep oceans or the inner crusts of Earth."
-Dr. Wolfstatement in regards to the extraterrestrial presence on the earth and their activities.
Let’s take a moment to look at what is going on in our planet. We humans like to believe that we are the “owners” of the planet, and that we are in full control and knowledge of “our” planet. We like to believe that we are at the top of the food chain. We like to believe that we are in full control of technology and have the power and dominion over this planet.
That is wrong. We have no power, we know very little, and we know “jack shit” about the history of this planet. In fact, we actually know very little of the planets past and whom actually “owns” the planet that we reside upon. Yet the evidence of the real “owners” of the planet are everywhere, we need just search for the evidence and study it with an open mind.
I would like to take a look at some such “object” or area of evidence. It can be considered a terrestrial or even an extraterrestrial mystery. I would like to look at the Lapulapu Ridge Mining efforts near and around Saipan. I refer to it as a “mining” effort only because the tracks suggest displacement of soil. The only reason for the displacement of soil that I am aware of is part of either mining or construction efforts. (Constructions that are suggestive of long linear lines are more akin to roads then they are for buildings.)
Therefore, let’s look at what is hidden deep under the ocean under the waves. Let’s look at evidence of large-scale (possibly) robotic automated mining operations under the surface of “our” oceans.
The Lapulapu Ridge Formations
The following are filtered images from Google Earth.
The filters remove the reflective waveform obfuscation layer characteristics of the oceans from the Google images. I want to give Google the benefit of doubt and attribute the reflective quality of the ocean surface to be a truly natural obfuscation.
However, once the images are filtered to remove this sort of waveform obfuscation layer a series of patterns emerge. This is truly puzzling, as one would expect to see resolved undersea details. You would expect natural features to parallel that of the native landmasses. Such things as mountains, rivers and other natural geologic structures would be expected to be shown, or more accurately, their undersea equivalents. But instead, one can clearly see enormous scaled undersea (apparent) surface mining evidence. Once removed, one can clearly see the presence of unusual tracks and movement.
There is absolutely no way that this can be considered to be natural geologic evidence at all.
The Mystery of the Lapulapu Ridge is one of a city-sized mining operation under the ocean. A 388 mile long underwater site showing extensive geologic mining activity by large (huge) vehicles on the Lapulapu ridge near the Saipan islands.
Undersea mining operations NE of Saipan. (Image Source.)
These features shown are near the Saipan islands. Of which the specific coordinates are 16°27’31.55”N 147°14’19.51”E. I provide just a mere handful of images to illustrate my point here. The reader is encouraged to pursue their own investigative activity to whatever conclusion it leads to.
These are NOT natural geologic formations. Nature does not follow straight lines unless they go through fissures or regions of internal stress. Nor do they make 90° bends, and 180° bends. Nor do they repeatedly follow parallel paths of operation. There is absolutely no way that these features are natural.
Non-Natural Features
I was never briefed on these features, nor was I introduced to them through any kind of program or manual. These constructions were discovered as a natural bout of investigative journalism. Indeed, it is characteristic of obtaining supportive documentation for my own contentions. All that one needs to do is look around themselves to the world about us. In so doing, one can see the hidden secrets that lie submerged and hidden.
I do not who or what formed these features.
They might, remotely, be naturally made. They could be constructed by some surreptitious government project of great secrecy and complexity. They could be all that remains of some great underwater public works project. I don’t know at all. But to me, these structures are clearly intelligent driven. They seem to suggest large-scale underwater mining efforts. That is the basis of my discussion here. That these apparent features are but part of large-scale construction made by a race with the capability to do so.
These features are not limited to the Saipan region, but exist in other undersea locations. For instance, they can be found at 47°47’46.16”S 107°15’00.93”E as well. Of course, the form and shape is different. But whom would expect large scale mining west of southern Tasmania?
If human, then we really need to take a good hard look at what our fabrication abilities are. Because if we can mine or perform these kinds of undersea activities, then we can most certainly create a facility on another planet. If these formations are not human, then we need to reconsider who is making them and why. Remember, boys and girls, extraterrestrial activity, of huge extent, can be found throughout our solar system. We only need look below the surface and take a hard look at what is presented to us.
Statists say these features are just normal
After the initial discovery by a poorly named group known as “SecureTeam10”, the scientific statists came out with their pronouncements and statements.
“Large parallel lines = tectonic fissures, naturally occurring sorry. The curvy line is likely the pathway of a underwater current and deposition field of said current.”- YouTube Mikitan Fox
Now of course, the Scientific Statists have to crawl out from under a rock and “explain” to us that all of this is of no concern. They hurriedly hopped up upon their great white horses and began to beat the drums loudly. They shout, “This is just an ordinary fault line. Anything else is incorrect. Everything else is nonsense.”
My definition of scientific statism;
A concentration of a set scientific theory in the hands of a closed elite group of people. Often they have direct ties to a highly centralized government. To alter or change that theory to revise it to meet new discoveries or data often requires government derived politics and peer-group approvals.
Tectonic Fissures
Well, it’s just like those pesky statists to make a pronouncement and run away to hide in their mother’s basement.
The fracture mechanics model of the tectonic fissures do not permit the kinds of fractures and behaviors that are clearly observed in this instance. I suggest anyone interested in the formation of faults and their behaviors read “Formation and Development of Fissures at the East Pacific Rise: Implications for Faulting and Magmatism at Mid-Ocean Ridges“. It can be read on line at Department of Geosciences, Oregon State University, Corvallis, OR 97331 USA.
By understanding the fracture mechanics involved in geothermal processes (especially those in the Pacific rim) one can clearly see that these “tracks” are absolutely not tectonic fissures. Tectonic fissures? What a laugh! Compare these images with the fault lines found in California here.
From the paper;
"The Griffith theory assumes that crack initiation occurs from the points of highest tensile stress on the surfaces of these microscopic flaws or "Griffith's cracks" in brittle material (in a biaxial stress field), and this has since been elucidated by the theoretical and laboratory studies of Bieniawski [1967] and Huang et al. [1993]. Joints, lava flow contacts, and tension cracks may be regarded as the macroscopic analogy to "Griffith's cracks" [Gudmundsson and Bäckström, 1991]."
Our understanding of crack formulation in brittle and ductile materials is quite mature. In fact it is one of the most common mechanical and civil engineering undergraduate courses that engineering students take. Oh, I surely remember the days during my classes in the”Mechanics of Deformable Bodies” class. LOL. In the case of the formation of cracks in the Pacific rim, it is obvious that the formation is absolutely straight forward for compressive fissure formulation.
Now, stress lines and their associated fractures for geologic features in the Pacific Rim are influenced by the elastic moduli, tensile stress and tensile strength of the host rock. As such, we know that hosted stresses, are in turn, a function of the grain structure of the materials.
Lattice structures on steel showing the relationship of the various phases of state as a function of impurity composition / percentage for alloyed iron.
I well remember the days as a young engineering student. We studied the material properties of various materials and how the grain and lattice structures influenced the lines of stress inherent in them. One day we went to the lab and we observed the clean and cut fractures of sample steels.
The professor took numerous samples of SAE 1045 and SAE 1018 and placed them in a machine that pulled them apart. The deformation of the parts were at a nice clean 45 degree angle. This was quite along the lines of the crystal grain structure of the materials themselves. No matter what material, and no matter how fast or how slow, the fracture was always identical. It ALWAYS followed the lines of stress inherent inside the material.
We can see this everywhere. We can see this on the earth, and we can see this on other planets such as the moons of Jupiter. Here is a NASA slide showing the tectonic stress lines on Europia.
Tectonic activity on Europia, one of the moons of Jupiter. Notice how the lines match the lattice formation of the grains of the material that is under stress.
Fractures form along the principle lines of stress inherent in the material grain composition of the materials that make up the undersea mountain ranges of the Pacific Rim. This, in turn, is a function of the grain structure of the surrounding rocks. Thus the reason for straight lines,and precise angles of exact (and repeatable) angular measurement.
When a material undergoes stress, especially tensile stress, the fracture is along a line of least resistance; or stress line. This line follows the grain pattern of the material. This is also known as the direction of slip, or slip direction. Prior to fracture, there is a period when the base rock goes through a period of plastic behavior. During this time the twinning direction also follows the slip direction as a function of crystal structure.
However, while many of the track lines observed in and around the undersea formation known as the Lapulapu ridge are straight, they do NOT follow material stress lines. Just having straight lines, and angular fractures alone does not qualify an observation to be that of a tectonic stress line. As NOWHERE in the world do tectonic lines of stress manifest as 90 degree bends, followed by another 90 degree bend. No do they manifest as pure radii that rounds a straight 90 degree bend at tangential points. These are clear VIOLATIONS of the laws of deformable bodies.
Tectonic plates follow the lines of stress. They do not make nice round circular features that follow an inner radius to correct to a 90 degree bend. That is something a tractor trailer rig does, not what a stress line does. Note also the displacement of material during the bend; it overlaps previous material. In fact, through a study of the overlap we can easily see that the object make a turn left to displace previous material as opposed to a turn right.
Ha, that pretty much rules out the kinds of behaviors observed in these tracks now doesn’t it?
About the Environment
These features and the corresponding events are taking place at a mind-boggling depth. At that depth the water is pitch black and the pressure is devastating. At the depth of 11,300 feet the water pressure would be a crushing 5000 psi.
To put this into perspective, most unclassified information place “safe” submarine depths at under 800 feet. We do know that submarines can dive deeper. However there is a difference between maximum dive depth and crush depth. World War II German U-boats generally had collapse depths in the range of 200 to 280 meters (660 to 920 feet). While modern nuclear attack submarines like the American Seawolf class are estimated to have a test depth of 490 m (1,600 ft.), which would imply a collapse depth of 730 m (2,400 ft.).
The depth of these tracks are at twice that depth.
It is as if it was on the surface of another planet. For instance, the crushing atmosphere of Venus is at 93 bar or around 1350 psi. Good golly, this is four times that!
German U-Boat washed ashore and amusing those enjoying the beach.
Anyone or anything that can manufacture such a structure and place it where it is, can do so in just about any rocky planet in our solar system. (Of course, gas giants are another animal all together, so let’s not consider them.) The technology to make such a device is far advanced, and beyond anything that we humans can construct.
Track Behaviors
One of the first things that you can note from these images is the paths or trails that are constructed. The tracks go up entire sides of undersea mountains.. When the mountain is steep, the device that creates these tracks continues to try to go upwards, even if the vehicle slides down the hill sideways. It tries to jockey up the side.
The trails indicate complete U-turns that make a 180-degree turn, and then follows alongside the initial path or track.
The trails indicate intelligent decision. Ninety-degree turns are made, seemingly at random points. Obviously there was some sort of decision tree and direction that was provided to the engine that creates these tracks.
Mining evidence of the mining of the Lapulapu undersea ridge near the Saipan islands. Here one can clearly see the movement of the object creating these tracks had trouble going up and down steep underwater cliff faces. The device or vehicle that made the tracks had to jocky back and forth .
Southern end of the Saipan evidence site.(Image Source.)
Track Characteristics
The tracks are all the same. Aside from areas where they seem to go through mountains, the tracks are a uniform width. They create a line of debris that runs perpendicular to the track direction, and that line of debris is uniform with other lines with it. In the center of the track are a set of “inner tracks” that follow the main track line.
Goes Through Mountains
Apparently it, whatever it is, has the ability to go through mountains. This is very interesting.
Does it actually go through the mountain, or does it dematerialize before it, and rematerialize after it? It seems that it actually went through the mountain and the tunnel has since collapsed leaving a shallows and separation of one island into two.
Note that the tracks are also different. The tracks start to narrow down like an arrow. This is suggestive of a process that is unknown to us.
A study of the tracks and the paths lead some interesting findings. For instance the tracks as they relate to the Saipan and Tinian islands is very interesting. It suggests that perhaps the engine went under the island, created a kind of tunnel, that eventually collapsed. Thus forming a shallow area and two separate islands instead of one large island.
Going through mountains and islands. (Image Source.)
Intelligent Control
It is obvious that there is some degree of intelligent control over the vehicle or thing that creates these tracks. It makes 45-degree turns, 90-degree turns, and 180 degree U-turns. It is as if it is searching for something.
Closeup of the southern evidence of tacks on the Lapulapu ridge near the Saipan island chain. The tracks make 45 degree turns, 180 degree turns and 120 degree turns. These are not natural processes.
Intelligent Control over the undersea vehicle. (Image Source.)
Tracks show clear evidence of turns and reversals, as well as search efforts that comprise 90 degree bends and turns.
The device operates over enormous regions. Here is the overall general appearance of the most visible tracks around Saipan.
The tracks involved in the mining of the Lapulapu ridge show a pattern of obvious mining efforts. In fact, they almost look a map of the type of tunnels that one would make in an underground mining operation.
Obvious mining of the Lapulapu Ridge around Saipan.
Whomever or whatever is mining this area, they most certainly are focusing on the Lapulapu Ridge. The tracks clearly indicate an interest on the top of the ridge. While there are forays off the ridge, the tracks indicate an abrupt series of ninety-degree bends to return back to the ridge. I wonder what is so valuable on the ridge that requires such extensive mining at such a deep depth.
A study of the angular relationships of the tracks and the associated features of the tracks.
The angles associated with the large undersea tracks along the Lapulapu Ridge near the Saipan islands. They are certainly curious Large-scale formations. With accurate and exact 90 degree bends. The spent debris mounds are formed at a curious angle. The angles are similar but differ. The image above indicates a 76-degree and a 79-degree debris mound.
Evidence of Mining in a Grid-Like Formation
There is evidence that seems to point to the idea that the device operates following a grid or similar map.
Undersea mining operation near the Saipan islands showing rectangular exploratory behaviors.
Rectangular features forming perfect squares. (Image Source.)
As the mining vehicle moved away from the Lapulapu ridge, it discovered fewer minerals of interest and thus was forced to make a 360 degree turn and followed a parallel path back toward the ridge.
Large scale, large distance, grid-like mining.(Image Source.)
Possible vehicle
It’s pretty difficult to track down a vehicle actually making these tracks. However, if you are careful you can find one. I like to call it the roving orb under the ocean.
A large object has been observed crawling along the undersea surface at a depth of over 3000 feet off the California coast. Unlike the “official” explanation for the Lapulapu Ridge Mining operations, this movement is more “organic” and seemingly random. The object, which observers say looks man-made rather than natural, is estimated to measure more than 2.86 miles in diameter. It is a dome shaped structure (as it must be to sustain the enormous pressures on the ocean floor). It moves along the floor and displaces dirt and debris as it moves.
The object was brought to the attention of (UFO, strange event, and alien) investigators known as “SecureTeam10”. Tyler, who helps run the internet investigations site, said:
“There are certain areas of the ocean that are obviously blurred out. But what better place would there be for another race or another group of beings to hide than in the deep of our own oceans? … While we are up staring at the sky all day and worrying about what’s up there we have 90 per cent of our oceans unchartered.”-Tyler at SecureTeam10
Other comments include;
“We see a large circular object and an obvious path or trail created by it – and it disappears into a blurred out area – how convenient.”
Large undersea object that is ambulatory that seems to be associated with the undersea tracks.
Diagram of the mysterious roving orb that tracks the mysterious mining tracks at enormous depths in the ocean.
It is pretty big. At 4.61 Km.
To put this into perspective, imagine that an American football field is 100 yards long (roughly 100 meters). You could fit 46 football fields end to end inside this object. It is huge. In fact, it is the size of a small city. It is around 66.5 square kilometers in surface area. It is one half the size of Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania. (151.1 square kilometers.)
What we can learn from this orb is rather simple. It is associated with the linear tracks, but does not follow the tracks. It makes its own tracks, which seemingly appear to be of random movements. It is also smaller than the width of the linear tracks.
The mystery orb creates it’s own tracks which differ from the more linear and wide tracks found alongside it. This movement is odd and apparently directionless.
There is no question that it is moving about and leaving tracks.(Image Source.)
Abandoned Orb at the base of Lapulapu Ridge
An abandoned orb at the base of an undersea mountain near the Lapulapu ridge.
Another orb “parked” on one of the Lapulapu mining lines? This one looks like it is collapsed somehow. (Image Source.)
Close up of an abandoned orb that seems to be parked next to an undersea mountain. It looks like it has been there for a while. Notice that the top of the orb is open and suggests an interior with some type of complex layout. It is too bad that it is so deep, it would be really interesting to go and visit. I wonder what stories it could tell us.
The abandoned orb. The top appears to be open and there is something inside.
Uh oh. The Orb frustratingly disappears into an obscured area.
There are features under the ocean that defy known geologic processes. They are suggestive of undersea mining by an enormous undersea orb. Attempts to describe this away as a natural process are laughable. I don’t know what it is, nor do I know why it is there.
The only thing that I know is that the reality that we think of, is just an illusion.
It is entirely possible that this observed structure is something piloted by an intelligence for purposes that have no bearing or relationship to humans at all. As such, it is offered to the reader as nothing more, nor nothing less, than an intelligently piloted object that apparently defies the limits of human engineering.
Take Aways
What can we learn from this;
There are mysteries that exist under the ocean.
Not everything can be explained away as normal geologic processes.
There are huge mobile constructions that can move about under intense water pressure.
They create paths that appear to be searching or looking for something.
Other Opinions
I received this comment off-line by an influencer.
I think those “machines tracks” are an artifact of the SONAR scan, it’s called Phase Shadowing in the RADAR world. Check out Google Earth ocean bottom off the east coast of the US, say between NYC and Bermuda, it’s all over the place. I’d bet money it’s just an artifact of the signal processing but I’m only 95% sure.
I think that this is a valid observation. However…
It wouldn’t explain the roving orb phenomenon.
It wouldn’t explain why the sonar doesn’t influence the orb.
It wouldn’t explain the jockeying back and forth on the sides of the undersea cliffs.
It wouldn’t explain how some right angles are crisp, while others have a radius.
It wouldn’t explain how the tracks go under the Saipan islands and then collapse them into the sea.
It wouldn’t explain how dust and debris can obscure the tracks in certain areas.
This type of searching for answers is an important part of our role in understanding the world around us. While I have mentioned numerous “objections” to this solution, my ignorance in the way the sonar scan works should be obvious.
That being said, in my mind, it could very well be very possible that these are somehow associated with a sonar scan. I just do not know.
RFH
How about a Request For Help? I tire of busybodies and statists who poke fun at the ideas and theories of others. They offer no constructive dialog. Rather they just make fun, ridicule, and then scurry under a rock.
I use this forum as a way to disseminate some of the things that I learned though my thirty years of involvement in MAJestic. However, I am forbidden to posit my knowledge directly. I cannot tell the interested, the “secrets of the universe”. The best that I can do is share my opinions about things that interest me, and flavor it indirectly with my forbidden understandings.
To help put this in perspective, put yourself in my shoes…
Imagine that you are working at a company with a brutal NDR. You cannot divulge anything about what you are involved in for any reason.Now, let’s suppose that for thirty years you were involved in training unicorns to dance with bigfoot. To help with your training, the Lock Ness Monster would gather “magical beans” that you would award the unicorns when they did a particularly impressive dance move; like the cha cha or a nice rendition of the samba.Now, there is no way that you can talk about unicorns, bigfoot, or the Lock Ness Monster. But, the NDR doesn’t cover “magic beans”. So in the best interests of society, you might want to posit your thoughts about growing “magic beans” and how they might be of interest to imaginary creatures.That is the situation that I find myself in.
So, if you, the reader, were so interested, I would welcome your thoughts on this matter. What do you think about the plausibility that the orb and the tracks are natural geologic events? What are your thoughts about the idea that the US Navy already studied the orb with the open top? What are your thoughts on the levels of technology that must be achieved to perform these kinds of operations? Please, you are welcome to contribute.
This is my callout, to you the reader, to assist all of us in solving these mysteries. After all, this is a far better use of the internet than for looking at Justin Bieber videos.
FAQ
Q: What is causing the lines or “tracks” under the sea? A: I do not know. There are geologic processes that can create lines around stress faults, however these lines do not look like any that we know if. If they are part of a geologic process then it would be a new and interesting geologic process. One that deserves study and investigation. To me, as a layman, they appear to be tracks with nice linear debris trails. However, human technology has not advanced to the stage where we can mine at such deep depths. We just do not have that ability. Thus we have ourselves a mystery that perplexes us.
Q: What is the orb? A: No one knows, of if they do know, they are keeping it secret. It is a large, no huge, structure that is roving about on the ocean floor. It seemingly follow or retraces the linear tracks made earlier, but instead of following the path already made, it just seemingly moves randomly.
Q: What can we learn about this odd event? A: Someone or something thinks that the Lapulapu Ridge holds some valuable items or minerals. They have devoted time (obviously), and effort (certainly) to mine these elements. It is unlikely that they are human, because known human technology cannot reach the working environment that the objects operate in.
Q: Why isn’t someone investigating this? A: What makes you think that no one is investigating this? Just because CNN, WaPo, Salon and the Huffington Puffington Post thinks that there is nothing here, doesn’t mean that is actually the case. From a technical point of view, the suggestion of technologies that would enable us to mine the ocean deeps, as well as to provide military advantage for naval submarines is reason alone to investigate this mystery. Remember, boys and girls, real investigations are never publicized. They are kept secret and the work is collected and accomplished in silence.
MAJestic Related Posts – Training
These are posts and articles that revolve around how I was recruited for MAJestic and my training. Also discussed is the nature of secret programs. I really do not know why the organization was kept so secret. It really wasn’t because of any kind of military concern, and the technologies were way too involved for any kind of information transfer. The only conclusion that I can come to is that we were obligated to maintain secrecy at the behalf of our extraterrestrial benefactors.
MAJestic Related Posts – Our Universe
These particular posts are concerned about the universe that we are all part of. Being entangled as I was, and involved in the crazy things that I was, I was given some insight. This insight wasn’t anything super special. Rather it offered me perception along with advantage. Here, I try to impart some of that knowledge through discussion.
Enjoy.
MAJestic Related Posts – World-Line Travel
These posts are related to “reality slides”. Other more common terms are “world-line travel”, or the MWI. What people fail to grasp is that when a person has the ability to slide into a different reality (pass into a different world-line), they are able to “touch” Heaven to some extent. Here are posts that cover this topic.
John Titor Related Posts
Another person, collectively known by the identity of “John Titor” claimed to utilize world-line (MWI egress) travel to collect artifacts from the past. He is an interesting subject to discuss. Here we have multiple posts in this regard.
They are;
Articles & Links
You’ll not find any big banners or popups here talking about cookies and privacy notices. There are no ads on this site (aside from the hosting ads – a necessary evil). Functionally and fundamentally, I just don’t make money off of this blog. It is NOT monetized. Finally, I don’t track you because I just don’t care to.
